FOREWORD

Brief introduction to maintenance handbook of HS800UTV

The handbook is edited by Technical Center of Chongqing Huansong Industries

(Group) Co., Ltd., and is supplied to dealers and technicians as document of technique.
Mainly, the handbook gives methods to check, maintain and repair utility terrain
vehicles （UTV）, and supplies some relevant technique and performance data. Some
techniques and method inside may be used to check, maintain and repair other models of
UTV, although it is mainly for HS800UTV.
Please read the handbook through and fully understand it; otherwise, any improper
repairing and amounting would bring you problems, and accident may occur in your use.
Proper use and maintenance can guarantee UTV being driven safely, reduce its
malfunction, and help the vehicle remain its best performance.
The standards, performances and specifications mentioned in interpretation are
based on the sample in design, and they are subject to changes according to the
product’s improvement without prior notice.

First version , March,2010

Published by Chongqing Huansong Industries (Group) Co., Ltd.
Chongqing Huansong Industries (Group) Co., Ltd holds the copy right.
No publishing and reprinting without permission.
 CONTENT

CHAPTER 1
GENERAL INFORMATION

GENERAL INFORMATION……………………………………………………………………1
WATNINGS, CAUTIONS AND NOTES……………………………………………………1
DESCRIPTION……………………………………………………………………………………2
IDENTIFICATION CODE……………………………………………………………………… 3
Frame No. ………………………………………………………………………………… 3
Engine No. ………………………………………………………………………………… 3
SAFETY ………………………………………………………………………………………… 4
Handing gasoline safely…………………………………………………………………… 4
Cleaning parts……………………………………………………………………………… 5
Warning labels……………………………………………………………………………… 5
SERIAL NUMBERS…………………………………………………………………………… 6
FASTENERS…………………………………………………………………………………… 6
Torque specifications ……………………………………………………………………… 6
Self-locking fasteners……………………………………………………………………… 6
Washers…………………………………………………………………………………… 6
Cotter pins…………………………………………………………………………………… 7
Snap rings and E-clips …………………………………………………………………… 7
SHOP SUPPLIES……………………………………………………………………………… 8
Lubricants and Fluids……………………………………………………………………… 8
Engine oils…………………………………………………………………………………… 8
Greases……………………………………………………………………………………… 8
Brake fluid…………………………………………………………………………………… 9
Coolant……………………………………………………………………………………… 9
Cleaners, Degreasers and solvents …………………………………………………… 9
Gasket sealant…………………………………………………………………………… 9
Gasket remover ………………………………………………………………………… 10
Thread locking compound……………………………………………………………… 10
BASIC TOOLS ………………………………………………………………………………… 10
Screwdrivers……………………………………………………………………………… 11

-1-
 Wrenches ………………………………………………………………………………… 11
Adjustable wrenches …………………………………………………………………… 12
Socket wrenches, ratchets and handles ……………………………………………… 12
Impact drivers …………………………………………………………………………… 13
Allen wrenches…………………………………………………………………………… 13
Torque wrenches………………………………………………………………………… 14
Torque adapters ………………………………………………………………………… 14
Pliers……………………………………………………………………………………… 15
Snap ring pliers…………………………………………………………………………… 15
Hammers ………………………………………………………………………………… 16
Ignition grounding tool…………………………………………………………………… 16
PRECISION MEASURING TOOLS ………………………………………………………… 16
Feeler gauge ……………………………………………………………………………… 17
Calipers…………………………………………………………………………………… 17
Micrometers……………………………………………………………………………… 18
Adjustment ……………………………………………………………………………… 18
Care ……………………………………………………………………………………… 19
Metric micrometer………………………………………………………………………… 19
Standard inch micrometer……………………………………………………………… 20
Telescoping and small bore gauges…………………………………………………… 21
Dial Indicator……………………………………………………………………………… 21
Compression gauge……………………………………………………………………… 22
Multimeter………………………………………………………………………………… 22
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM FUNDAMENTALS……………………………………………… 22
Voltage …………………………………………………………………………………… 22
Resistance………………………………………………………………………………… 23
Amperage………………………………………………………………………………… 23
BASIC SERVICE METHODS……………………………………………………………… 23
Removing frozen fasteners……………………………………………………………… 24
Removing broken fasteners …………………………………………………………… 25
Repairing damaged threads …………………………………………………………… 25
Stud Removal/Installation ……………………………………………………………… 25
Removing hoses ………………………………………………………………………… 26
Bearings…………………………………………………………………………………… 26

-2-
 Removal…………………………………………………………………………………… 26
Installation………………………………………………………………………………… 27
Interference fit …………………………………………………………………………… 28
Seal replacement………………………………………………………………………… 29
STORAGE……………………………………………………………………………………… 30
Storage area selection…………………………………………………………………… 30
Preparing the motorcycle for storage …………………………………………………… 30
Returning the UTV to service…………………………………………………… 30
TROVBLESHOOTING……………………………………………………………………… 31
ENGINE PRINCIPLES AND OPERATING REQUIREMENTS………………………… 32
STARTING THE ENGINE ………………………………………………………………… 32
Engine is cold …………………………………………………………………………… 32
Engine is warm…………………………………………………………………………… 32
Starting the engine after a fall or after the engine stalls……………………………… 33
Flooded engine…………………………………………………………………………… 33
Engine cold with air temperature ……………………………………………………… 33
Engine cold with air temperature above 35℃（95°F）……………………………… 33
Cold engine with air temperature below 10℃(50°F) ……………………………… 33
Engine is hot……………………………………………………………………………… 34
Starting the engine after a fall or after the engine stalls……………………………… 34
Flooded engine…………………………………………………………………………… 34
ENGINE WILL NOT START ……………………………………………………………… 35
Identifying the problem ………………………………………………………………… 35
Spark test………………………………………………………………………………… 36
Starter does not turn over or turns over slowly ……………………………………… 37
POOR ENGINE PERFORMANCE………………………………………………………… 37
Engine starts but stalls and is hard to restart…………………………………………… 37
Engine backfires, cuts out or misfires during acceleration…………………………… 37
Engine backfires on deceleration……………………………………………………… 38
Poor fuel mileage………………………………………………………………………… 38
Engine will not idle or idles roughly …………………………………………………… 38
Low engine power ………………………………………………………………………… 38
Poor idle or low speed performance…………………………………………………… 40
Poor high speed performance ………………………………………………………… 40

-3-
FUEL SYSTEM……………………………………………………………………………… 41
Rich mixture……………………………………………………………………………… 41
Lean mixture……………………………………………………………………………… 41
ENGINE………………………………………………………………………………………… 42
Engine smoke……………………………………………………………………………… 42
Black smoke ……………………………………………………………………………… 42
Blue smoke………………………………………………………………………………… 42
White smoke or steam…………………………………………………………………… 42
Low engine compression ………………………………………………………………… 42
High engine compression ……………………………………………………………… 43
Engine overheating (cooling system) ………………………………………………… 43
Engine overheating (engine)…………………………………………………………… 43
Preignition………………………………………………………………………………… 43
Detonation………………………………………………………………………………… 44
Power loss ……………………………………………………………………………… 44
engine noises……………………………………………………………………………… 44
ENGLNE LUBRICATION…………………………………………………………………… 45
HIGH OIL CONSUMPTION OR EXCESSIVE……………………………………………… 45
Exhaust smoke…………………………………………………………………………… 45
Low oil pressure ………………………………………………………………………… 45
High oil pressure ………………………………………………………………………… 45
No oil pressure…………………………………………………………………………… 45
Oil level too low…………………………………………………………………………… 46
Oil contamination………………………………………………………………………… 46
CYLINDER LEAK DOWN TEST…………………………………………………………… 46
ELECTRICAL TESTING…………………………………………………………………… 48
Preliminary checks and precautions …………………………………………………… 48
Intermittent problems…………………………………………………………………… 49
Electrical component replacement ……………………………………………………… 50
Test equipment …………………………………………………………………………… 50
Ammeter …………………………………………………………………………………… 50
Self-powered test light …………………………………………………………………… 50
Ohmmeter ………………………………………………………………………………… 51
Jumper wire……………………………………………………………………………… 51

-4-
TEST PROCEDURES………………………………………………………………………… 52
Voltage test……………………………………………………………………………… 52
Voltage drop test………………………………………………………………………… 52
Peak voltage test………………………………………………………………………… 53
Continuity test……………………………………………………………………………… 53
Testing for a short with a self-powered test light or ohmmeter……………………… 54
Testing for a short with a test light or voltmeter………………………………………… 54
BRAKE SYSTEM……………………………………………………………………………… 54
Soft or spongy brake lever or pedal…………………………………………………… 54
Brake drag………………………………………………………………………………… 55
Hard brake lever or pedal operation…………………………………………………… 56
Brake Grabs……………………………………………………………………………… 56
Brake squeal or chatter ………………………………………………………………… 56
Leaking brake caliper …………………………………………………………………… 57
Leaking master cylinder………………………………………………………………… 57

CHAPTER 2
SPECIFICATIONS

HOW TO USE CONVERSION TABLE OF UNIT…………………………………………… 58

How to use conversion table…………………………………………………………… 58
Definition of unit ………………………………………………………………………… 58
GEBERAR SPECIFICATIONS ……………………………………………………………… 59
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS ………………………………………………………………… 62
CHASSIS SPECIFICATIONS………………………………………………………………… 68
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS…………………………………………………………… 70
TIGHTENING TORQUES …………………………………………………………………… 72
Engine tightening torques………………………………………………………………… 72
Chassis tightening torques ……………………………………………………………… 75
GENERAL TIGHTENING TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS ………………………………… 77
LUBRICATION PIONTS AND LUBRICANT TYPES……………………………………… 78
Engine……………………………………………………………………………………… 78
Chassis……………………………………………………………………………………… 79
HYDROGRAPHIC CHART…………………………………………………………………… 80

-5-
ENGINE GEARBOX LUBRICATION OIL PARTH CIRCUIT……………………………… 81

CHAPTER 3
MAINTENCE AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE UTV

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE……………………………………………………………… 83
ENGINE
Adjusting the valve clearance…………………………………………………………… 85
Checking the spark plug ………………………………………………………………… 88
Checking the ignition timing……………………………………………………………… 89
Measuring the compression pressure………………………………………………… 90
Checking the engine oil level …………………………………………………………… 91
Changing the engine oil ………………………………………………………………… 92
CHASSIS
Cleaning the air filter………………………………………………………………… 94
Checking the coolant level …………………………………………………………… 95
Changing the coolant…………………………………………………………………… 96
Checking the coolant temperature warning light …………………………………… 99
Checking the v-belt……………………………………………………………………… 100
Cleaning the spark arrester …………………………………………………………… 101
Adjusting the brake pedal……………………………………………………………… 102
Checking the brake fluid level ………………………………………………………… 103
Checking the front brake pads………………………………………………………… 104
Checking the rear brake pads………………………………………………………… 104
Checking the brake hoses and brake pipes ………………………………………… 105
Bleeding the hydraulic brake system ………………………………………………… 105
Adjusting the select lever shift rod …………………………………………………… 107
Adjusting the brake light switch ……………………………………………………… 107
Checking the final gear oil level ……………………………………………………… 108
Changing the final gear oil……………………………………………………………… 108
Checking the differential gear oil……………………………………………………… 109
Changing the differential gear oil……………………………………………………… 109
Checking the constant velocity joint dust boots……………………………………… 110

-6-
 Checking the steering system………………………………………………………… 111
Adjusting the toe-in …………………………………………………………………… 112
Adjusting the front and rearshock absorbers………………………………………… 113
Checking the tires ……………………………………………………………………… 114
Checking the wheels…………………………………………………………………… 116
Checking and lubricating the cables ………………………………………………… 116
ELECTRICAL
Checking and charging the battery…………………………………………………… 117
Checking the fuses …………………………………………………………………… 123
Adjusting the headlight beam ………………………………………………………… 125
Changing the headlight bulb ………………………………………………………… 125
Changing the tail/brake light bulb …………………………………………………… 126

CHAPTER 4
ENGINE

ENGINE NOTE……………………………………………………………………………… 128

ENGINE REMOVAL………………………………………………………………………… 129
CYLINDER HEAD AND CYLINDER HEAD COVER…………………………………… 131
ROCKER ARMS AND CAMSHAFT……………………………………………………… 136
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS………………………………………………………… 139
CYLINDER AND PISTON………………………………………………………………… 144
ENGINE LEFT CRANKCASE COVER A.C. MAGNETO…………………………………148
STARTER MOTOR AND OIL FILTER………………………………………………………152

PRIMARY AND SECONDARY SHEAVES…………………………………………………156

CRANKCASE COVER AND OIL PUMP …………………………………………………160
CRANKCASE AND MIDDLE DRIVEN SHAFT ……………………………………………164
OUTPUT SHAFT………………………………………………………………………………170
GEARCASE
Shift lever and oil pump ………………………………………………………………………174
Gearcase transmission ……………………………………………………………………… 176

-7-
 CHAPTER 5
CHASSIS

MALFUNCTION INSPECTION…………………………………………………………… 181

DIRECTION SYSTEM
The structure of the steering…………………………………………………………… 184
The structure of steering wheel part…………………………………………………… 188
Diassembling the parts of the steering wheel ………………………………………… 188
Checking the parts of the steering wheel……………………………………………… 188
Diassembling the steering column parts……………………………………………… 189
Checking and service the steering column parts……………………………………… 190
Diassembling the steering drive axle ………………………………………………… 190
Checking and service the steering drive axle………………………………………… 191
The machine parts………………………………………………………………… 192
The structure of the steering………………………………………………………… 192
BRAKE SYSTEM…………………………………………………………………………… 193
Preparation for checking before the maintenance of the brake system …………… 193
Disk brake components ……………………………………………………………… 194
Front brake caliper ……………………………………………………………………… 196
Checking the front brake disc ………………………………………………………… 198
Replacing the front brake pads………………………………………………………… 199
Disassembling the front brake calipers ……………………………………………… 201
Assembling the front brake calipers…………………………………………………… 202
Installing the front brake calipers …………………………………………………… 202
Rear brake calipers……………………………………………………………………… 204
Checking the rear brake disc…………………………………………………………… 207
Replacing the rear brake pads………………………………………………………… 208
Disassembling the rear brake caliper ………………………………………………… 209
Assembling the rear brake caliper ………………………………………………… 210
Installing the rear brake caliper ………………………………………………… 212
Checking the master cylinder ………………………………………………………… 213
Assembling the brake master cylinder………………………………………………… 213
Installing the brake master cylinder…………………………………………………… 214

-8-
FOOTREST ASSEMBLY ………………………………………………………………… 215
WHEEL AND TYRE PARTS ……………………………………………………………… 218
Front wheels……………………………………………………………………………… 218
Rear wheels……………………………………………………………………………… 219
Checking the wheel tyre………………………………………………………………… 220
Checking the wheel hub………………………………………………………………… 220
Installing the wheel hub………………………………………………………………… 221
Installing the wheel tyre………………………………………………………………… 221
Specification of wheel and tyre………………………………………………………… 222
TRANSMISSION SYSTEM ………………………………………………………………… 223
Front bridge……………………………………………………………………………… 223
Disassembling the universal joint …………………………………………………… 229
Checking the joints……………………………………………………………………… 230
Assembling the universal joint……………………………………………………………231
Rear bridge ……………………………………………………………………………… 232
REVERSE MECHANISM PARTS ……………………………………………………… 239
Adjusting reverse mechanism parts ………………………………………………… 241
Checking and service of reverse mechanism………………………………………… 242
SUSPENSION……………………………………………………………………………… 243
Front Suspension……………………………………………………………………… 243
Front arm…………………………………………………………………………… 245
Disassembling, service and assembly the supporting rocker parts………………… 247
Checking the stabilizer…………………………………………………………………… 248
Checking the steering knuckles………………………………………………………… 248
Checking the front arms ………………………………………………………………… 248
Checking the front shock absorber…………………………………………………… 249
Installing the front arms and front shock absorber ………………………………… 250
Rear suspension ……………………………………………………………………… 251
Rear arm shaft…………………………………………………………………………… 252
Checking and service of rear suspension …………………………………………… 254
Checking the stabilizer…………………………………………………………………… 255
Checking the steering knuckles………………………………………………………… 255
Checking the rear arms………………………………………………………………… 255
Checking the rear shock absorber ………………………………………… 255

-9-
 Installing the rear arms and rear shock absorber …………………………………… 256
COOLING SYSTEM………………………………………………………………………… 257
Radiator ………………………………………………………………………………… 257
Checking the radiator…………………………………………………………………… 261
Installing the radiator…………………………………………………………………… 262
Oil cooler …………………………………………………………………………… 263
Checking the oil cooler ………………………………………………………………… 265
Water pump……………………………………………………………………………… 266
Disassembling the water pump ……………………………………………………… 270
Checking the water pump……………………………………………………………… 271
Assembling the water pump…………………………………………………………… 272
SEAT ………………………………………………………………………………………… 273
Disassembling the seat……………………………………………………… 277
Moving seat forward and backward …………………………………………………… 277
FUEL TANK………………………………………………………………………………… 278

CHAPTER 6
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM MALFUNCTION INSPECTION ……………………………… 281

ELECTRICAL ……………………………………………………………………………… 282
ELECTRICALCOMPONENTS……………………………………………………………… 282
CHECKING THE SWITCH……………………………………………………………… 284
Checking the switch…………………………………………………………………… 284
Checking the switch continuity ……………………………………………………… 285
CHECKING THE BULBS AND BULB SOCKETS …………………………………… 286
IGNITION SYSTEM ……………………………………………………………………… 287
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ……………………………………………………………………… 287
TROUBLESHOOTING …………………………………………………………………… 288
ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM ……………………………………………………… 291
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ……………………………………………………………………… 291
TROUBLESHOOTING …………………………………………………………………… 292
STARTER MOTOR ……………………………………………………………………… 295

- 10 -
 Checking the starter motor …………………………………………………………… 296
Assembling the starter motor ………………………………………………………… 297
CHARGING SYSTEM …………………………………………………………………… 298
Circuit diagram………………………………………………………………………… 298
TROUBLESHOOTING …………………………………………………………………… 299
LIGHTING SYSTEM ……………………………………………………………………… 301
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ……………………………………………………………………… 301
TROUBLESHOOTING …………………………………………………………………… 302
CHECKING THE LIGHTING SYSTEM ………………………………………………… 303
If the headlights fail to come on ……………………………………………………… 303
If the taillights fail to come on ……………………………………………………… 304
SIGNALING SYSTEM …………………………………………………………………… 305
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ……………………………………………………………………… 305
TROUBLESHOOTING …………………………………………………………………… 306
CHECKING THE SIGNAL SYSTEM …………………………………………………… 307
If the brake lights fail to come on …………………………………………………… 307
If the neutral lights fail to come on ………………………………………………… 308
If the parking brake indicator light fails to come on ………………………………… 309
If the reverse indicator light fails to come on ……………………………………… 310
If the coolant temperature warning ………………………………………………… 311
If the differential gear lock indicator light fails to come on ………………………… 313
If the four-wheel drive indicator light fails to come on …………………………… 315
COOLING SYSTEM ……………………………………………………………………… 317
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ……………………………………………………………………… 317
TROUBLESHOOTING …………………………………………………………………… 318
2WD/4WD SELECTING SYSTEM ……………………………………………………… 321
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ……………………………………………………………………… 321
TROUBLESHOOTING …………………………………………………………………… 322

CHAPTER 7
ENGINE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

INTRODUCTION
Ems (engine management system) …………………………………………………… 323

- 11 -
 Typical components of EMS………………………………………………………………323
Layout of EMS components………………………………………………………………324
COMPONENTS OF EMS
Electronic control unit …………………………………………………………………… 324
Multec 3.5 injectors ……………………………………………………………………… 325
Throttle body assembly(with stepper motor) …………………………………………329
Engine coolant temperature sensor …………………………………………………… 331
Intake air pressure and temperature sensor ……………………………………………331
Oxygen sensor …………………………………………………………………………… 332
Ignition coil………………………………………………………………………………… 332
Fuel pump module…………………………………………………………………………336
EMS FAULT DIAGNOSIS
EME fault diagnosis ………………………………………………………………………342
Fault code list………………………………………………………………………………342

CHAPTER 8
TROUBLESHOOTING

STARTING FAILURE/HARD STARTING………………………………………………… 344

Fuel system ……………………………………………………………………………… 344
Electrical system ………………………………………………………………………… 344
Compression system …………………………………………………………………… 345
POOR IDLE SPEED PERFORMANCE ………………………………………………… 345
Poor idle speed performance…………………………………………………………… 345
POOR MEDIUM AND HIGH-SPEED PERFORMANCE ……………………………… 346
Poor medium and high-speed performance………………………………………… 346
FAULTY GEAR SHIFTING………………………………………………………………… 346
Shift lever does not move ……………………………………………………………… 346
Jumps out of gear……………………………………………………………………… 346
OVERHEATING……………………………………………………………………………… 346
Overheating……………………………………………………………………………… 346
FAULTY BRAKE…………………………………………………………………………… 347
Poor braking effect……………………………………………………………………… 347

- 12 -
SHOCK ABSORBER MALFUNCTION………………………………………………… 347
Malfunction ……………………………………………………………………………… 347
UNSTABLE HANDLING…………………………………………………………………… 347
Unstable handling ……………………………………………………………………… 345
LIGHTING SYSTEM………………………………………………………………………… 348
Head light is out of work………………………………………………………………… 348
Bulb burnt out…………………………………………………………………………… 348

HS800UTV WIRING DIAGRAM…………………………………………………………… 349

- 13 -
 GENERAL INFORMATION

GENERAL INFORMATION
The text provides complete information on maintenance，tune-up repair and overhaul，Hundreds of
photographs and illustrations created during the complete disassembly of four wheel all-terrain
vehicles (UTV) guide the reader through every job，All procedures are in step-by-step format and
designed for the reader who may be working on the UTV for the first time.

WARNINGS, CAUTIONS AND NOTES

The terms WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE have specific meaning in this manual.

WARNING: emphasizes areas where injury or even death could result from negligence.
Mechanical damage may also occur. WARNINGS are to be taken seriously
CAUTION: emphasizes areas where equipment damage could result. Disregarding a
CAUTION could cause permanent mechanical damage. though injury is unlikely.
NOTE: provides additional information to make a step or procedure easier or clearer.
Disregarding a NOTE could cause inconvenience. but would not cause
equipment damage or injury.

-1-
GENERAL INFORMATION

DESCRIPTION
1. Headlights
2. Front shock absorber spring
preload Adjusting ring
3. Rear brake fluid reservoir
4. Parking brake lever
5. Driver seat
6. Battery
7. Fuses
8. Left shoulder protection plate
9. Driver seat belt
10. Air filter case (engine and air
intake duct)
11. Cargo bed
12. Tail/brake lights
13. Spark arrester
14. Rear shock absorber assembly
adjusting ring
15. V-belt case
16. Passenger seat belt
17. right shoulder protection plate
18. Spark plug
19. Oil filter cartridge
20. Fuel tank cap
21. Passenger seat
22. rearview mirror
23. Coolant reservoir
24. Radiator cap
25. Steering wheel
26. Light switch
27. Main switch
28. On-Command four-wheel-drive
and differential lock switches
29. Multi-function meter unit
30. Auxiliary DC jack
31. Brake pedal
32. Accelerator pedal
33. Drive select lever
34. passenger handrail

NOTE:
The vehicle you have purchased may
differ slightly from those in the figures of
this manual.

-2-
GENERAL INFORMATION

IDENTIFICATION CODE

Frame No.
Frame No. is carved on the right side of front
main frame

Engine No.
Engine NO. Is carved on the right side of the
engine, Figure.

-3-
 GENERAL INFORMATION
SAFETY

Professional mechanics can work for years and never sustain a serous injury or mishap. Follow
these guidelines and practice common sense to safely service the utility terrain venires
1. Do not operate the utility terrain venires in an enclosed area venires The exhaust gasses contain
carbon monoxide. an odorless, colorless and tasteless poisonous gas. Carbon monoxide levels
build quickly in small enclosed areas and can cause unconsciousness and death in a short time.
Make sure to properly ventilate the work area or operate the UTV side
2. Never use gasoline or any extremely flammable liquid to clean parts. Refer to cleaning parts and
handling Gasoline Safely in this section
3. Never smoke or use a torch in the vicinity of flammable liquids, such as gasoline or cleaning
solvent.
4. If welding or brazing on the UTV the fuel tank to a safe distance at least 50ft.(15m) away.
5. Use the correct type and size of tools to avoid damaging fasteners.
6. Keep tools clean and in good condition. Replace or repair worn or damaged equipment.
7. When loosening a tight fastener, be guided by what would happen if the tool slips.
8. When replacing fasteners, make sure the new fasteners are the same size and strength as the
original ones.
9. Keep the work area clean and organized.
10. Wear eye protection anytime the safety of the eyes is in question. This includes procedures that
involve drilling, grinding, hammering, compressed air and chemicals.
11. Wear the correct clothing for the job. Tie up or cover long hair so it does not get caught in moving
equipment.
12. Do not carry sharp tools in clothing pockets.
13. Always have an approved fire extinguisher available. Make sure it is rated for gasoline (Class B)
and electrical (Class C) fires.
14. Do not use compressed air to clean clothes, the UTV or the work area. Debris may be blown into
the eyes or skin. Never direct compressed air at anyone. Do not allow children to use or play with
any compressed air equipment.
15. When using compressed air to dry rotating parts, hold the part so it does not rotate. Do not allow
the force of the air to spin the part. The air jet is capable of rotating parts at extreme speed. The
part may disintegrate of become damaged, causing serious injury.
16. Do not inhale the dust created by brake pad and clutch wear. These particles may contain
asbestos. In addition, some types of insulating materials and gaskets may contain asbestos.
Inhaling asbestos particles is hazardous to one’s health.
17. Never work on the UTV while someone is working under it.

Handling Gasoline Safely

Gasoline is a volatile flammable liquid and is one of the most dangerous items in the shop.
Because gasoline is used so often, many people forget it is hazardous. Only use gasoline as fuel
for gasoline internal combustion engines. Keep in mind when working on the machine, gasoline is
always present in the fuel tank, fuel line and carburetor. To avoid a disastrous accident when
working around the fuel system, carefully observe the following precautions:
1. Never use gasoline to clean parts. Refer to Cleaning Parts in this section.
-4-
 GENERAL INFORMATION
2. When working of the fuel system, work outside or in a well-ventilated area.
3. Do not add fuel to the fuel tank or service the fuel system while the UTV is near open flames,
sparks or where someone is smoking .Gasoline vapor is heavier than air, it collects in low areas
and is more easily ignited than liquid gasoline.
4. Allow the engine to cool completely before working on any fuel system component.
5. Do not store gasoline in glass containers. If the glass breaks, a serious explosion of fire may
occur.
6. Immediately wipe up spilled gasoline with rags. Store the rags in a metal container with a lid until
they can be properly disposed of, or place them outside in a safe place for the fuel to evaporate.
7. Do not pour water onto a gasoline fire. Water spreads the fire and makes it more difficult to put out.
Use a class B, BC or ABC fire extinguisher to extinguish the fire.
8. Always turn off the engine before refueling. Do not spill fuel onto the engine or exhaust system.
Do not overfill the fuel tank. Leave an air space at the top of the tank to allow room for the fuel to
expand due to temperature fluctuations.

Cleaning Parts
Cleaning parts is one of the more tedious and difficult service jobs performed in the home garage.
Many types of chemical cleaners and solvents are available for shop use. Most are poisonous and
extremely flammable. To prevent chemical exposure, vapor buildup, fire and serious injury, observe
each product warning label and note the following:
1. Read and observe the entire product label before using any chemical. Always know what type of
chemical is being used and whether it is poisonous and/or flammable.
2. Do not use more than one type of cleaning solvent at a time. If mixing chemicals is required,
measure the proper amounts according to the manufacturer.
3. Work in a well-ventilated area.
4. Wear chemical-resistant gloves.
5. Wear safety glasses.
6. Wear a vapor respirator if the instructions call for it.
7. Wash hands and arms thoroughly after cleaning parts.
8. Keep chemical products away from children and pets.
9. Thoroughly clean all oil, grease and cleaner residue from any part that must be heated.
10. Use a nylon brush when cleaning parts. Metal brushes may cause a spark.
11. When using a parts washer, only use the solvent recommended by the manufacturer. Make sure
the parts washer is equipped with a metal lid that will lower in case of fire.

Warning Labels
Most manufacturers attach information and warning labels to the UTV. These labels contain
instructions that are important to personal safety when operating, servicing, transporting and storing
the UTV. Refer to the owner’s manual for the description and location of labels. Order replacement
labels from the manufacturer if they are missing or damaged.

-5-
 GENERAL INFORMATION
SERIAL NUMBERS
Serial and identification numbers are stamped on various locations on the frame, engine and
carburetor body. Record these numbers in the Quick Reference Data section in the front of the manual.
Have these numbers available when ordering parts.

FASTENERS
Proper fastener selection and installation is important to ensure the motorcycle operates as
designed and can be serviced efficiently. The choice of original equipment fasteners is not arrived at
by chance. Make sure replacement fasteners meet all the same requirements as the originals
Many screws. Bolts and studs are combined with nuts to secure particular components. to indicate
the size of a nut. Manufactures specify the internal diameter and the thread pitch
The measurement across two flats on a nut or bolt indicates the wrench size

WARNING
Do not install fasteners with a strength
classification lower than what was originally
installed by the manufacturer doing so may cause
equipment failure and or damage

Torque Specifications
The material used in the manufacturing of the UTV may be subjected to uneven stresses if the
fasteners of the various subassemblies are not installed and tightened correctly. Fasteners that are
improperly installed or work loose can cause extensive damage. it is essential to use an accurate
torque wrench as described in this chapter

Self-Locking Fasteners
Several types of bolts. Screws and nuts incorporate a system that creates interference between
the two fasteners. Interference is achieved in various ways. The most common types are the nylon
insert nut and a dry adhesive coating on the threads of a blot.
Self-locking fasteners offer greater holding strength than standard fasteners, which improves their
resistance to vibration. All self-locking fasteners cannot be reused. The materials used to from the lock
become distorted after the initial installation and removal. Discard and replace self-locking fasteners
after removing them. Do not replace self-locking fasteners with standard fasteners.

Washers
The two basic types of washers are flat washers and lock washers. Flat washers are simple discs
with a hole to fit a screw or bolt. Lock washers are used to prevent a fastener from working loose.
Washers can be used as spacers and seals. Or can help distribute fastener load and prevent the
fastener from damaging the component
As with fasteners. When replacing washers make sure the replacement washers are of the same

-6-
 GENERAL INFORMATION
design and quality

Cotter Pins
A cotter pin is a split metal pin inserted into a hole or slot to prevent a fastener from loosening. In
certain applications, such as the rear axle on an UTV or motorcycle, the fastener must be secured in
this way. For these applications. A cotter pin and castellated (slotted) nut is used.
To use a cotter pin, first make sure the diameter is correct for the hole in the fastener. Aster
correctly tightening the fastener and aligning the holes, insert the cotter pin through the hole and bend
the ends over the fastener, Unless instructed to do so, never loosen a tightened fastener to align the
holes. If the holes do not align. Tighten the fastener enough to achieve alignment
Cotter pins are available in various diameters and lengths. Measure the length from the bottom of
the head to the tip of the shortest pin

Snap Rings and E-clips

Snap rings (Figure 1) are circular-shaped metal
retaining clips. They secure parts in place on parts
such as shafts. External type snap rings are used to
retain items on shafts. Internal type snap rings secure
parts within housing bores. In some applications. in
addition to securing the component(s). snap rings of
varying thicknesses also determine endplay. These
are usually called selective snap rings.
The two basic types of snap rings are machined
and stamped snap rings. Machined snap rings (Figure
2) can be installed in either direction. Because both
faces have sharp edges. Stamped snap rings (Figure
3) are manufactured with a sharp and a round edge.
When installing a stamped snap ring in a thrust
application, install the sharp edge facing away from
the part producing the thrust.
E-clips are used when it is not practical to use a
snap ring. Remove E-clips with a flat blade
screwdriver by prying between the shaft and E-clip. To
install an E-clip. Center it over the shaft groove and
push or tap it into place
Observe the following when installing snap rings:
1. Remove and install snap rings with snap rings
pliers. Refer to Basic Tools in this chapter
2. In some applications. it may be necessary to
replace snap rings after removing them
3. Compress or expand snap rings only enough to
install them. If overly expanded. Lose their
retaining ability

-7-
 GENERAL INFORMATION
4. After installing a snap ring. Make sure it seats completely
5. Wear eye protection when removing and installing snap rings

SHOP SIPPLIES
Lubricants and Fluids
Periodic lubrication help ensure a long service life for any type of equipment. Using the correct
type of lubricant is as important as performing the lubrication service. Although in an emergency the
wrong type is better than not using one, The following section describes the types of lubricants most
often required. Make sure to follow the manufacturer’s recommendations for lubricant types

Engine oils
Engine oil for four-stroke the UTV engine use is classified by two standards: the American
Petroleum Institute (API) service classification. The Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) viscosity
rating Standard classification
The API and SAE information is on all oil container labels. Two letters indicate the API service
classification. The number or sequence of numbers and letter (10W-40SG for example) is the oil’s
viscosity rating. The API service classification and the SAE viscosity index are not indications of oil
quality.
The APL service classification standards, The first letter in the classification S indicates that the oil
is for gasoline engines. The second letter indicates the standard the oil satisfies .
The classifications are: MA (high friction applications) and MB( low frication applications).

NOTE
Refer to Engine Oil and Filter in
Chapter Three for further information
on API, SAE classifications.

Always use an oil with a classification recommended by the manufacturer, Using an oil with a
different classification can cause engine damage.
Viscosity is an indication of the oil’s thickness. Thin oils have a lower number while thick oil have a
higher number. Engine oils fall into the 5-to50-weight range for single-grade oils.
Most manufactures recommend multi-grade oil. These oils perform efficiently across a wide
range of operating conditions. Multi-grade oils are identified by a W after the first number, which
indicates the low-temperature viscosity.
Engine oils are most commonly mineral (petroleum) based, but synthetic and semi-synthetic types
are used more frequently. When selecting engine oil, follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for
type, classification and viscosity.

Greases
Grease is lubricating oil with thickening agents added to it. The National Lubricating Grease
Institute (NLGI) grades grease. Grades range from No.000 to No.6, with No.6 being the thickest.

-8-
 GENERAL INFORMATION
Typical multipurpose grease is NLGI No.2. For specific applications, manufacturers may recommend
water-resistant type grease or one with an additive such as molybdenum disulfide (MoS2).

Brake fluid
Brake fluid is the hydraulic fluid used to transmit hydraulic pressure (force) to the wheel brakes.
Brake fluid is classified by the Department of Transportation (DOT). Current designations for brake
fluid are DOT 3, DOT 4 and DOT 5, this classification appears on the fluid container.
Each type of brake fluid has its own definite characteristics. Do not intermix different types of brake
fluid as this may cause brake system failure. DOT 5 brake fluid is silicone based. DOT 5 is not
compatible with other brake fluids may cause brake system failure. When adding brake fluid, only use
the fluid recommended by the manufacturer.
Brake fluid will damage any plastic, painted or plated surface it contacts. Use extreme care when
working with brake fluid and remove any spills immediately with soap and water.
Hydraulic brake systems require clean and moisture free brake fluid. Never reuse brake fluid.
Keep containers and reservoirs properly sealed.

WARNING
Never put a mineral-based (Petroleum) oil into the
brake system. Mineral oil causes rubber parts in
the system to causing complete brake failure.

Coolant
Coolant is a mixture of water and antifreeze used to dissipate engine heat. Ethylene glycol is the
most common from of antifreeze. Check the UTV Manufacturer’s recommendations when selecting
antifreeze. Most require one specifically designed for aluminum engines. There types of antifreeze
have additives that inhibit corrosion.
Only mix antifreeze with distilled water. Impurities in tap water may damage internal cooling
system passages.

Cleaners, Degreasers and Solvents

Many chemicals are available to remove oil, grease and other residue from the UTV. Before using
cleaning solvents, consider how they will be used and disposed of , particularly if they are not
water-soluble. Local ordinances may types of cleaning chemicals. Refer to Safer in this chapter.
Use brake parts cleaner to brake system components. Brake parts cleaner leaves no residue. Use
electrical contact cleaner is a powerful solvent used to remove fuel deposits and varnish from fuel
system components. Use this cleaner carefully, as it may damage finishes.
Most solvents are designed to be used with a parts washing cabinet for individual component
cleaning. For safety, use only nonflammable or high flash point solvents.

Gasket Sealant
Sealant is used in combination with a gasket or seal. In other applications, such as between

-9-
 GENERAL INFORMATION
crankcase halves, only a sealant is used. Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation when using a
sealant. Use extreme care when choosing a sealant different sealant based on its resistance to heat,
various fluids and its sealing capabilities.

Gasket Remover
Aerosol gaskets remover can help remove stubborn gasket. This product can speed up the
removal process and prevent damage to the mating surface that may be caused by using a scraping
tool. Most of these types of products are very caustic. Follow the gasket remover manufacturer’s
instructions for use.

Thread locking Compound

A thread locking compound is a fluid applied to the threads of fasteners. After tightening the
fastener, the fluid dries and becomes a solid filler between the threads. This makes it difficult for the
fastener to work loose from vibration or hear expansion and contraction. Some thread locking
compound sparingly. Excess fluid can run into adjoining parts.

CAUTION
Thread locking compounds are anaerobic and will
stress, crack and attack most plastics. Use caution
when using these products in areas where there are
plastic components.

Thread locking compounds are available in a wide range of compounds for various strength,
temperature and repair applications. Follow the manufacturer’s recommendations regarding
compound selection.

BASIC TOOLS
Most of the procedures in this manual can be carried out with basic hand tools and test equipment
familiar to the home mechanic. Always use the correct tools for the job. Keep tools organized and
clean. Store them in a tool chest with related tools organized together.
Quality tools are essential. The best are constructed of high-strength alloy steel. These tools are
light, easy to use and resistant to wear. Their working surface is devoid of sharp edges and carefully
polished. They have an easy-to-clean finish and are comfortable to use. Quality tools are a good
investment.
Some of the procedures in this manual specify special tools. In many cases the tools is illustrated
in use. Those with a large tool kit may be able to replacement. However, in some cases, the
specialized equipment or expertise may make it impractical for the home mechanic to attempt the
procedure. When necessary, such operations are recommended to have a dealership or specialist
perform the task. It may be less expensive to have a professional perform these jobs, especially when
considering the cost of equipment.
When purchasing tools to perform the procedures covered in this manual, consider the tool’s
potential frequency of use. If a tool kit is just now being started. Consider purchasing a basic tool set

- 10 -
 GENERAL INFORMATION
from a quality tool combinations and offer substantial savings when complicated, specialized tools can
be added.

Screwdrivers
Screwdrivers of various lengths and types are mandatory for the simplest tool kit. The two basic
types are the slotted tip (flat blade) and the Phillips tip. These are available in sets that often include an
assortment of tip size and shaft lengths.
As with all tools, use a screwdriver designed for the job. Make sure the size of the fastener. Use
them only for driving screws. Never use a screwdriver for
prying or chiseling metal. Repair or replace worn or
damaged screwdrivers. A worn tip may damage the
fastener, making it difficult to remove.
Phillips-head screws are often damaged by
incorrectly fitting screwdrivers. Quality Phillips
screwdrivers are manufactured with their crosshead tip
machined to Phillips Screw Company specifications.
Poor quality or damaged Phillips screwdrivers can back
out (cam out) and round over the screw head. In addition.
Weak or soft screw materials can make removal difficult.
The best type of screwdriver to use on Phillips
screw is the ACR Phillips II screwdriver, patented by the
horizontal anti-cam out ribs found on the driving faces or
flutes of the screwdriver’s tip (figure 4). ACR Phillips II
screwdrivers were designed as part of a manufacturing
drive system to be used with ACR Phillips II screws, but
they work of tool companies offer ACR Phillips II
screwdrivers in different Tip size and interchangeable
bits to fit screwdriver bit holders.

NOTE
Another way to prevent cam out and to increase
the grip of a Phillips screwdriver is to apply valve
grinding compound or permute screw ＆ socket
Gripper onto the screwdriver tip.After
loosening/tightening the screw, clean the screw
recess to prevent engine oil contamination.

Wrenches
Open-end, box-end and combination wrenches
(figure 5) are available in a variety of types and sizes.
The number stamped on the wrench refers to the distance of the fastener head.
The box-end wrench is an excellent tool because it grips the fastener on all sides. This reduces
the chance of the tool slipping. The box-end wrench is designed with either a 6 or 12-point opening.

- 11 -
 GENERAL INFORMATION
For stubborn or damaged fasteners, the 6-point
provides superior holding because it contacts the
fastener across a wider area at all six edges. For
general use, the 12-point works well. It allows the
wrench to be removed and reinstalled without moving
the handle over such a wide are.
An open-end wrench is fast and works best in
areas with limited overhead access. It contacts the
fastener at only two points and is subject to slipping if
under heavy force, or if the tool or fastener is worn. A
box-end wrench is preferred in most instances,
especially when braking loose and applying the final
tightness to a fastener.
The combination wrench has a box-end on one
end and an open-end on one end and an open-end on
the other. This combination makes it a convenient tool.

Adjustable wrenches
An adjustable wrench or Crescent wrench (Figure
6) can fit nearly any nut or bolt head that has clear
access around its entire perimeter. An adjustable
wrench is best used as a backup wrench to keep a
large nut or bolt from turning while the other end is
being loosened or tightened with a box-end or socket
wrench.
Adjustable wrenches contact the fastener at only
two points, which makes them more subject to slipping
off the fastener. Because one jaw is adjustable and
may become loose, this shortcoming is aggravated.
Make certain the solid jaw is the one transmitting the
force.

Socket Wrenches, Ratchets and

Handles
Sockets that attach to a ratchet handle (Figure 7)
are available with 6-point or 12-point openings (Figure
8) and different drive sizes. The drive size indicates
the size of the square hole that accepts the ratchet
handle. The number stamped on the socket is the size
of the work area and must the fastener head
As with wrenches. a 6-point provides superior-holding ability. While a 12-point socket needs to be
moved only half as for to reposition it on the fastener
Sockets are designated for either hand or impact use. Impact sockets are made of thicker material

- 12 -
 GENERAL INFORMATION
for more durability. Compare the size and wall thickness of a 19-mmhand socket (A, Figure 9) and the
19-mm impact socket (B). Use impact sockets when using an impact driver or air tools. Use hand
sockets with hand-driven attachments

WARNING
Do not use hand sockets with air or impact
tools because they may shatter and cause
injury. Always wear eye protection when
using impact or air tools

Various handles are available for sockets. Use the

speed handle for fast operation. Flexible ratchet heads in
varying length allow the socket to be turned with varying
force and at odd angles. Extension bars allow the socket
setup to reach difficult areas. The ratchet is the most
versatile. It allows the user to install or remove the nut without removing the socket
Sockets combined with any number of drivers make them undoubtedly the fastest. Safest and
most convenient tool for fastener removal and installation

Impact Drivers
An impact driver provides extra force for removing fasteners by converting the impact of a
hammer into a turning motion. This makes it possible to remove stubborn fasteners without damaging
them. Impact drivers and interchangeable bits (Figure 10) are available from most tool suppliers.
When using a socket with an impact driver. Make sure the socket is designed for impact use. Refer to
Socket Wrenches. Ratchets and handles in this section.

WARNING
Do not use hand sockets with air or
impact tools because they may shatter
and cause injury. Always wear eye
protection when using impact or air tools

Allen Wrenches
Use Allen or setscrew wrenches (Figure 11) on
fasteners with hexagonal recesses in the fastener
head. These wrenches are available in L-shaped bar.
Socket and T-handle types. A metric set is required
when working on most motorcycles. Allen bolts are
sometimes called socket bolts.

- 13 -
 GENERAL INFORMATION
Torque Wrenches
Use a torque wrench with a socket, torque
adapter or similar extension to tighten a fastener to a
measured torque. Torque wrenches come in several
drive sizes (1/4, 3/8, 1/2 and 3/4) and have various
methods of reading the torque value. The drive size
indicates the size of the square drive that accepts the
socket, adapter or extension. Common methods of
reading the torque value are the deflecting beam, the
dial indicator and the audible click (Figure 12).
When choosing a torque wrench, consider the
torque range, drive size and accuracy. The torque specifications in this manual provide an indication of
the range required.
A torque wrench is a precision tool that must be properly cared for to remain accurate. Store
torque wrenches in cases or separate padded drawers within a toolbox. Follow the manufacturer’s
instructions for their care and calibration.

Torque Adapters
Torque adapters or
extensions extend or reduce the
reach of a torque wrench. The
torque adapter shown in (Figure
13) is used to tighten a fastener
that cannot be reached because
of the size of the torque wrench
head, drive, and socket. If a
torque adapter changes the
effective lever length (Figure 14),
the torque reading on the wrench
will not equal the actual torque
applied to the fastener. It is
necessary to recalibrate the
torque setting on the wrench to
compensate for the change of
lever length. When using a torque
adapter at a right angle to the
drive head, calibration is not
required, because the effective
length has not changed.
To recalculate a torque
reading when using a torque adapter, use the following formula and refer to Figure 14:
TW = TA×L
L+A

- 14 -
 GENERAL INFORMATION
TW is the torque setting or dial reading on the wrench.
TA is the torque specification and the actual amount of torque that is applied to the fastener.
A is the amount that the adapter increases (or in some cases reduces) the effective lever length as
measured along the centerline of the torque wrench.
L is the lever length of the wrench as measured from the center of the drive to the center of the grip.
The effective length is the sum of L and A.
Example:

TA=20 ft.-lb.
A=3in.
L=14in.
TW=20×14=280=16.5 ft. - lb.
14+3 = 17
In this example, the torque wrench would be set
to the recalculated torque value (TW = 16.5 ft. –lb.).
When using a beam-type wrench, tighten the fastener
until the pointer aligns with 16.5 ft. –lb. In this example,
although the torque wrench is pre set to 16.5 ft. –lb.,
the actual torque is 20 ft. –lb.

Pliers
Pliers come in a wide range of types and sizes.
Pliers are useful for holding, cutting, bending, and
crimping. Do not use them to turn fasteners. Figure 15
and Figure 16 show several types of useful pliers.
Each design has a specialized function. Slip-joint
pliers are general – purpose pliers used for gripping
and bending. Diagonal cutting pliers are needed to cut
wire and can be used to remove cotter pins. Use
needle nose pliers to hold or bend small objects.
Locking pliers (Figure 16), sometimes called Vise-
Grips, are used to hold objects very tightly. They have
many uses ranging from holding two parts together, to
gripping the end of a broken stud. Use caution when
using locking pliers, as the sharp jaws will damage the
objects they hold.

Snap Ring Pliers

Snap ring pliers are specialized pliers with tips that
fit into the ends of snap rings to remove and install them.
Snap ring pliers (Figure 17) are available with a fixed action (either internal or external ) or
convertible (one tool works on both internal and external snap rings). They may have fixed tips or

- 15 -
 GENERAL INFORMATION
interchangeable ones of various sizes and angles. For general use, select a convertible type pliers
with interchangeable tips (Figure 17).

WARNING
Snap rings can slip and fly off when removing and
installing them. Also, the snap ring pliers tips may break.
Always wear eye protection when using snap ring pliers.

Hammers
Various types of hammers are available to fit a number of applications. Use a ball-peen hammer to
strike another tool, such as a punch or chisel. Use soft-faced hammers when a metal object must be
struck without damaging it. Never use a metal-faced hammer on engine and suspension components
because damage occurs in most cases.
Always wear eye protection when using hammers. Make sure the hammer face is in good
condition and the handle is not cracked. Select the correct hammer for the job and make sure to strike
the object squarely. Do not use the handle or the side of the hammer to strike an object.

Ignition Grounding Tool

Some test procedures require turning the engine
over without starting it. To prevent damage to the
ignition system from excessive resistance or the
possibility of fuel vapor being ignited by an open spark,
remove the spark plug cap and ground it directly to a
good engine ground with the tool shown in (Figure
18).
Make the tool shown from a No.6 screw and nut,
two washers, length of tubing, alligator clip, electrical eyelet and a length of wire.

PRECISION MEASURING TOOLS

The ability to accurately measure components is essential to perform many of the procedures
described in this manual. Equipment is manufactured to close tolerances, and obtaining consistently
accurate measurements is essential to determine which components require replacement or further
service.
Each type of measuring instrument is designed to measure a dimension with a certain degree of
accuracy and within a certain range. When selecting the measuring tool, make sure it is applicable to
the task.
As with all tools, measuring tools provide the best results if cared for properly. Improper use can
damage the tool and cause inaccurate results. If any measurement is questionable, verify the
measurement using another tool. A standard gauge is usually provided with micrometers to check
accuracy and calibrate the tool if necessary.
Precision measurements can vary according to the experience of the person performing the
procedure. Accurate results are only possible if the mechanic possesses a feel for using the tool.

- 16 -
 GENERAL INFORMATION
Heavy-handed use of measuring tools produces less accurate results. Hold the tool gently by the
fingertips to easily feel the point at which the tool contacts the object. This feel for the equipment
produces more accurate measurements and reduces the risk of damaging the tool or component.
Refer to the following sections for specific measuring tools.

Feeler Gauge
Use feeler or thickness gauges (Figure19) for
measuring the distance between two surfaces.
A feeler gauge set consists of an assortment of
steel strips of graduated thickness. Each blade is
marked with its thickness. Blades can be of various
lengths and angles for different procedures.
A common use for a feeler gauge is to measure
valve clearance. Use wire (round) type gauges to
measure spark plug gap.

Calipers
Calipers (Figure 20) are excellent tools for
obtaining inside, outside and depth measurements.
Although not as precise as a micrometer, they allow
reasonable precision, typically to within 0.05 mm
(0.001 in.). Most calipers have a range up to 150 mm
(6 in.).
Calipers are available in dial, venire or digital versions. Dial calipers have a dial readout that
provides convenient reading. Venire calipers have marked scales that must be compared to determine
the measurement. The digital caliper uses a liquid-crystal display (LCD) to show the measurement.
Properly maintain the measuring surfaces of the caliper. There must not be any dirt or burrs
between the tool and the object being measured. Never force the caliper to close around an object.
Close the caliper around the highest point so it can be removed with a slight drag. Some calipers
require calibration. Always refer to the manufacturer’s instructions when using a new or unfamiliar
caliper.
To read a vernire. Calipers refer to Figure 21. The
fixed scale is marked in l-mm increments. Ten
individual lines on the fixed scale equal 1 cm. The
movable scale is marked in 0.05 mm (hundredth)
increments. To obtain a reading, establish the first
number by the location of the 0 line on the movable
scale in relation to the first line to the left on the fixed
scale. In this example, the number is 10 mm. To
determine the next number, note which of the lines on
the movable scale align with a mark on the fixed scale.
A number of lines will seem close, but only one will align exactly. In this case, 0.50 mm is the reading to
add to the first number. Adding 10 mm and 0.50 mm equals a measurement of 10.50 mm.

- 17 -
 GENERAL INFORMATION

Micrometers
A micrometer is an instrument designed for linear measurement using the decimal divisions of
the inch or meter (Figure 22). While there are many types and styles of micrometers, most of the

DECIMAL PLACE VALUES*

0.1 Indicates 1/10 (one tenth of an inch or
millimeter)
0.01 Indicates 1/100 (one one-hundredth of
an inch or millimeter)
0.001 Indicates 1/1000 (one one-thousandth
of an inch or millimeter)
*This chart represents the values of figures placed to the right of the decimal point. Use
it when reading decimals from one-tenth to one one-thousandth of an inch or millimeter.
It is not a conversion chart (for example: 0.001 in. is not equal to 0.001 mm).

procedures in this manual call for an outside

micrometer. Use the outside micrometer to measure
the outside diameter of cylindrical forms and the
thickness of materials.
A micrometer’s size indicates the minimum and
maximum size of a part that it can measure. The usual
sizes (Figure 23) are 0-25mm (0-1 in.), 25-50 mm (1-2
in.), 50-75 mm (2-3 in.) and 75-100 mm (3-4 in.).
Micrometers that cover a wider range of
measurements are available. These use a large frame
with interchangeable anvils of various lengths. This type of micrometer offers a cost savings, but its
overall size may make it less convenient.
When reading a micrometer, numbers are taken from different scales and added together. The
following sections describe how to adjust, care for and read the measurements of various types of
outside micrometers.
For accurate results, properly maintain the measuring surfaces of the micrometer. There cannot
be any dirt or burrs between the tool and the measured object. Never force the micrometer to close
around an object. Close the micrometer around the highest point so it can be removed with a slight
drag.

Adjustment
Before using a micrometer, check its adjustment as follows:
1. Clean the anvil and spindle faces.
2A. To check a 0-1 in. or 0-25 mm micrometer:
a. Turn the thimble until the spindle contacts the anvil. If the micrometer has a ratchet stop, use it to

- 18 -
 GENERAL INFORMATION
ensure that the proper amount of pressure is applied.
b. If the adjustment is correct, the 0 mark on the thimble will align exactly with the 0 mark on the
sleeve line. If the marks do not align, the micrometer is out of adjustment.
c. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to adjust the micrometer.
2B. To check a micrometer larger than 1 in. or 25 mm use the standard gauge supplied by the
manufacturer. A standard gauge is a steel block, disc or rod that is machined to an exact size.
a. Place the standard gauge between the spindle and anvil, and measure its outside diameter or
length. If the micrometer has a ratchet stop, use it to ensure that the proper amount of pressure is
applied.
b. If the adjustment is correct, the 0 mark on the thimble will align exactly with the 0 mark on the
sleeve line. If the marks do not align, the micrometer is out of adjustment.
c. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to adjust the micrometer.

Care
Micrometers are precision instruments. They must
be used and maintained with great care. Note the
following:
1. Store micrometers in protective cases or separate
padded drawers in a tool box.
2. When in storage, make sure the spindle and anvil
faces do not contact each other or another object. If
they do, temperature changes and corrosion may
damage the contact faces.
3. Do not clean a micrometer with compressed air. Dirt
forced into the tool will cause wear.
4. Lubricate micrometers with WD-40 to prevent
corrosion.

Metric micrometer
The standard metric micrometer (Figure 24) is
accurate to one one-hundredth of a millimeter (0.01
mm). The sleeve line is graduated in millimeter and
half millimeter increments. The marks on the upper
half of the sleeve line equal 1.00 mm. Each fifth mark
above the sleeve line is identified with a number. The
number sequence depends on the size of the
micrometer. A 0-25 mm micrometer, for example, will
have sleeve marks numbered 0 through 25 in 5 mm
increments. This numbering sequence continues with
larger micrometers. On all metric micrometers, each mark on the lower half of the sleeve equals 0.50
mm.
The tapered end of the thimble has 50 lines marked around it. Each mark equals 0.01 mm. One
completer turn of the thimble aligns its 0 mark with the first line lower half of the sleeve line or 0.50mm.
- 19 -
 GENERAL INFORMATION
When reading a metric micrometer, add the number of millimeters and half-millimeters on the
sleeve line to the number of one one-hundredth millimeters on the thimble. Perform the following steps
while referring to Figure 25.
1. Read the upper half of the sleeve line and count
the number of lines visible. Each upper line equals
1mm.
2. See if the half –millimeter line is visible on the
lower sleeve line. If so, add 0.50mm to the reading
in Step 1.
3. Read the thimble mark that aligns with the sleeve
line. Each thimble mark equals 0.01mm.

NOTE
If a thimble mark does not align exactly
with the sleeve line. Estimate the amount between the lines.
For accurate readings in two-thousandths of a millimeter
(0.002mm), use a metric vernier micrometer.

4. Add the readings from Steps 1-3.

Standard inch micrometer

The standard inch micrometer (Figure 26) is
accurate to one-thousandth of an inch or 0.001. The
sleeve is marked in 0.025 in. increments. Every fourth
sleeve mark is numbered 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9. These
numbers indicate 0.100, 0.200, 0.300, and so on.
The tapered end of the thimble has 25 lines
marked around it. Each mark equals 0.001 in. One
complete turn of the thimble will align its zero mark
with the first mark on the sleeve or 0.025 in.
To read a standard inch micrometer, perform the
following steps and refer to Figure 27.
1. Read the sleeve and find the largest number
visible. Each sleeve number equals 0.100 in.
2. Count the number of lines between the numbered
sleeve mark and the edge of the thimble. Each
sleeve mark equals 0.025 in.
3. Read the thimble mark that aligns with the sleeve
line. Each thimble mark equals 0.01 in.

NOTE
If a thimble mark does not align exactly with the sleeve line, estimate the

- 20 -
 GENERAL INFORMATION
amount between the lines. For accurate readings in ten-thousandths of an
inch (0.0001 in), use a vernier inch micrometer.
4. Add the readings from Steps 1-3.

Telescoping and Small Bore Gauges

Use telescoping gauges (Figure 28) and small
bore gauges (Figure 29) to measure bores. Neither
gauge has a scale for direct readings. Use an outside
micrometer to determine the reading.
To use a telescoping gauge, select the correct
size gauge for the bore. Compress the movable post
and. Care fully insert the gauge into the bore. Carefully
move the gauge in the bore to make sure it is centered.
Tighten the knurled end of the gauge to hold the
movable post in position. Remove the gauge and
measure the length of the posts. Telescoping gauges
are typically used to measure cylinder bores.
To use a small bore gauge, select the correct size
gauge for the bore. Carefully insert the gauge into the
bore. Tighten the knurled end of the gauge to carefully
expand the gauge fingers to the limit within the bore.
Do not over tighten the gauge because there is no
built-in release. Excessive tightening can damage the
bore surface and damage the tool. Remove the gauge
and measure the outside dimension (Figure 30).
Small bore gauges are typically used to measure
valve guides.

Dial Indicator:
A dial indicator (Figure 31) is a gauge with a dial
face and needle used to measure variations in
dimensions and movements. Measuring brake rotor
runout is a typical use for a dial indicator.
Dial indicators are available in various ranges and
graduations and with three basic types of mounting
bases: magnetic (B. Figure 31). Clamp, or screw-in
stud. When purchasing a dial indicator, select on with
a continuous dial (A, Figure 31).
Cylinder Bore Gauge
A cylinder bore gauge is similar to a dial indicator.
The gauge set shown in Figure 32 consists of a dial
indicator, handle, and different length adapters (anvils) to fit the gauge to various bore sizes. The bore
gauge is used to measure bore size, taper and out-of-round. When using a bore gauge, follow the

- 21 -
 GENERAL INFORMATION
manufacturer’s instructions.

Compression Gauge
A compression gauge (Figure 33) measures combustion chamber (cylinder) pressure, usually in
PSI or kg/ cm2 . The gauge adapter is either inserted or screwed into the spark plug hole to obtain the
reading. Disable the engine so it does not start and
hold the throttle in the wide-open position when
performing a compression test An engine that does
not have adequate compression cannot be properly
tuned. Refer to Chapter Three.

Multimeter
A multimeter (Figure 34) is an essential tool for
electrical system diagnosis. The voltage function
indicates the voltage applied or available to various electrical components. The ohmmeter function
tests circuits for continuity, or lack of continuity, and measures the resistance of a circuit.
Some manufacturer’s specifications for electrical components are based on results using a specific
test meter. Results may vary if using a meter not recommended by the manufacturer. Such
requirements are noted when applicable.
Ohmmeter (analog) calibration
Each time an analog ohmmeter is used or if the scale is changed, the ohmmeter must be
calibrated.
Digital ohmmeters do not require calibration.
1. Make sure the meter battery is in good condition.
2. Make sure the meter probes are in good condition.
3. Touch the two probes together and observe the needle location on the ohms scale. The needle
must Align with the 0 mark to obtain accurate measurements.
4. If necessary, rotate the meter ohms adjust knob until the needle and 0 mark align.

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM FUNDAMENTALS

A thorough study of the many types of electrical systems used in today’s motorcycles is beyond
the scope of this manual. However, a basic understanding of electrical basics is necessary to perform
simple diagnostic tests.
Refer to Electrical Testing in Chapter Two for typical test procedures and equipment. Refer to
Chapter Ten for specific system test procedures.

Voltage
Voltage is the electrical potential or pressure in an electrical circuit and is expressed in volts. The
more pressure (voltage) in a circuit the more work can be performed.
Direct current (DC) voltage means the electricity flows in one direction. All circuits powered by a

- 22 -
 GENERAL INFORMATION
battery are DC circuits.
Alternating current (AC) means the electricity flows in one direction momentarily and then
switches to the opposite direction. Alternator output is an example of AC voltage. This voltage must be
changed or rectified to direct current to operate in a battery powered system.

Resistance
Resistance is the opposition to the flow of electricity within a circuit or component and is
measured in ohms. Resistance causes a reduction in available current and voltage
Resistance is measured in an inactive circuit with an ohmmeter. The ohmmeter sends a small
amount of current into the circuit and measures how difficult it is to push the current through the circuit.
An ohmmeter, although useful, is not always a good indicator of a circuit’s actual ability under
operating conditions. This is because of the low voltage (6-9 volts) the meter uses to test the circuit.
The voltage in an ignition coil secondary winding can be several thousand volts. Such high voltage can
cause the coil to malfunction, even though it tests acceptable during a resistance test.
Resistance generally. Increases with temperature. Perform all testing with the component or
circuit at room temperature. Resistance tests performed at high temperatures may indicate high
resistance readings and cause unnecessary replacement of a component.

Amperage
Amperage is the unit of measurement for the amount of current within a circuit. Current is the
actual flow of electricity. The higher the current, the more work can be performed up to a given point. If
the current flow exceeds the circuit or component capacity, it will damage the system.

BASIC SERVICE METHODS

Most of the procedures in this manual are straightforward and can be performed by anyone
reasonably competent with tools. However, consider personal capabilities carefully before attempting
any operation involving major disassembly.
1. Front, in this manual, riders to the front of the UTV, The front of any component is the end closest
to the front the UTV. The left and right sides refer to the position of the parts as viewed by the rider
sitting on the seat facing forward.
2. Whenever servicing an engine or suspension component, secure the UTV in a safe manner.
3. Tag all similar parts for location and mark all mating parts for position. Record the number and
thickness of any shims when removing them. Identify parts by placing them in sealed and labeled
plastic sandwich bags.
4. Tag disconnected wires and connectors with masking tape and a marking pen. Do not rely on
memory alone.
5. Protect finished surfaces from physical damage or corrosion. Keep gasoline and other chemicals
off painted surfaces.
6. Use penetrating oil on frozen or tight bolts. Avoid using heat where possible. Heat can warp, melt
or affect the temper of parts. Heat also damages the finish of paint and plastics.
7. When a part is a press fit or requires a special tool to remove, the information or type of tool is
identified in the text. Otherwise, if a part is difficult to remove or install, determine the cause before

- 23 -
 GENERAL INFORMATION
proceeding.
8. To prevent objects or debris from falling into the engine, cover all openings.
9. Read each procedure thoroughly and compare the illustrations to the actual components before
starting the procedure. Perform the procedure in
10. Recommendations are occasionally made to refer service to a dealership or specialist. In these
cases, the work can be performed more economically by the specialist than by the home
mechanic.
11. The term replaces means to discard a defective part and replace it with a new part. Overhaul
means to remove, disassemble, inspect, measure, repair and/or replace parts as required to
recondition an assembly.
12. Some operations require using a hydraulic press. If a press is not available, have these operations
performed by a shop equipped with the necessary equipment. Do not use makeshift equipment
that may damage the motorcycle.
13. Repairs are much faster and easier if the UTV is clean before starting work. Degrease the
motorcycle with a commercial degreaser; follow the directions on the container for the best results.
Clean all parts with cleaning solvent when removing them.

CAUTION
Do not direct high-pressure water at steering
bearings, fuel hoses, wheel bearings,
suspension and electrical components.
Water may force grease out of the bearings
and possibly damage the seals

14. If special tools are required, have them available before starting the procedure. When special
tools are required, they are described at the beginning of the procedure.
15. Make diagrams of similar-appearing parts. For instance, crankcase bolts are often not the same
lengths. Do not rely on memory alone. Carefully laid out parts can become disturbed, making it
difficult to reassemble the comports correctly.
16. Make sure all shims and washers are reinstalled in the same location and position.
17. Whenever rotating parts contact a stationary part, look for a shim or washer.
18. Use new gaskets if there is any doubt about the condition of old ones.
19. If using self-locking fasteners, replace them with new ones. Do not install standard fasteners in
place of self-locking ones.
20. Use grease to hold small parts in place if they tend to fall out during assembly. Do not apply
grease to electrical or brake components.

Removing Frozen Fasteners

If a fastener cannot be removed, several methods may be used to loosen it. First, apply a
penetrating fluid. Apply it liberally and let it penetrate for 10-15 minutes. Rap the fastener several times
with a small hammer. Do not hit it hard enough to cause damage. Reapply the penetrating fluid if
necessary.
For frozen screws, apply penetrating fluid as described, the insert a screwdriver in the slot and
rap the top of the screwdriver with a hammer. This loosens the rust so the screw can be removed in

- 24 -
 GENERAL INFORMATION
the normal way. If the screw head is too damaged to use this method, grip the head with locking pliers
and twist the screw out.
Avoid applying heat unless specifically
instructed. Heat may melt, warp or remove the temper
from parts.

Removing Broken Fasteners

If the head breaks off a screw or bolt, several
methods are available for removing the remaining
portion. If a large portion of the remainder projects out,
try gripping it with locking pliers. If the projecting
portion is too small, file it to fit a wrench of cut a slot in
it to fit a screwdriver (Figure 35)
If the head breaks off flush, use a screw extractor.
To do this, center punch the exact center of the
remaining portion of the screw or bolt. Drill a small
hole in the screw and tap the extractor into the hole.
Back the screw out with a wrench on the extractor
(Figure 36)

Repairing Damaged Threads

Occasionally, threads are stripped through
carelessness or impact damage. Often the threads
can be repaired by running a tap (for internal threads
on nuts) or die (for external threads on bolts) through
the threads (Figure 37). To clean or repair spark plug
threads, use a spark plug tap.
If an internal thread is damaged, it may be
necessary to install a Helical or some other type of
thread insert. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions
when installing their insert.
If it is necessary to drill and tap a hole, refer to
Table 8 for metric tap and drill sizes.

Stud Removal/Installation
A stud removal tool (Figure 38) is available from
most tool suppliers. This tool makes the removal and
installation of studs easier. If one is not available,
thread two must onto the stud and tighten them
against each other. Remove the stud by turning the lower nut (Figure 39).
1. Measure the height of the stud above the surface.

- 25 -
 GENERAL INFORMATION
2. Thread the stud removal tool onto the stud and
tighten it, or thread two nuts onto the stud.
3. Remove the stud by turning the stud remover
or the lower nut.
4. Remove any thread locking compound from the
threaded hole. Clean the threads with an
aerosol parts cleaner.
5. Install the stud removal tool onto the new stud
or thread two nuts onto the stud.
6. Apply thread locking compound to the threads
of the stud.
7. Install the stud and tighten with the stud removal tool or the top nut.
8. Install the stud to the height noted in Step 1 or its torque specification.
9. Remove the stud removal tool or the two nuts.

Removing Hoses
When removing stubborn hoses, do not exert excessive force on the hose or fitting. Remove the
hose, do not exert excessive force on the hose or fitting. Remove the hose clamp and carefully insert a
small screwdriver or pick tool between the fitting and hose. Apply a spray lubricant under the hose and
carefully twist the hose off the fitting. Clean the fitting of any corrosion or rubber hose material with a
wire brush Clean the inside of the hose thoroughly. Do not use any lubricant when installing the hose
(new or old). The lubricant may allow the hose to
come off the fitting, even with the clamp secure.

Bearings
Bearings are used in the engine and transmission
assembly to reduce power loss, heat and noise
resulting from friction. Because bearings are precision
parts, they must be maintained with proper lubrication
and maintenance. If a bearing is damaged, replace it
immediately. When installing a new bearing, take care
to prevent damaging it. Bearing replacement
procedures are included in the individual chapters
where applicable; however. Use the following sections
as a guideline.

NOTE
Unless otherwise specified,
install bearings with the
manufacturer’s mark or
number facing outward.

Removal
- 26 -
 GENERAL INFORMATION
While bearing are normally removed only when
damaged, there may be times when it is necessary to
remove a bearing that is in good condition. However,
improper bearing removal will damage the bearing and
possibly the shaft or case. Note the following when
removing bearings:
1. When using a puller to remove a bearing from a
shaft, take care that the shaft is not damaged.
Always place a piece of metal between the end
of the shaft and the puller screw. In addition,
place the puller arms next to the inner bearing
race. See Figure 40.
2. When using a hammer to remove a bearing from
a shaft. do not strike the hammer directly against
the shaft. Instead, use a brass or aluminum rod
between the hammer and shaft (Figure 41) and
make sure to support both bearing races with
wooden blocks as shown.
3. The ideal method of bearing removal is with a
hydraulic press. Note the following when using a
press:
a. Always support the inner and outer bearing
races with a suitable size wooden or
aluminum spacer (Figure 42). If only the
outer race is supported, pressure applie
against the balls and/or the inner race will
damage them.
b. Always make sure the press arm (Figure
42) aligns with the center of the shaft. If the
arm is not centered, it may damage the
bearing and/or shaft.
c. The moment the shaft is free of the bearing.
It drops to the floor. Secure or hold the
shaft to prevent it from falling.

Installation
1. When installing a bearing in a housing, apply
pressure to the outer bearing race (Figure 43).
When installing a bearing on a shaft, apply
pressure to the inner bearing race (Figure 44).
2. When installing a bearing as described in Step 1,
some type of driver is required. Never strike the bearing directly with a hammer or it will damage
the bearing. When installing a bearing, use a piece of pipe or a driver with a diameter that
matches the bearing inner race. Figure 45 Shows the correct way to use a driver and hammer to

- 27 -
 GENERAL INFORMATION
install a bearing.
3. Step 1 describes how to install a bearing in a
case half or over a shaft However, when installing
a bearing over a shaft and into the housing at the
same time, a tight fit is required for both outer and
inner bearing races. In this situation, install a
spacer underneath the driver tool so that pressure
is applied evenly across both races. See Figure
46. If the outer race is not supported as shown,
the balls will push against the outer bearing race
and damage it

Interference fit
1. Follow this procedure when installing a bearing over a shaft. When a tight fit is required, the
bearing inside diameter is smaller than the shaft. In this case. Driving the bearing on the shaft
using normal methods may cause bearing damage. Instead, heat the bearing before installation.
Note the following:
a. Secure the shaft so it is ready for bearing installation.
b. Clean all residues from the bearing surface of the shaft. Remove burrs with a file or
sandpaper.
c. Fill a suitable pot or beaker with clean mineral oil. Place a thermometer rated above
120℃(248°F) in the oil. Support the thermometer so it does not rest on the bottom or side
of the pot.
d. Remove the bearing from its wrapper and secure it with a piece of heavy wire bent to hold it
in the pot. Hang the bearing in the pot so it does not touch the bottom or sides of the pot.
e. Turn the heat on and monitor the thermometer. When the oil temperature rises to
approximately 120℃(248°F), remove the bearing from the pot and quickly install it. If
necessary, place a socket on the inner bearing race and tap the bearing into place. As the
bearing chills, it will tighten on the shaft, so install it quickly. Make sure the bearing is
installed completely.
2. Follow this step when installing a bearing in a housing. Bearings are general installed in a housing
with a slight interference fit Driving the bearing into the housing using normal methods may
damage the housing or cause bearing damage. Instead, heat the housing before the bearing is
installed. Note the following:

CAUTION
Before heating the housing in this procedure, wash
the housing thoroughly with detergent and water.
Rinse and rewash the cases as required to remove
all traces of oil and other chemical deposits

a. Heat the housing to approximately 100℃ (212°F) in an oven or on a hot plate. An easy way to
check that it is the proper temperature is to place tiny drops of water on the housing; if they
sizzle and evaporate immediately, the temperature is correct. Heat only one housing at a time.

- 28 -
 GENERAL INFORMATION

CAUTION
Do not heat the housing with a propane or acetylene
torch. Never bring a flame into contact with the
bearing or housing. The direct heat will destroy the
case hardening of the bearing and will likely warp
the housing.

b. Remove the housing from the oven or hot plate, and hold onto the housing with welding gloves.
It is hot!

NOTE
Remove and install the bearings with a
suitable size socket and extension.
c. Hold the housing with the bearing side down and tap the bearing out. Repeat for all bearings in
the housing.
d. Before heating the bearing housing, place the new bearing in a freezer if possible. Chilling a
bearing slightly reduces its outside diameter while the heated bearing housing assembly is
slightly larger due to heat expansion. This makes bearing installation easier.

NOTE
Always install bearings with the manufacturer’s
mark or number facing outward.
e. While the housing is still hot. Install the new bearing(s) into the housing. Install the bearings by
hand. if possible. If necessary, lightly tap the bearing(s) into the housing with a driver placed on
the outer bearing race (Figure 43). Do not install new bearings by driving on the inner-bearing
race. Install the bearing(s) until it seats completely.

Seal Replacement
Seals (Figure 47) contain oil, water, grease or
combustion gasses in a housing or shaft. Improperly
removing a seal can damage the housing or shaft.
Improperly installing the seal can damage the seat.
Note the following:
1. Prying is generally the easiest and most effective
method of removing a seal from the housing.
However. Always place a rag underneath the pry
tool to prevent damage to the housing. Note the
seal’s installed depth or if it is installed flush.
2. Pack waterproof grease in the seal lips before the seal is installed.
3. In most cases, install seals with the manufacturer’s numbers or marks facing out.
4. Install seals with a socket or driver placed on the outside of the seal as shown in. Drive the seal
squarely into the housing until it is to the correct depth or flush as noted during removal. Never
install a seal by hitting against the top of it with a hammer.

- 29 -
 GENERAL INFORMATION
STORAGE
Several months of non-use can cause a general deterioration of the motorcycle, UTV This is
especially true in areas of extreme temperature variations. This deterioration can be minimized with
careful preparation for storage. A properly stored motorcycle is much easier to return to service.

Storage Area Selection

When selecting a storage area, consider the following:
1. The storage area must be dry. A heated area is best, but not necessary. It should be insulated to
minimize extreme temperature variations.
2. If the building has large window areas, mask them to keep sunlight off the UTV .
3. Avoid buildings in industrial areas where corrosive emissions may be present. Avoid areas close to
saltwater.
4. Consider the area’s risk of fire, theft or vandalism. Check with an insurer regarding UTV coverage
while in storage.

Preparing the Motorcycle for Storage

The amount of preparation a motorcycle should undergo before storage depends on the expected
length of non-use, storage area conditions and personal preference. Consider the following list the
minimum requirement:
1. Wash the UTV thoroughly. Make sure all dirt, mud and other debris are removed.
2. Lubricate the drive chain.
3. Start the engine and allow it to reach operating temperature. Drain the engine oil regardless of the
riding time since the last service. Fill the engine with the recommended type of oil.
4. Drain the fuel tank, fuel lines and carburetor.
5. Remove the spark plug and ground the ignition system with a grounding tool as described in this
chapter. Then pour a teaspoon (15-20ml) of engine oil into the cylinder. Place a rag over the
opening and Start the engine over to distribute the oil. Remove the grounding tool and reinstall the
spark plug.
6. When the engine has cooled to room temperature, drain the cooling system drain the coolant in
the coolant reserve tank and all tank lines.
7. Cover the exhaust and intake opening.
8. Apply a protective substance to the plastic and rubber components. Make sure to follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for each type of product being used.
9. Place the UTV on a work stand with both wheels off the ground.
10. Cover the UTV with old bed sheets or something similar. Do not cover it with any plastic material
that will trap moisture.

Returning the UTV to Service

The amount of service required when returning a UTV to service after storage depends on the
length of non-use and storage conditions. In addition to performing the reverse of the procedure, note
the following:

- 30 -
 GENERAL INFORMATION
1. Remove the covers from the intake and exhaust openings.
2. Service the air filter as described in Chapter Three.
3. Inspect the cooling system. Check the drain plug and hose connections for leaks.
4. Refill the fuel tank. Turn the fuel shutoff valve on and check for fuel leaks.
5. Make sure the brakes, clutch, throttle and engine stop switch work properly before operating the
UTV. Evaluate the service intervals to determine which areas require service.
6. If the UTV has been in storage for longer than four months, change the engine oil as and filter, and
the transmission oil as described

TROVBLESHOOTING
Diagnose electrical and mechanical problems by following an orderly procedure and remembering
the basic operating requirements

Define → Symptoms

→ Which areas could exhibit these

Determine
symptoms

↓
Test and → The suspect
analyze areas

Is date → The problem

By following a systematic approach, the possibility of unnecessary parts replacement can be

avoid, always start with the simple and most obvious checks when troubleshooting, This would include
the engine stop switch, fuel quantity and condition, fuel vale position and spark plug cap tightness
Proper maintenance as described in Chapter Three reduces the necessity for troubleshooting.
Even with the best of care, however, the motorcycle may develop problems that require trouble
shooting.
If the problem cannot be solved. Stop and evaluate all conditions prior to the problem. If the
motorcycle must be taken to a repair facility, the mechanic will want to know as many details as
possible.
For removal, installation and test procedures for some components, refer to the specific chapter.
When applicable, tables at the end of each chapter also provide specifications and service limits.

- 31 -
 GENERAL INFORMATION
ENGINE PRINCIPLES AND OPERATING REQUIREMENTS
An engine needs three basics to run properly:

Correct air/fuel mixture

Compression Engine

runs

A spark at the right time

If one basic requirement is missing the engine will not run.

STARTING THE ENGINE

When experiencing engine-starting troubles, it is easy to work out of sequence and forget basic
starting procedures. The following sections describe the recommended starting procedures.

Engine is cold
1. Shift the transmission into neutral.
2. Turn the fuel valve on or confirm if the fuel is in upper or below retile in the fuel tank.
3. If the air temperature is below 0℃（32°F）：
Open the throttle two or three time to allow the acceleration pump to feed additional fuel to the
engine.
If the air temperature is below 35℃ (95℃) pull the choke knob all the way out to richen the
air/fuel mixture.
4. When the engine starts, allow it to idle for approximately one minute, then push the choke all the
way in. If the idle is smooth, use the throttle to keep the engine running until it warms up.

NOTE
Do not race the engine during the warm\up
period. The carburetor accelerator pump can
overly richen the air/fuel mixture, which would
cause the engine to stall.

Engine is warm
1. Shift the transmission into neutral.
2. Confirm if the fuel is in upper or below retied in the tank.
3. Release the hot start lever as soon as the engine starts.

- 32 -
 GENERAL INFORMATION
Starting the engine after a fall or after the engine stalls
1. Shift the transmission into neutral.
2. Release the hot start lever as the engine starts.
3. If the engine fails to start, refer to Flooded Engine in this section.

Flooded engine
If the engine fails to start after several attempts, it is probably flooded. This occurs when too much
fuel is drawn into the engine and the spark plug fails to ignite it. The smell of gasoline is often evident
when the engine is flooded. Troubleshoot a flooded engine as follows:
1. Look for gasoline overflowing from the carburetor or overflow hose. If gasoline is evident, the
engine is flooded and/or the float in the carburetor bowl is stuck. If the carburetor float is stuck,
remove and repair the float assembly Shift the transmission into neutral.
2. Check that the chock knob is fully closed (pushed in).
3. Open the throttle fully and hold in this position. Then start the engine firmly through its entire
stoke ten times to clear the engine. Close the throttle.
4. Release the hot start lever as soon as the engine starts.
5. If the engine still does not start, refer to Engine will Not Start this chapter.

Engine cold with air temperature

Between 10-35℃（50-95°F）
1. Shift the transmission into neutral.
2. Turn the fuel valve on.
3. Pull the choke knob all the way out to richen the air/fuel mixture.
4. When the engine starts, allow it to idle for approximately 15 seconds, then push the choke all the
way. If the idle is not smooth, use the throttle to keep the engine running until it warms up.

NOTE
Do not race the engine during the warm-up
period. The carburetor accelerator pump can
overly richen the air/fuel mixture, which may
cause the engine to stall.

Engine cold with air temperature above 35℃（95°F）

1. Shift the transmission into neutral.
2. Turn the fuel valve on.
3. When the engine starts, allow it to idle until it warms up.

Cold engine with air temperature below 10℃ (50°F)

1. Shift the transmission into neutral.
2. Turn the fuel valve on

- 33 -
 GENERAL INFORMATION
3. If the temperature is below 32°F (0℃), open the throttle two or three times to allow the accelerator
pump to feed additional fuel to the engine.
4. Pull the choke knob all the way out to richen the air/fuel mixture.

NOTE
Do not open the throttle when starting the
engine in Step 4. This will allow the accelerator
pump to feed more fuel to the engine, possibly
causing the spark plug to foul.
5. When the engine starts, use the throttle to keep the engine running until the engine warms up and
the choke can be fully closed.

NOTE
Do not race the engine during the warm-up
period. The carburetor accelerator pump can
overly richen the air/fuel mixture and cause the
engine to stall.

Engine is hot
1. Shift the transmission into neutral.
2. Turn the fuel valve on
NOTE
Do not open the throttle when starting the
engine in Step 3. This will allow the
accelerator pump to feed more fuel to the
engine, possibly fouling the spark plug.
3. Pull the hot start lever. Then while keeping the throttle closed, pull the clutch lever fully in and press
the starter button.
4. Release the hot start lever as soon as the engine starts.

Starting the engine after a fall or after the engine stalls

1. Shift the transmission into neutral.
2. Pull the hot start lever. Then while keeping the throttle closed.
3. Release the hot start lever as soon as the engine starts.
4. If the engine fails to start, refer to Flooded Engine in this section.

Flooded engine
If the engine fails to start after several attempts, it is probably flooded. This situation occurs when
too much fuel is drawn into the engine and the spark plug fails to ignite it. The smell of gasoline is often
evident when the engine is flooded. Troubleshoot a flooded engine as follows:
1. Look for gasoline overflowing from the carburetor or overflow hose. If gasoline is evident, the engine
is flooded and/or the float in the carburetor bowl is stuck. If the carburetor float is stuck, remove and

- 34 -
 GENERAL INFORMATION
repair the float assembly.
2. Shift the transmission into neutral.
3. Check that the choke knob is fully closed (pushed in).
4. Starter---Perform the following:
a. Pull the hot start lever, then pull the clutch lever fully in, open the throttle fully and press the
starter button for 5 seconds.
b. If the engine starts, close the throttle and release the hot start lever. If the engine starts but idles
roughly, vary the throttle position slightly until the engine idles and responds smoothly.
c. If the engine still does not start, refer to Engine Will Not Start in this chapter.

ENGINE WILL NOT START

Identifying the Problem
If the engine does not start, perform the following steps in order while remembering the Engine
Principals and Operating Requirements described in this chapter. If the engine fails to start after
performing these checks, refer to the troubleshooting procedures indicated in the steps. If the engine
starts, but idles or runs roughly, refer to Poor Engine Performance in this chapter.
1. Refer to Starting the Engine in this chapter to make sure all starting procedures are correct.
2. If the engine seems flooded, refer to Starting The Engine in this chapter. If the engine is not flooded,
continue with Step 3.
3. Remove the cap from the fuel tank and make sure the fuel tank and make sure the fuel tank has a
sufficient amount of fuel to start the engine.
4. If there is sufficient fuel in the fuel tank, remove the spark plug immediately after attempting to start
the engine. The plug’s insulator should be wet, indicating that fuel is reaching the engine. If the plug
tip is dry, fuel is not reaching the engine. Refer to Fuel System in this chapter. If there is fuel on the
spark plug and the engine will not start, the engine may not have adequate spark. Continue with

Step 5.

5. Make sure the direct ignition coil or spark plug wire is secure. Push the direct ignition coil or spark
plug cap and slightly rotate it to clean the electrical connection between the plug and the connector.
If the engine does not start. Continue with step 6

NOTE
A cracked or damaged direct ignition coil or spark
plug cap and cable can cause intermittent problems
that are difficult to diagnose. If the engine
occasionally misfires or cuts out, use a spray bottle
to wet the direct ignition coil or plug cap and plug
cable while the engine is running. Water that enters
one of theses areas causes an arc through the
insulating material, causing an engine misfire.
NOTE
Engine misfire can also be caused by water that
enters through connectors. Check the connectors

- 35 -
 GENERAL INFORMATION
for loose wire ends. On waterproof connectors,
check for damage where the wires enter the
connector.

6. Perform the Spark Test in this section. If there is a strong spark, perform Step 7. If there is no spark
or if the spark is very weak, refer to Ignition System Testing in Chapter Ten.
7. If the fuel and ignition systems are working correctly, perform a leak down test (this chapter) and
cylinder compression test. If the leak down test indicates a problem, or the compression under
Engine in this chapter.

Spark Test
Perform a spark test to determine if the ignition system is producing adequate spark. This test
should be performed with a spark tester. A spark tester looks like a spark plug with an adjustable gap
between the center electrode and grounded base. Because the voltage required to jump the spark
tester gap is sufficiently larger than that of a normally gapped spark plug, the test results are more
accurate than with a spark plug. Do not assume that because a spark jumped across a spark plug gap,
the ignition system is working correctly.
Perform this test on the engine when it is both cold and hot, if possible. If the test results are positive
for each test, the ignition system is working correctly.

CAUTION
After removing the direct ignition coil or spark plug
cap and before removing the spark plug in Step 1,
clean the area around the spark plug with
compressed air. Dirt that falls into the cylinder
causes rapid engine wear.
1. Disconnect the direct ignition coil or spark plug cap. Check for the presence of water.
2. Visually inspect the spark plug for damage.
3. Connect a spark tester to the direct ignition coil or spark plug cap. Ground the spark tester base (or
spark plug) to a good ground. Position the spark tester or spark plug firing tip away from the open
spark plug hole. Position the spark tester so the electrodes are visible.

WARNING
Mount the spark tester or spark plug away from the
spark plug hole in the cylinder. If the engine is
flooded, do not perform this test. The spark tester
can ignite fuel ejected through the spark plug hole.
4. Shift the transmission into neutral.

WARNING
Do not hold the spark tester, spark plug or
connector or a serious electrical shock may result.
5. Turn the engine over using the starter and push the starter button. A fat blue spark must be evident
between the spark tester or spark plug terminals.

- 36 -
 GENERAL INFORMATION
6. If there is a strong, blue spark, the ignition system is functioning properly, Check for one or more of
the following possible malfunctions:
a. Faulty fuel system component.
b. Flooded engine.
c. engine damage(low compression).
7. If the spark was weak (white or yellow) or if there was no spark, perform the peak voltage checks
described under Ignition System Testing.
8. Reinstall the fuel tank.

Starter Does Not Turn Over or Turns Over Slowly

Refer to Starting System Testing

POOR ENGINE PERFORMANCE

If the engine runs, but performance is unsatisfactory, refer to the following section that best
describes the symptoms.

Engine Starts but Stalls and is Hard to Restart

Check for the following:
1. Incorrect choke operation. This can be due to improper use or a stuck choke valve in the carburetor.
2. Incorrect hot start valve operation. This situation can be due to improper use or incorrect hot start
valve adjustment.
3. Plugged fuel tank went hose.
4. Plugged fuel hose. Fuel shutoff valve or fuel filter.
5. Incorrect carburetor adjustment.
6. Incorrect float level adjustment.
7. Plugged carburetor jets.

NOTE
If a warm or hot engine will start with the choke on,
or if a cold engine starts and runs until the choke is
turned off. The pilot jet is probably plugged.
8. Contaminated or stale fuel.
9. Clogged air filter.
10. Intake pipe air leak.
11. Plugged exhaust system. Check the silencer or muffler, especially if the utility terrain vehicle was
just returned from storage.
12. Faulty ignition system component.

Engine Backfires, Cuts Out or Misfires During Acceleration

A backfire occurs when fuel is burned or ignited in the exhaust system.
1. A lean air/fuel mixture can cause these engine performance problems. Check for the following

- 37 -
 GENERAL INFORMATION
conditions:
a. Incorrect float level adjustment.
b. Plugged pilot jet or pilot system.
2. Faulty accelerator pump.
3. Loose exhaust pipe-to-cylinder head connection.
4. Intake air leak.
5. Incorrect ignition timing or a damaged ignition system can cause these conditions. Perform the Peak
Voltage Tests to isolate the damaged ignition system component. Check the ignition timing as
described.
NOTE
The ignition timing is controlled by the ICM and
cannot be adjusted. However, checking the ignition
timing can be used to diagnose problems.
6. Check the following engine components:
a. Broken valve springs.
b. Stuck or leaking valves.
c. Worn or damaged camshaft lobes.
d. Incorrect valve timing due to incorrect camshaft installation or a mechanical failure.

Engine Backfires on Deceleration

If the engine backfires when the throttle is released, check the following:
1. Lean carburetor pilot system.
2. Loose exhaust pipe-to-cylinder head connection.
3. Faulty ignition system component.
4. Check the following engine components:
a. Broken valve springs.
b. Stuck or leaking valves.
c. Worn or damaged camshaft lobes.
d. Incorrect valve timing due to incorrect camshaft installation or a mechanical failure.

Poor Fuel Mileage

1. Clogged fuel system.
2. Dirty or clogged air filter.
3. Incorrect ignition timing.

Engine Will Not Idle or Idles Roughly

1. Clogged air filter element.
2. Poor fuel filter or fuel hose.
3. Faulty accelerator pump assembly.
4. Contaminated or stale fuel.
5. Incorrect carburetor adjustment.
6. Leaking head gasket.

- 38 -
 GENERAL INFORMATION
7. Intake air leak.
8. Incorrect ignition timing
9. Low engine compression

Low Engine Power

1. Support the UTV in a stand with the rear wheel off the ground. then spins freely. If the wheel does
not spin freely. Check for the following conditions:
a. Dragging brakes. Check for this condition immediately after riding the UTV

NOTE
After riding the UTV. Come to a stop on a level
surface. Turn the engine off and shift the
transmission into neutral. Walk or push the UTV
forward. If the UTV is harder to push than normal.
Check for dragging brakes
b. Damaged or binding drive system
c. Damaged drive system and gear bearing
2. Test ride the UTV and accelerate quickly from first to second gear. If the engine speed in-creased
according to throttle position. Perform Step 3. If the engine speed did not increase. Check CVT
a. Warped clutch plates/discs
b. CVT spring
3. Test rides the UTV and accelerate lightly. If the engine speed increased according to throttle position.
Perform Step 4. If the engine speed did not increase. Check for one or more of the following
problems:
a. Clogged air filter
b. Restricted fuel flow
c. Pinched fuel tank breather hose (Figure 9).
d. Clogged or damaged silencer or muffler

NOTE
A clogged exhaust system will prevent some of the
burned exhaust gasses from exiting the exhaust
port at the end of the exhaust stroke. This condition
effects the incoming air/fuel mixture on the intake
stroke and reduces engine power
4. Check for retarded ignition timing. A decrease in power results when the plugs fire later than normal
5. Check for one or more of the following problems
a. Low engine compression
b. Worn spark plug
c. Fouled spark plug
d. Incorrect spark plug heat range
e. Weak ignition coil
f. Incorrect ignition timing
g. Plugged carburetor passages

- 39 -
 GENERAL INFORMATION
h. Incorrect oil level (too high or too low)
i. Contaminated oil
j. Worn or damaged valve train assembly
k. Engine overheating
6. If the engine knocks when it is accelerated or when running at high speed. Check for one or more of
the following possible malfunctions:
a. Incorrect type of fuel
b. Lean fuel mixture
c. Advanced ignition timing

NOTE
Other signs of advanced ignition timing are engine
overheating and hard or uneven engine starting
d. Excessive carbon buildup in combustion chamber
e. Worn pistons and/or cylinder bores

Poor Idle or Low Speed Performance

1. Check for an incorrect pilot screw adjustment
2. Check for damaged or loose intake pipe and air filter housing hose clamps. These
conditions will cause an air leak
3. Perform the spark test in this chapter. Note the following:
a. If the spark is good. Go to Step 4
b. If the spark is weak. Perform the Peak Voltage Testing
4. Check the ignition timing. If ignition timing is correct. Perform Step 5. If the timing is
incorrect. Perform the Peak Voltage Testing
5. Check the fuel system as described in this chapter

Poor High Speed Performance

1. Check ignition timing. If the ignition timing is correct. Perform Step 2. If the timing is incorrect.
Perform the Peak Voltage
2. Check the fuel system as described in this chapter
3. Check the valve clearance as described. Note the following:
a. If the valve clearance as correct. Perform Step 4
b. If the clearance is incorrect. adjust the valves as described in Chapter Three
4. Incorrect valve timing and worn or damaged valve springs can cause poor high-speed
performance. If the camshaft was timed just before the UTV experiencing this type of problem.
The cam timing may be incorrect. If the cam timing was not set or changed. And all the other
inspection procedures in this section failed to locate the problem. Inspect the camshaft and calve
assembly

- 40 -
 GENERAL INFORMATION
FUEL SYSTEM
The following section isolates common fuel system problems under specific complaints. If there is a
good spark. Poor fuel flow may be preventing the correct amount of fuel from being supplied to the
spark plug. Troubleshoot the fuel system as follows:
1. Clogged fuel tank breather hose
2. Check that there is a sufficient amount of fuel in the rank
3. After attempting to start the engine. Remove the spark plug and check for fuel on the plug tip.
Note the following:
a. If there is no fuel visible in the plug. Check for a clogged fuel shutoff valve. Fuel filter or fuel
line
b. If there is fuel present on the plug tip. And the engine has spark. Check for an excessive
intake air leak or the possibility of contaminated or stale fuel

NOTE
If the UTV was not used for some time. And was not
properly stored. The fuel may have gone stale.
Where lighter parts of the fuel have evaporated.
Depending on the condition of the fuel. a no-start
condition can result
c. If there is an excessive amount of fuel on the plug. Check for a clogged air filter or flooded
carburetor.

Rich Mixture
The following conditions can cause a rich air/fuel mixture:
1. Clogged air filter
2. Choke valve stuck open
3. Float level too high
4. Contaminated float valve seat
5. Worn or damaged float valve and seat
6. Leaking or damaged float
7. Clogged carburetor jets
8. Incorrect carburetor jetting

Lean Mixture
The following conditions can cause a lean air/fuel mixture:
1. Intake air leak
2. Float level too low
3. Clogged fuel line, fuel filter or fuel shutoff valve
4. Partially restricted fuel tank breather hose
5. Plugged carburetor air vent hose
6. Damaged float
7. Damaged float valve
8. Incorrect carburetor jetting

- 41 -
 GENERAL INFORMATION
ENGINE
Engine Smoke
The color of engine smoke can help diagnose engine problems or operating conditions

Black smoke
Black smoke is an indication of a rich air/fuel mixture

Blue smoke
Blue smoke indicates that the engine is burning oil in the combustion chamber as it leaks past worn
valve stem seals and piston rings. Excessive oil consumption is another indicator of an engine that is
burning oil. Perform a compression test to isolate the problem.

White smoke or steam

It is normal to see white smoke or steam from the exhaust after first starting the engine in cold
weather. This is actually condensed steam formed by the engine during combustion. If the UTV is
ridden far enough, the water cannot collect in the crankcase and should not become a problem. Once
the engine heats up to normal operating temperature, the water evaporates and exits the engine
through the crankcase vent system. However, if the UTV is ridden for short trips or repeatedly started
and stopped and allowed to cool off without the engine getting warm enough, water will start to collect
in the crankcase. With each short run of the engine, more water collects. As this water mixes with the
oil in the crankcase, sludge is produced. Sludge can eventually cause engine damage as it circulates
through the lubrication system and blocks off oil passages.
Large amounts of steam can also be caused by a cracked cylinder head or cylinder block surface
that allows coolant to leak into the combustion chamber. Perform a Coolant System Pressure Test.

Low Engine Compression

Problems with the engine top end will affect engine performance. When the engine is suspect,
perform the leak down procedure in this chapter and make a compression test . Interpret the results as
described in each procedure to troubleshoot the suspect area. An engine can lose compression
through the following areas:
1. Valves:
a. Incorrect valve adjustment.
b. Incorrect valve timing.
c. Worn or damaged valve seat surfaces.
d. Bent valves.
e. Weak or broken valve springs.
2. Cylinder head:
a.Loose spark plug or damaged spark plug hole.
b.Damaged cylinder head gasket.

- 42 -
 GENERAL INFORMATION
c. Warped or cracked cylinder head.
3. Damaged decompress or assembly.

High Engine Compression

1. Faulty decompress or assembly.
2. Excessive carbon buildup in the combustion chamber.

Engine Overheating

(Cooling System)
WARNING
Do not remove the radiator cap, coolant drain plug or
disconnect any coolant hose immediately after or during
engine operation. Scalding fluid and steam may be blown out
under pressure and cause serious injury. When the engine
has been operated, the coolant is very hot and under
pressure. Attempting to remove the items when the engine is
hot can cause the coolant to spray violently from the radiator,
water pump or hose, causing severe burns and injury.
1. Low coolant level.
2. Air in cooling system.
3. Clogged radiator, hose or engine coolant passages.
4. Worn or damaged radiator cap.
5. Damaged water pump.

Engine Overheating

(Engine)
1. Improper spark plug heat range.
2. Low oil level.
3. Oil not circulating properly.
4. Valves leaking.
5. Heavy carbon deposits in the combustion chamber.
6. Dragging brake(s).
7. Slipping clutch.

Preignition
Preignition is the premature burning of fuel and is caused by hot spots in the combustion chamber.
Glowing deposits in the combustion chamber, inadequate Cooling or an overheated spark plug can all
cause preignition. This is first noticed as a power loss but eventually causes damage to the internal
parts of the engine because of the high combustion chamber temperature.

- 43 -
 GENERAL INFORMATION
Detonation
Detonation is the violent explosion of fuel in the combustion chamber before the proper time of
ignition. Using low octane gasoline is a common cause of detonation.
Even when using a high octane gasoline, detonation can still occur. Other causes are
over-advanced ignition timing, lean air/fuel mixture at or near full throttle, inadequate engine cooling,
or the excessive accumulation of carbon deposits in the combustion chamber.
Continued detonation can result in engine damage.

Power Loss
Refer to Poor Engine Performance in this chapter.

Engine Noises
Unusual noises are often the first indication of a developing problem. Investigate any new noises
as soon as possible. Something that may be a minor problem, if corrected, could prevent the
possibility of more extensive damage.
Use a mechanic’s stethoscope or a small section of hose held near your ear (not directly on your
ear) with the other end close to the source of the noise to isolate the location. Determining the exact
cause of a noise can be difficult. If this is the case, consult with a professional mechanic to determine
the cause. Do not disassemble major components until all other possibilities have been eliminated.
Consider the following when troubleshooting engine noises:
1. Knocking or pinging during acceleration can be caused by using a lower octane fuel than
recommended. May also be caused by poor fuel. Pinging can also be caused by an incorrect
spark plug heat range or carbon buildup in the combustion chamber.
2. Slapping or rattling noises at low speed or during acceleration—May be caused by excessive
piston-to-cylinder wall clearance (piston slap).

NOTE
Piston slap is easier to detect when the engine is
cold and before the piston has expanded. Once
the engine has warmed up, piston expansion
reduces piston-to-cylinder clearance.
3. Knocking or rapping while decelerating—Usually caused by excessive rod bearing clearance.
4. Persistent knocking and vibration occurring every crankshaft rotation—Usually caused by
worn rod or main bearing(s). Can also be caused by broken piston rings or a damaged piston
pin.
5. Rapid on-off squeal—Compression leak around cylinder head gasket or spark plug(s).
6. Valve train noise—Check for the following:
a. Excessive valve clearance.
b. Worn or damaged camshaft.
c. Damaged camshaft.
d. Worn or damaged valve train components.
e. Damaged valve lifter bore(s).

- 44 -
 GENERAL INFORMATION
f. Valve sticking in guide.
g. Broken valve spring.
h. Low oil pressure.
i. Clogged cylinder oil hole or oil passage.

ENGLNE LUBRICATION
An improperly operating engine lubrication system quickly leads to engine seizure. Check the
engine oil level and oil pressure.

High Oil Consumption or Excessive

Exhaust Smoke
1. Worn valve guides.
2. Worn valve guide seals.
3. Worn or damaged piston rings.
4. Incorrect piston ring installation.

Low Oil Pressure

1. Low oil level.
2. Worn or damaged oil pump.
3. Clogged oil strainer screen.
4. Clogged oil filter.
5. Internal oil leakage.
6. Oil relief valve stuck open.
7. Incorrect type of engine oil.

High Oil Pressure

1. Oil relief valve stuck closed.
2. Clogged oil filter.
3. Clogged oil gallery or metering orifices.

No Oil Pressure
1. Low oil level.
2. Oil relief valve stuck closed.
3. Damaged oil pump.
4. Incorrect oil pump installation.
5. Internal oil leak.

- 45 -
 GENERAL INFORMATION
Oil Level Too Low
1. Oil level not maintained at correct level
2. Worn piston rings.
3. Worn cylinder.
4. Worn valve guides.
5. Worn valve guide seals.
6. Piston rings incorrectly installed during engine overhaul.
7. External oil leakage.
8. Oil leaking into the cooling system.

Oil Contamination
1. Blown head gasket allowing coolant to leak into the engine.
2. Coolant leak.
3. Oil and filter not changed at specified intervals or when operating conditions demand more
frequent changes.

CYLINDER LEAK DOWN TEST

A cylinder leak down test can accurately pinpoint engine leakage problems from the head gasket,
water jackets in the cylinder head and cylinder, valves and valve seats, and piston rings. This test is
performed by applying compressed air to the cylinder through a special tester and then measuring the
percent of leakage. A cylinder leak down tester and an air compressor are needed to perform this test.
When performing a leak down test, the engine is first set at TDC on its compression stroke so that
all the valves are closed. When the combustion chamber is pressurized, very little air should escape.
However, the difficulty in performing a leak down test on a single cylinder engine(especially on the
engines described in this manual with low static engine compression) is in preventing the piston from
moving as the combustion chamber starts to pressurize. Any piston movement will force the crankshaft
to turn away from TDC and allow air to escape past an open valve seat.
In this procedure it will be necessary to lock the engine at TDC on its compression stroke and
then perform the leak down test. Follow the manufacturer’s directions along with the follow the
manufacturer’s directions along with the following information when performing a cylinder leak down
test.
1. Support the UTV on a work stand with the rear wheel off the ground.
2. Remove the air filter assembly Open and secure the throttle so it is at its wide-open position.
3. Remove the spark plug.
4. Install the threaded hose adapter from the leak down kit. Then install the leak down gauge
onto the hose.
5. Remove the ignition timing hole cap from the left crankcase cover.
6. Remove the crankshaft hole cap from the right crankcase cover.

NOTE
Because the following test is performed with the cylinder
head cover installed on the engine, the camshaft lobes

- 46 -
 GENERAL INFORMATION
cannot be viewed to ensure that the engine is positioned at
TDC on its compression stroke. To determine when the
engine is approaching TDC on its compression stroke, or
whether it is 360°off. Observe the following two indicators
to predict engine position. First, when aligning the index
marks in Step7, listen for pressure building inside the
combustion chamber. Indicating that the piston is moving
to TDC on its compression stroke. Second, view the gauge
on the leak down tester when turning the engine. As the
piston moves toward TDC on its compression stroke,
compression building inside the combustion chamber may
cause the gauge needle to move slightly. If the crankshaft is
360°off, these indicators will not be present.

NOTE
The decompress or mechanism will click loudly once
during each crankshaft revolution. This is normal.
7. Use hex socket on the primary drive gear mounting bolt and turn the crankshaft clockwise and align
the TDC mark on the flywheel with the index mark on the left crankcase cover Remove the hex socket
from the primary drive gear.
8. Perform the following to lock the transmission so the engine remains at TDC on its compression
stroke when performing the leak down test:
WARNING
Do not attempt to lock the engine by trying to use a
tool to hold the Allen bolt on the end of the crankshaft.
Once the combustion chamber becomes pressurized,
any crankshaft movement can throw the tool away
from the engine under considerable force, attempting
to hole the tool can cause serious injury. Engine
damage may also occur to the crankshaft or right
crankcase cover. Lock the engine as described in this
procedure.
a. Turn the drive sprocket by hand and shift the transmission into top gear with the shift pedal.
b. Mount a holding tool or equivalent onto the drive sprocket. Use a wooden block and clamp to
hold the holding tool so it cannot move when the combustion chamber becomes pressurized.
c. Check that the TDC marks are still aligned as described in Step7,
If not, turn the crankshaft as required, then relock the holding tool in position.
9. Remove the radiator cap and the oil filler cap.
10. Perform a cylinder leak down test by applying air pressure to the combustion chamber. Follow the
manufacturer’s instructions while reading the percent of leakage on the gauge. Listen for air
leaking while noting the following:

NOTE
Because of play in the transmission gears, it is unlikely the
engine will stay at TDC on the first try If the crankshaft

- 47 -
 GENERAL INFORMATION
turns, reposition the countershaft slightly and then relock it
in position with the holding tool. After several attempts, you
will get a feel of the transmission play and know what
direction the countershaft should be turned and locked.

NOTE
If a large amount of air escapes from the exhaust pipe or
through the carburetor, the air is leaking through on open
valve, Check the index mark to make sure the engine is at
TDC on the compression stroke, If the engine is remaining
at TDC but there is still a large amount of air escaping from
the engine, the crankshaft is off one revolution. Turn the
engine 360°and realign the TDC mark as described in Step 7,
then relock it as described in Step8.
a. Air leaking through the exhaust pipe indicates a leaking exhaust valve.
b. Air leaking through the carburetor indicates a leaking intake valve.
c. Air leaking through both the intake and exhaust valves indicates the engine is not set at
TDC on its compression stroke.
d. Air leaking through the coolant filler neck indicates a leaking cylinder head gasket or a
cracked cylinder head or cylinder liner.
e. Air leaking through the oil filler hole indicates the rings are not sealing properly in the
bore.
11. If the cylinder leak down is 10 percent or higher, further service is required.
12. Disconnect the test equipment and install all the parts previously removed.

ELECTRICAL TESTING
This section describes basic electrical testing and test equipment use.

Preliminary Checks and Precautions

Refer to the color wiring diagrams at the end of the manual for component and connector
identification; Use the wiring diagrams to determine how the circuit should work by tracing the current
paths from the power source through the circuit components to ground. Also, check any circuits that
share the same fuse (if used), ground or switch. If the other circuits work properly and the shared
wiring is good, the cause must be in the wiring used only by the suspect circuit. If all related circuits are
faulty at the same time, the probable cause is a poor ground connection or a blown fuse (if used).
As with all troubleshooting procedures, analyze typical symptoms in a systematic manner. Never
assume any thing and do not overlook the obvious like a blown fuse or an electrical connector that has
separated. Test the simplest and most obvious items first and try to make tests at easily accessible
points on the UTV.
Before starting any electrical troubleshooting, perform the following:
1. Check the fuse if the fuse is blown, replace it.
2. Inspect the battery. Make sure it is fully charged, and the battery leads are clean and securely
attached to the battery terminals.
3. Disconnect each electrical connector in the suspect circuit and make sure there are no bent

- 48 -
 GENERAL INFORMATION
terminals in the electrical connector
4. Make sure the terminals on the end of each wire are pushed all the way into the connector. If not.
Carefully push them in with a narrow blade screwdriver
5. Check the wires where they connect to the terminals for damage
6. Make sure all terminals within the connector are clean and free of corrosion. Clean them. If
necessary. And pack the connectors with dielectric grease
7. Push the connectors with dielectric grease. The connectors are fully engaged and locked
together
8. Never pull the electrical wires when disconnecting an electrical connector-pull only on the
connector

Intermittent Problems
Intermittent problems are problems that do not occur all the time and can be difficult to locate. For
example. When a problem only occurs when the UTV is ridden over rough roads (vibration) or in wet
conditions (water penetration). It is intermit-ten. To locate and repair intermittent problems. Simulate
the condition when testing the compo-nets. Note the following:
1. Vibration---This is a common problem with loose or damaged electrical connectors
a. Perform a continuity test as described in the appropriate service procedure. Or under
Continuity Test in this section
b. Lightly pull or wiggle the connectors while repeating the test. Do the same when checking the
wiring harness and individual components. especially where the wires enter a housing or
connector
c. A change in meter readings indicates a poor connection. Fine and repair the problem or
replace the part. Check for wires with cracked or broken insulation

NOTE
An analog ohmmeter is useful when making
this type of test. Slight needle movements are
apparent when indicating a loose connection
2. Heat – This is another common problem with connectors or plugs that have loose or poor
connections. As these connections heat up. The connection or joint expands and separates.
Causing an open circuit. Other heat related problem occur when a component creates its own
heat as it starts to fail or go bad
a. Troubleshoot the problem to help isolate the problem or area
b. To check a connector. Perform a continuity test as described in the appropriate service
procedure. Or under Continuity test in this chapter. Then repeat the test while heating the
ground. If the lamp comes on. The problem is the connection between the lamp and
Connector with a heat gun or hair dryer. If the meter reading was normal (continuity) when the
connector was cold, then fluctuated or read infinity when heat was applied, the connection is
bad.
c. To check a component, wait until the engine is clod, then start and run the engine. Note operational
differences when the engine is cold and hot.
d. If the engine does not start, isolate and remove the component. First test it at room temperature,
and then after heating it with a hair dryer. A change in meter readings indicates a temperature

- 49 -
 GENERAL INFORMATION
problem.
CAUTION
A heat gun or hair dryer will quickly raise the heat
of the component being tested. Do not apply heat
directly to the ICM or use heat in excess of 60℃
(140℉) on any electrical component. If available,
monitor heat with an infrared thermometer.
3. Water—when this problem occurs in wet conditions, or in areas with high humidity, start and run
the engine in a dry area. Then, with the engine running, spray water related problems repair
themselves after the component becomes hot enough to dry itself.

Electrical component replacement

Most UTV dealerships and parts suppliers will not accept the return of any electrical part. If you
cannot determine the exact cause of any electrical system malfunction. If you purchase a new
electrical component(s), install it, and then find that the system still does not work properly, you will
probably be unable to return the unit for a refund.
Consider any test results carefully before replacing a component that teats only slightly out of
specification, especially resistance. A number of variables can affect test results dramatically. These
include: the testing meter’s internal circuitry, ambient temperature and conditions under which the
machine has been operated. All instructions and specifications have been for accuracy: however.
Successful test results depend to a great degree upon individual accuracy.

Test Equipment
A test light can be constructed from a 12-volt light bulb with a pair of test leads carefully soldered
to the bulb. To check for battery voltage in a circuit, attach one lead to ground and the other lead to
various points along the circuit. The bulb lights when battery voltage is present.
A voltmeter is used in the same manner as the test light to find out if battery voltage is present in
any given circuit. The voltmeter, unlike the test light, also indicates how much voltage is present at
each test point. When using a voltmeter, attach the positive lead to the component or wire to be
checked and the negative lead to a good ground.

Ammeter
An ammeter measures the flow of current (amps) in a circuit when connected in series in a circuit,
the ammeter determines if current is flowing through the circuit and if that current flow is excessive
because of a short in the circuit. Current flow is often referred to as current draw. Comparing actual
current draw in the circuit or component to the manufacturer’s specified current draw provides useful
diagnostic information.

Self-powered test light

A self-powered test light can be constructed from a 12-volt light bulb, a pair of test leads and a
12-volt battery. When the test leads are touched together, the light bulb should go on.

- 50 -
 GENERAL INFORMATION
Use a self-powered test light as follows:
1. Touch the test leads together to make sure the light bulb goes on. If not, correct the problem before
using it in a test procedure.
2. Select two points within the circuit where there should be continuity.
3. Attach one lead of the self-powered test light to each point.
4. If there is continuity, the self-powered test light bulb will come on.
5. If there is on continuity, the self-powered test light bulb will not come on, indicating an open circuit.

Ohmmeter
An ohmmeter measures the resistance (in ohms) to current flow in a circuit or component. Like the
self-powered test light, an ohmmeter contains its own power source and should not be connected to a
live circuit.
Ohmmeter may be analog type (needle scale) or digital type (LCD or LED readout). Both types of
ohmmeter have a switch that allows the user to select different ranges of resistance for accurate
readings. The analog ohmmeter also has a set-adjust control which is used to zero or calibrate the
meter (digital ohmmeters do not require calibration).
An ohmmeter is used by connecting its test leads to the terminals or leads of the circuit or
component to be tested. If an analog meter id used, is must be calibrated by touching the teat leads
together and turning the set-adjust knob until the meter needle reads zero. When the leads are
uncrossed, the needle reads zero. When the leads are uncrossed, the needle should move to the
other end of the scale indicating infinite resistance.
During a continuity test, a reading of infinity indicates that there is an open in the circuit or
component. A reading of zero indicates continuity, that is, there is no measurable resistance in the
meter needle falls between these two ends of the scale, this indicates the actual resistance, multiply
the meter reading by the ohmmeter scale. For example, a meter reading of 5 multiplied by the R×100
scale is 5000 ohms of resistance.

CAUTION
Never connect an ohmmeter to a circuit
which has power applied to it. Always
disconnect the battery negative lead before
using an ohmmeter.

Jumper wire
A jumper wire is a simple way to bypass a potential problem and isolate it to a particular point in a
circuit. If a faulty circuit works properly with a jumper wire installed, an open exists between the two
jumper points in the circuit.
To troubleshoot with a jumper wire, fist use the wire to determine if the problem is on the ground
side or the load side of a device. Test the ground by connecting a jumper between the lamp and a
good ground. If the lamp does not come on with the jumper installed. The lamp’s connection to ground
is good so the problem is between the lamp and the power source.
To isolate the problem. Connect the jumper between the battery and the lamp. If it comes on. The
problem is between these two points. Next. Connect the jumper between the battery and the fuse side
of the switch. If the lamp comes on. The switch is good. By successively moving the jumper from one

- 51 -
 GENERAL INFORMATION
point to another. The problem can be isolated to a particular place in the circuit
Pay attention to the following when using a jumper wire:
1. Make sure the jumper wore gauge (thickness) is the same as that used in the circuit being
tested. Smaller gauge wire will rapidly overheat and could melt
2. Install insulated boots over alligator clips. This prevents accidental grounding. Sparks or
possible shock when working in cramped quarters
3. Jumper wires are temporary test measures only. Do not leave a jumper wire installed as a
permanent solution. This creates a severe fire hazard that could easily lead to complete loss off
the motorcycle
4. When using a jumper wire always install an inline fuse/fuse holder (available at most auto
supply stores or electronic supply stores) to the jumper wire. Never use a jumper wire across
any load (a component that is connected and turned on). This would result in a direct short and
will blow the fuse(s)

Test Procedures
Voltage test
Unless otherwise specified. Make all voltage tests with the electrical connectors still connected.
Insert the test leads into the backside of the connector and make sure the test lead touches the
electrical wire or metal terminal within the connector housing. If the test lead only touches the wire
insulation. There will be a false treading
Always check both sides of the connector as one side may be loose or corroded. Thus
preventing electrical flow through the connector. This type of test can be performed with a test or a
voltmeter. A voltmeter gives the best results

NOTE
If using a test light. It does not make any
difference which test lead is attached to
ground
1. Attach the voltmeter negative test lead to a good ground (bare metal). Make sure the part used
for ground is not insulated with a rubber gasket or rubber grommet
2. Attach the voltmeter positive test lead to the point to be tested
3. Turn the ignition switch on. If using a test light. The test light will come on if voltage is present. If
using a voltmeter. Note the voltage reading. The reading should be within I volt of battery
voltage. If the voltage is less. There is a problem in the circuit

Voltage drop test

The wires. Cables. Connectors and switches in an electrical circuit are designed to carry
current with low resistance. This endures that current can flow through the circuit with a minimum
loss of voltage. Voltage drop indicates where there is resistance in a circuit. A higher than normal
amount of resistance in a circuit decreases the flow of current and cause the voltage to drop
between the source and destination in the circuit.
Because resistance causes voltage to drop. A voltmeter is used to measure voltage drop
when current is running through the circuit. If the circuit has no resistance. There is no voltage drop

- 52 -
 GENERAL INFORMATION
so the voltmeter indicates 0 volts. The greater the resistance in a circuit. The greater the voltage
drop reading.

To perform a voltage drop:

1. Connect the positive meter test lead to the electrical source (where electricity is coming from).
2. Connect the voltmeter negative test lead to the electrical load (where the electricity is going).
3. If necessary, activate the component(s) in the circuit. For example. If checking the voltage in the
starter circuit, it would be necessary to push the starter button.
4. Read the voltage drop (difference in voltage between the source and destination) on the voltmeter.
Note the following:
a. The voltmeter should indicate 0 volts. If there is a drop of 0.5 volts or more. There is a problem
within the circuit. A voltage drop reading of 12 volts indicates an open in the circuit.
b. A voltage drop of 1 or more volts indicates that a circuit has excessive resistance.
c. For example, consider a starting problem where the battery is fully charged but the starter motor
turns over slowly. Voltage drop would be the difference in the voltage at the batter (source) and
the voltage at the starter (destination) as the engine is being started (current is flowing through
the batter cables). A corroded battery cable would cause a high voltage drop (high resistance)
and slow engine cranking.
d. Common sources of voltage drop are loose or contaminated connectors and poor ground
connections.

Peak voltage test

Peak voltage tests check the voltage output of the ignition coil and ignition pulse generator at
normal cranking speed. These tests make it possible to identify ignition system problems quickly and
accurately.
Peak voltage tests require a peak voltage adapter or tester. See Chapter Ten, Ignition System
Testing.

Continuity Test
A continuity test is used to determine the integrity of a circuit, wire or component. A circuit has
continuity if it forms a complete circuit, that is, if there are no opens in either the electrical wires or
components within the circuit. A circuit with an open. On the other hand, has no continuity.
This type of test can be performed with a self-powered test light or an ohmmeter. An ohmmeter
gives the best results. If using an analog ohmmeter, calibrate the meter by touching the leads together
and turning the calibration knob until the meter reads zero.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Attach one test lead (test light or ohmmeter) to one end of the part of the circuit to be tested.
3. Attach the other test lead to the other end of the part or the circuit to be tested.
4. The self-powered test lead comes on if there is continuity. An ohmmeter reads 0 or very low
resistance if there is continuity. A reading of infinite resistance if there is continuity. A reading of
infinite resistance indicates no continuity, the circuit is open.

- 53 -
 GENERAL INFORMATION
Testing for a short with a self-powered test light or ohmmeter
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the blown fuse.
3. Connect one test lead of the test light or ohmmeter to the load side (battery side) of the fuse terminal
in the starter relay.
4. Connect the other test lead to a good ground (bare metal). Make sure the part used for a ground is
not insulated with a rubber gasket or rubber grommet.
5. With the self-powered test light or ohmmeter attached to the fuse terminal and ground, wiggle the
wiring harness relating to the suspect circuit at various intervals. Start next to the fuse terminals and
work away from the fuse terminal. Watch the self-powered test light or ohmmeter while progressing
along the harness.
6. If the test light blinks or the needle on the ohmmeter moves, there is a short-to-ground at that point
in the harness.

Testing for a short with a test light or voltmeter

1. Remove the blown fuse.
2. Connect the test light or voltmeter across the fuse terminals in the starter relay. Turn the ignition
switch ON and check for battery voltage.
3. With the test light or voltmeter attached to the fuse terminals, wiggle the wiring harness relating to
the suspect circuit at various intervals. Start next to the fuse terminal a work systematically away
from the fuse terminal. Watch the test light or voltmeter while progressing along the harness.
4. If the test light blinks or if the needle on the voltmeter moves, there is a short-to-ground at that point
in the harness.

BRAKE SYSTEM
The front and rear brake units are critical to riding performance and safety. Inspect the front and
rear brakes frequently and repair any problem immediately. When replacing or refilling the brake fluid,
use only DOT 4 brake fluid from a closed container.
Always check the brake operation before riding the motorcycle.

Soft or Spongy Brake Lever or Pedal

Operate the front brake lever or rear brake pedal and check to see if the lever travel distance
increases. If the lever travel does increase while being operated, or feels soft or spongy, there may be
air in the brake line. In this condition, the brake system is not capable of producing sufficient brake
force. When there is an increase in lever or pedal travel or when the brake feels soft or spongy, check
the following possible causes:
1. Air in system.

WARNING
If the fluid level drops too low, air can enter the
hydraulic system through the master cylinder. Air

- 54 -
 GENERAL INFORMATION
can also enter the system from loose or damaged
hose fittings. Air in the hydraulic system causes a
soft or spongy brake lever action. This condition
is noticeable and reduces brake performance.
When it is suspected that air has entered the
hydraulic system, flush the brake system and
bleed the brakes as described in Chapter Fifteen.

2. Low brake fluid level.

WARNING
As the brake pads wear, the brake fluid level in
the master cylinder reservoir drops. Whenever
adding brake fluid to the reservoir, visually check
the brake pads for wear. If it does not appear that
there is an increase in pad wear, check the brake
hoses, lines and banjo bolts for leaks.
3. Leak in the brake system.
4. Contaminated brake fluid.
5. Plugged brake fluid passages.
6. Damaged brake lever or pedal assembly.
7. Worn or damaged brake pads.
8. Warped brake disc.
10. Contaminated brake pads and disc.

WARNING
A leaking fork seal can allow oil to
contaminate the brake pads and disc.
11. Worn or damaged master cylinder cups and/or cylinder bore.
12. Worn or damaged brake caliper piston seals.
13. Contaminated master cylinder assembly.
14. Contaminated brake caliper assembly.
15. Brake caliper not sliding correctly on slide pins.
16. Sticking master cylinder piston assembly.
17. Sticking brake caliper pistons.

Brake Drag
When the brakes drag, the brake pads are not capable of moving away from the brake disc when the
brake lever or pedal is released. Any of the following causes, if they occur, would prevent correct brake
pad movement and cause brake drag.
1. Warped or damaged brake disc.
2. Brake caliper not sliding correctly on slide pins.
3. Sticking or damaged brake caliper pistons.
4. Contaminated brake pads and disc.
5. Plugged master cylinder port.

- 55 -
 GENERAL INFORMATION
6. Contaminated brake fluid and hydraulic passages.
7. Restricted brake hose joint.
8. Loose brake disc mounting bolts.
9. Damaged or misaligned wheel.
10. Incorrect wheel alignment.
11. Incorrectly installed brake caliper.
12. Damaged front or rear wheel.

Hard Brake Lever or Pedal Operation

When applying the brakes and there is sufficient brake performance but the operation of brake
lever feels excessively hard, check for the following possible causes:
1. Clogged brake hydraulic system.
2. Sticking caliper piston.
3. Sticking master cylinder piston.
4. Glazed or worn brake pads.
5. Mismatched brake pads.
6. Damaged front brake lever.
7. Damaged rear brake pedal.
8. Brake caliper not sliding correctly on slide pins.
9. Worn or damaged brake caliper seals.

Brake Grabs
1. Damaged brake pad pin bolt. Look for steps or cracks along the pad pin bolt surface.
2. Contaminated brake pads and disc.
3. Incorrect wheel alignment.
4. Warped brake disc.
5. Loose brake disc mounting bolts.
6. Brake caliper not sliding correctly on slide pins.
7. Mismatched brake pads.
8. Damaged wheel bearings.

Brake Squeal or Chatter

1. Contaminated brake pads and disc.
2. Incorrectly installed brake caliper.
3. Warped brake disc.
4. Incorrect wheel alignment.
5. Mismatched brake pads.
6. Incorrectly installed brake pads.
7. Damaged or missing brake pad spring or pad retainer.

- 56 -
 GENERAL INFORMATION
Leaking Brake Caliper
1. Damaged dust and piston seals.
2. Damaged cylinder bore.
3. Loose caliper body bolts.
4. Loose banjo bolt.
5. Damaged banjo bolt washers.
6. Damaged banjo bolt threads in caliper body.

Leaking Master Cylinder

1. Damaged piston secondary seal.
2. Damaged piston snap ring/ snap ring groove.
3. Worn or damaged master cylinder bore.
4. Loose banjo bolt washers.
5. Damaged banjo bolt washers.
6. Damaged banjo bolt threads in master cylinder body.
7. Loose or damaged reservoir cap.

- 57 -
 SPECIFICATIONS

SPECIFICATIONS
HOW TO CONVERSION TABLE OF UNIT
（1）How to use conversion table
All the specified documents in this manual are taken SI and Metric as unit. With the following
conversion table, metric unit could be conversed into imperial unit.
Sample:
METRIC MULTIPLY IMPERIAL
mm 0.03937 =in
2mm × 0.03937 =0.08in
Conversion table
Conversion between metric and imperial
Know unit Multiply Product
m·kg 7.233 ft·lb
m·kg 86.794 in·lb
Torque
cm·kg 0.0723 ft·lb
cm·kg 0.8679 in·lb
kg 2.205 lb
Weight
g 0.03527 oz
km/hr 0.6214 mph
km 0.6214 mi
m 3.281 ft
Length
m 1.094 yd
cm 0.3937 in
mm 0.03937 in
cc（cm3） 0.03527 oz（IMP liq.）
Volume/capacity cc（cm3） 0.06102 cu·in
lit（liter） 0.8799 qt（IMP liq.）
lit（liter） 0.2199 gal（IMP liq.）
kg/mm 55.997 Ib/in
Others kg/cm2 14.2234 psi（lb/in2）
Centigrade 9/5（℃）+32 Fahrenheit（°F）

（2）Definition of unit
Unit Read Definition Measurement
mm Millimetre 1 mm=10-3Meter Length
cm Centimetre 1 cm =10-2Meter Length
kg Kilogram 1 kg =103Gram Weight
N Newton 1N=1 kg×meter/second² Force
N.m Newton meter 1 Nm=1Newton×1meter Torque
kgf.m Meter Kilogram 1 kgf.m =1Meter×1kgf Torque
Pa Pascal 1 Pa=1Newton/1meter2 Pressure
N/mm Newton per millimeter 1 N/mm =1Newton/ Rigid of spring
millimeter
L Litre Volume of capacity
—
cm3 Cubic centimeter
r/min Revolutions per minute — Rotational speed

- 58-
 SPECIFICATIONS

GEBERAR SPECIFICATIONS
Item Standard
Dimensions :
Overall length 2,700mm (106.3in)
Overall width 1,360mm（53.5 in）
Overall height 1,840mm（72.4in）
Seat height 800mm（31.50in）
Wheelbase 1,940mm（76.4in）
Minimum ground clearance 260 mm（10.2 in）
Minimum turning radius 6,730mm（265.0 in）
Basic weight :
With oil and full fuel tank 547kg (1,206 lb)
Engine :
Engine type Liquid cooled 4-stroke, Water cool
Cylinder arrangement V type twin cylinder

Displacement 800cm3
Bore×stroke 91×61.5mm（3.58×2.42in）
Compression ratio 10:1
Starting system Electric starter
Lubrication system Wet sump

Engine oil :
API service SE,SF,SG type or higher

Final gear oil SAE80 API GL-4 Hypoid gear oil

Differential gear oil SAE80 API GL-5 Hypoid gear oil
Engine oil
Periodic oil change 1.90 L（1.67lmp qt, 2.01 US qt）
With oil filter replacement 2.10 L（1.85 Imp qt, 2.22 US qt）
Total amount 2.40 L（2.11 Imp qt, 2.54 US qt）

Air filter Wet type element

Fuel
Type Unleaded gasoline only
Fuel tank capacity 30.0L（6.60 lmp gal, 7.93 US gal）

- 59-
 SPECIFICATIONS
Item Standard
Ignition system ECU
Type/quantity 33200-F68 / 1
Spark plug
Type/manufacturer DCPR7E / 1 (NGK)
Spark plug gap 0.8-0.9 mm（0.031-0.035 in）
Clutch type Wet ,centrifugal automatic
Transmission
Primary reduction system V-belt
Secondary reduction system Shaft drive
Transmission type V-belt automatic
Operation Right hand operation
Single speed automatic 2.900～0.650
Sub transmission ratio Low 34/29（1.172）
High 43/20（2.150）
Reverse gear 31/14（2.214）

Chassis
Frame type Steel tube frame
Camber angle 0.5°
Trail 26.0mm（1.02 in）
Toe-in 0～10 mm （0.00～0.39 in）

Tire
Type Tubeless
Size Front 25×8-12
Rear 25×10-12
Pressure of front wheel 140kpa
Pressure of rear wheel 140kpa
Brake
Front brake Type Dual disc brake
Operation Foot operation
Rear brake Type Dual disc brake
Operation Foot operation

- 60-
 SPECIFICATIONS
Item Standard
Suspension
Front suspension Double wishbone
Rear suspension Double wishbone
Shock absorber
Front shock absorber Coil spring/oil damper
Rear shock absorber Coil spring/oil damper
Wheel travel
Front wheel travel 130mm (5.12 in)
Rear wheel travel 150mm (5.91 in)
Electrical
Ignition system C.D.I.
Generator system A.C. magneto
Battery type U1-32
Battery capacity 12 V, 32.0Ah

Headlight type S2
Bulb wattage×quantity
Headlight 12V，35W/35W × 2
Front Position Lamp 12V，5W× 2
Front direction indicator 12V，10W× 2
Rear direction indicator 12V，10W× 2
Rear position lamp 12V，2W （LED）
Stop lamp 12V，5W （LED）
Neutral LED
Reverse LED
Coolant temperature LED
Parking brake LED
Four-wheel drive LED
Differential gear lock LED

- 61-
 SPECIFICATIONS

ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS

Item Standard Limit

Cylinder head
Warp limit * ---- 0.03 mm
(0.0012 in)

Cylinder
Bore size 91.016 ~ 91.030mm ----
Measuring point * (3.544~ 3.584 in)
50 mm (1.97 in)

Camshaft
Drive method ----
Cam dimensions

Intake
“A” 31.95 ~ 32.11mm
(1.258~ 1.264 in)
“B” 25.95 ~ 26.05mm
(1.022 ~ 1.026in)
Exhaust “A” 32.14~ 32.30mm
(1.2654~ 1.2717in)
“B” 25.95~26.05
(1.2165~1.0256）
Camshaft runout limit ----

- 62-
 SPECIFICATIONS
Item Standard Limit
Cam chain
No. of links 126
Cam chain adjustment method Automatic
Rocker arm/rocker arm shaft
Rocker arm inside diameter 12.011~ 12.018 mm
(0.4729 ~ 0.4731 in)
Shaft outside diameter 11.982~ 11.989 mm ----
(0.4717 ~ 0.4720 in)
Arm-to-shaft clearance 0.022 ~ 0.036 mm ----
(0.0009 ~ 0.0014 in)
Valve, valve seat, valve guide
Valve clearance (cold) IN 0.04~ 0.067 mm ----
(0.0016~ 0.0026in)
EX 0.15 ~ 0.20 mm ----
(0.0059 ~ 0.0079 in)
Valve dimensions

head diameter face width seat width margin thickness

“A” head diameter IN 26.9~ 27.1mm ----
(1.0591~ 1.0669 in)
EX 30.9 ~ 31.1 mm ----
(1.2165 ~ 1.2244in)
“B” face width IN 2.25 mm (0.0900 in) ----
EX 2.26 mm(0.0890 in) ----

“C” seat width IN 0.9 ~ 1.1 mm ----

(0.0354 ~ 0.0433 in)
EX 0.9 ~ 1.1 mm ----
(0.0354 ~ 0.0433 in)
“D” margin thickness IN 0.85 ~ 1.15 mm ----
(0.0335 ~ 0.0453 in)
EX 0.85 ~ 1.15 mm ----
(0.0335 ~ 0.0453 in)
Stem outside diameter IN 4.945~ 4.960mm ----
(0.1947 ~ 0.1953 in)
EX 4.945~ 4.960 mm ----
(0.1947 ~ 0.1953 in)
Guide inside diameter IN 5.000 ~ 5.012 mm ----
(0.1969~ 0.1973 in)
EX 5.000 ~ 5.012 mm ----
(0.1969~ 0.1973 in)

- 63-
 SPECIFICATIONS
Item Standard Limit
Stem-to-guide clearance IN 0.010 ~ 0.037 mm 0.08 mm
(0.0004 ~ 0.0015 in) (0.0031 in)
EX 0.025 ~ 0.052 mm 0.10 mm
(0.0010 ~ 0.0020 in) (0.0039 in)
Stem runout limit ---- 0.01 mm
(0.0004 in)

Valve seat width IN 0.9 ~ 1.1 mm ----

(0.0354 ~ 0.0433 in)
EX 0.9 ~ 1.1 mm ----
(0.0354 ~ 0.0433 in)
Valve spring
Inner spring
Free length IN 41.0mm (1.61 in) ----
EX 41.0mm(1.61in) ----
Set length (valve closed) IN 31.0mm (1.22 in) ----
EX 31.0 mm(1.22 in) ----
Compressed pressure
(installed) IN 250.0 ~ 290.0N ----
(25.51 ~ 29.59 kg, 56.25 ~ 65.25 lb) ----
EX 250.0 ~ 290.0N ----
(25.51 ~ 29.59 kg, 56.25 ~ 65.25 lb) ----
Tilt limit * IN ---- 2.5°/1.4 mm
(2.5°/0.055 in)
EX ---- 2.5°/1.6 mm
(2.5°/0.063 in)

Direction of winding
(top view) IN Clockwise ----
EX Clockwise ----

- 64-
 SPECIFICATIONS
Item Standard Limit
Piston
Piston to cylinder clearance 0.050 ~ 0.070 mm 0.15 mm
(0.0020 ~ 0.0028 in) (0.0059 in)
Piston size “D” 90.940 ~ 90.955mm ----
(3.5803 ~ 3.5809 in)

----
Measuring point “H” 4.0 mm (0.15 in) ----
Piston off-set 0.5mm(0.0394 in) ----
Off-set direction Intake side ----
Piston pin bore inside diameter 20.002 ~ 20.008mm ----
(0.7875 ~ 0.7877in)
Piston pin outside diameter 19.99 ~ 19.995 mm ----
(0.7870 ~ 0.7872 in)
Piston rings
Top ring

Type Barrel ----

Dimensions (B×T) 1.2 ×3.5 mm ----
(0.0472 ×0.1378in)
End gap (installed) 0.25 ~ 0.40 mm ----
(0.0098~ 0.0157 in) ----
Side clearance (installed) 0.04 ~ 0.08 mm ----
(0.0016 ~ 0.0031 in) ----
2nd ring

----
Type Taper
----
Dimensions (B ×T) 1.5×3.9 mm
(0.0591~0.1535 in)
----
End gap (installed) 0.30 ~ 0.50mm
----
(0.0118 ~ 0.0197in)
----
Side clearance 0.03 ~ 0.07 mm
----
(0.0012 ~ 0.0028 in)

- 65-
 SPECIFICATIONS
Item Standard Limit
Oil ring

4.0×3.40mm ----

Dimensions (B×T) (0.1575×0.1339in)

0.20 ~ 0.70 mm ----

End gap (installed) (0.0079 ~ 0.0276 in)

0.06 ~ 0.15 mm ----

Side clearance (0.0024 ~ 0.0059 in)

Crankshaft

Crank width “A” 90.523~ 90.577mm ----

(3.5639 ~ 3.5660in)
Runout limit C1 ---- 0.03 mm
C2 ---- (0.0012 in)
Big end side clearance “D” 0.35 ~ 0.65 mm 0.03 mm
(0.0138 ~ 0.0256 in) (0.0012 in)
Big end radial clearance “E” 0.010 ~ 0.025 mm 1.0 mm
(0.0004 ~ 0.0010 in) (0.0394 in)

Automatic centrifugal clutch

Clutch engagement speed 1800r/min

- 66-
 SPECIFICATIONS
Item Standard Limit
Shifter
Shifter type Shift drum and guide bar ----
Air filter oil grade Engine oil ----
Oil pump
Oil filter type Chartaceous ----
Oil pump type Trochoid ---
Tip clearance 0.15 mm ----
(0.0059 in) ----
Side clearance 0.03 ~ 0.10 mm ----
(0.0012 ~ 0.0039 in) ----
Body clearance 0.09 ~ 0.17 mm ----
(0.0035 ~ 0.0067 in) ----
Bypass valve setting pressure 441.0 ~ 637.0 Kpa ----
(4.41 ~ 6.37 kg/cm2, 62.7 ~ 90.6 psi) ----
Oil pressure (hot) 65 Kpa (0.65 kg/cm2, 9.2 psi) ----
at 1,500 r/min ----
Pressure check location Cylinder head ----
Water pump
Type Single-suction centrifugal pump ----
Reduction ratio 15/15 (1.0) ----
Shaft drive
Middle gear backlash 0.1 ~ 0.3 mm (0.004 ~ 0.012 in) ----
Final gear backlash 0.1 ~ 0.3 mm (0.004 ~ 0.012 in) ----
Differential gear backlash 0.05 ~ 0.25 mm(0.002 ~ 0.010 in) ----
Cooling system
Radiator core
Width 380 mm (14.96 in) ----
Height 238 mm (9.37 in) ----
Thickness 24 mm (0.94 in) ----
Radiator cap opening pressure 107.9 ~ 137.3 Kpa ----
(1.079~1.373 kg /cm2, 15.35~19.53 psi)
Radiator capacity 2.5 L (2.20 Imp qt, 2.64 US qt) ----
(including all routes)
Coolant reservoir
Capacity 0.35 L (0.31 Imp qt, 0.37 US qt) ----
From low to full level 0.20 L (0.15 Imp qt, 0.21 US qt) ----

- 67-
 SPECIFICATIONS

CHASSIS SPECIFICATIONS

Item Standard Limit

Steering system
Type Rack and pinion ----
Front suspension
Shock absorber travel 58 mm (2.28 in) ----
Spring free length 320 mm (12.60 in) ----
Spring fitting length 245 mm (9.65in) ----
Spring rate 21 N/mm(2.1kg/mm, 117.60lb/in) ----
Stroke 75-165 mm (2.95 ~ 6.49in)
Rear suspension
Shock absorber travel 81 mm (3.19 in) ----
Spring free length 328 mm (12.91 in) ----
Spring fitting length 273.2 mm (10.76 in)+ ----
Spring rate 44.1 N/mm (4.41 kg/mm, 246.95 lb/in) ----
117.7N/mm (11.77kg/mm, 659.08 lb/in) ----
Stroke 0 ~ 60 mm (0 ~ 2.36 in) ----
60 ~ 81 mm (2.36 ~ 3.19in) ----
Front wheel
Type Aluminum Alloy wheel ----
Rim size 12 ×6.0 AT ----
Rim material ST12/ZL101A ----
Rim runout limit radial ---- 1.0 mm
(0.04in)
lateral ---- 1.0 mm
(0.04 in)
Rear wheel
Type Panel wheel ----
Rim size 12×8.0 AT ----
Rim material Steel ----
Rim runout limit radial ---- 2.0 mm
(0.08 in)
lateral ---- 2.0 mm
(0.08 in)
Brake lever and brake pedal
Accelerator pedal free play 2 ~ 3mm (0.079 ~ 0.118 in) ----
Brake pedal free play 2 ~ 3mm (0.079 ~ 0.118 in) ----
Parking brake cable free play 2 ~ 3 mm (0.079 ~ 0.118 in) ----

- 68-
 SPECIFICATIONS
Item Standard Limit
Front disc brake
Type Dual ----
Disc outside diameter × thickness 200 × 3.5 mm (7.87 × 0.14 in) ----
Pad thickness inner 9.0 mm (0.35 in) ----
Pad thickness outer 9.0 mm (0.35 in) ----
Master cylinder inside diameter 19.0mm (0.75in) ----
Caliper cylinder inside diameter 25.0mm （0.98in） ----
Brake fluid type DOT 4 ----

Rear disc brake

Type Dual ----
Disc outside diameter × thickness 183.0× 3.5 mm (7.20× 0.14in) ----
Pad thickness inner 9.0 mm (0.35 in) ----
Pad thickness outer 9.0 mm (0.35 in) ----
Master cylinder inside diameter 19.0mm (0.75in) ----
Caliper cylinder inside diameter 25.0mm （0.98in） ----
Brake fluid type DOT 4 ----

- 69-
 SPECIFICATIONS

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Item Standard Limit

Voltage 12 V ----
Ignition system
Ignition timing (BTDC) 15°±1°before TDC ----
Advancer type ECU Digital type ----
C.D.I.
Pickup coil resistance/color 459 ~ 561 Ωat 20 °C (68 °F)/ ----
White/Red – White/Green ----
Rotor rotation direction sensing coil 0.063 ~ 0.077 Ωat 20 °C (68 °F)/
resistance/color Green-Blue/White
Ignition coil
Minimum spark gap 6 mm (0.24 in) ----
Primary winding resistance 0.18 ~ 0.28 Ωat 20 °C (68 °F) ----
Secondary winding resistance 6.32 ~ 9.48 kΩat 20 °C (68 °F) ----
Spark plug cap
Resistance 10 kΩ ----
Charging system
Nominal output 14 V 23 A at 4,500 r/min ----
Charging coil resistance/color 0.32 ~ 0.43Ωat 20 ℃ (68 °F)/White – White – ----
White
Rectifier/regulator
Regulator type Semi conductor-Switch type ----
No load regulated voltage (DC) 14.1 ~ 14.9 V ----
Capacity 18 A ----
Withstand voltage 200 V ----
Battery
Specific gravity 1.32 ----
Circuit breaker
Type Fuse ----
Main fuse 30A×1
Lighting system fuse 15 A×1 ----
Ignition fuse 10 A×1 ----
Auxiliary DC jack fuse 10 A×1 ----
Four-wheel drive fuse 10A×1 ----
Signaling system fuse 10 A×1 ----
Backup fuse(odometer) 10 A×1 ----
Radiator fan
Running rpm 2,950 r/min

- 70-
 SPECIFICATIONS

Item Standard Limit

Electric starter system
Type Constant mesh type ----
Starter motor ----
Output 0.8 kW ----
Armature coil resistance 0.025 ~ 0.035 Ωat 20 °C (68 °F) ----
Brush overall length 12.5 mm (0.49 in) 5 mm(0.20 in)
Spring force 7.65 ~ 10.01 N ----
(780 ~ 1,021 g, 27.5 ~ 36.0 oz)
Commutator diameter 28 mm (1.10 in) 27 mm(1.06 in)
Mica undercut 0.7 mm (0.03 in)
Starter relay ----
Amperage rating 180 A -----
Coil winding resistance 4.18 ~ 4.62 at 20 °C (68 °F)

- 71-
 SPECIFICATIONS

TIGHTENING TORQUES
Engine tightening torques
Thread Tightening torque
Part to be tightened Part name Q’ty Remarks
size Nm m · kg ft · lb
Cylinder head Bolt M6 1 10 1.0 7.2
Bolt M9 6 38 3.8 27
Spark plug — M12 1 18 1.8 13
Cylinder head (exhaust pipe) Stud bolt M8 4 15 1.5 11
Cylinder head cover Bolt M6 17 10 1.0 7.2
Tappet cover (exhaust) — M32 2 12 1.2 8.7
Tappet cover (intake) Bolt M6 4 10 1.0 7.2
Oil gallery bolt — M6 1 7 0.7 5.1
Camshaft end cap Bolt M6 1 10 1.0 7.2
Cylinder Bolt M6 2 10 1.0 7.2
Bolt M10 4 42 4.2 30
Balancer driven gear Nut M18 1 110 11.0 80
Timing chain tensioner Bolt M6 2 10 1.0 7.2
Timing chain tensioner cap Bolt M6 1 7 0.7 5.1
Timing chain guide (intake side) Bolt M6 2 8 0.8 5.8
Camshaft sprocket Bolt M7 2 20 2.0 14
Rocker arm shaft stopper Bolt M6 2 10 1.0 7.2
Valve adjusting locknut — M6 5 14 1.4 10
Engine oil drain bolt — M14 1 30 3.0 22
Oil filter cartridge union bolt — M20 1 63 6.3 4.6
Oil filter cartridge — M20 1 17 1.7 12
Oil pipe assembly Bolt M6 4 7 0.7 5.1
Oil delivery pipe 1 Union Bolt M8 2 18 1.8 13
Oil delivery pipe 2 Union Bolt M14 1 35 3.5 25
Oil delivery pipe 3 Union Bolt M10 1 20 2.0 14
Oil delivery pipe 2 and oil delivery Union bolt M14 1 35 3.5 25
pipe 3
Relief valve assembly plate Bolt M6 2 10 1.0 7.2
Oil strainer Bolt M6 1 10 1.0 7.2
Oil pump assembly Bolt M6 3 10 1.0 7.2
Oil cooler inlet pipe 1/oil cooler Bolt M6 2 7 0.7 5.1
outlet pipe 1
Oil cooler inlet pipe 1/oil cooler Bolt M6 1 7 0.7 5.1
outlet pipe 1 clamp
Oil cooler inlet pipe 2/oil cooler Bolt M6 2 7 0.7 5.1
outlet pipe 2 clamp
Intake manifold Bolt M6 4 10 1.0 7.2
Carburetor joint (intake manifold) — M5 1 3 0.3 2.1
Intake manifold screw clamp — M5 1 3 0.3 2.1

- 72-
 SPECIFICATIONS
Thread Tightening torque
Part to be tightened Part name Q’ty Remarks
size Nm m · kg ft · lb
Bolt M8 3 26 2.6 19
Bolt M6 14 10 1.0 7.2
Crankcase
Bolt M6 1 10 1.0 7.2

Bearing housing (clutch housing

Bolt M6 1 10 1.0 7.2
assembly)
Air duct assembly 1 bracket Bolt M6 2 14 1.4 10
Oil seal (engine cooling fan pulley)
Bolt M5 2 7 0.7 5.1
Retainer
Drive belt case Bolt M6 9 10 1.0 7.2
Drive belt cover Bolt M6 14 10 1.0 7.2
Engine cooling fan Bolt M6 2 7 0.7 5.1
Air shroud 1 and air shroud 2 Bolt M6 4 10 1.0 7.2
Air shroud 2 and A.C. magneto cover Bolt M6 4 10 1.0 7.2
Engine cooling fan pulley Bolt M10 1 55 5.5 40
Engine cooling fan air duct assembly Bolt M6 1 7 0.7 5.1
Stator assembly Screw M6 3 7 0.7 5.1
Pickup coil Bolt M5 2 7 0.7 5.1
Stator lead holder Bolt M6 2 10 1.0 7.2
A.C. magneto cover Bolt M6 12 10 1.0 7.2
Starter clutch Bolt M8 3 30 3.0 22
Clutch carrier assembly Nut M22 1 160 16.0 115 Stake
Clutch housing assembly Bolt M6 9 10 1.0 7.2
Bearing retainer (middle drive shaft) Screw M8 4 29 2.9 21
Middle drive pinion gear Nut M22 1 145 14.5 105 Stake
Middle drive shaft bearing housing Bolt M8 4 32 3.2 23
Middle driven pinion gear bearing Left-hand
Nut M60 1 110 11.0 80
Retainer threads
Universal joint yoke and middle
Nut M16 1 150 15.0 110
driven pinion gear
Middle driven pinion gear bearing
Bolt M8 4 25 2.5 18
Housing
Drive shaft coupling and middle
Nut M14 1 97 9.7 70
driven shaft
Middle driven shaft bearing Left-hand
Nut M55 1 80 8.0 58
retainer threads
Primary sheave assembly Nut M16 1 120 12.0 85
Primary pulley sheave cap Screw M4 8 3 0.3 2.2
Secondary sheave assembly Nut M16 1 100 10.0 72
Secondary sheave spring retainer Nut M36 1 90 9.0 65
Shift lever cover Bolt M6 4 10 1.0 7.2
Shift lever 2 assembly Bolt M6 1 14 1.4 10
Shift drum stopper Bolt M14 1 18 1.8 13
Shift arm Bolt M6 1 14 1.4 10

- 73-
 SPECIFICATIONS
Thread Q’ty 15 1.5 11
Part to be tightened Part name Remarks
size Nm m.kg ft · lb Nm
Left-hand
Shift rod locknut (select lever unit) — M8 1 15 1.5 11
threads
Shift rod locknut (shift arm side) — M8 1 15 1.5 11
Select lever unit Bolt M8 3 15 1.5 11
Plug (right crankcase) — M14 1 18 1.8 13
Water pump assembly Bolt M6 2 10 1.0 7.2
Water pump housing cover Bolt M6 2 12 1.2 8.7
Coolant drain bolt — M6 1 10 1.0 7.2
Coolant inlet joint Bolt M6 2 10 1.0 7.2
Coolant outlet joint Bolt M6 2 10 1.0 7.2
Air bleed bolt (coolant outlet joint) — M6 1 9 0.9 6.5
Coolant reservoir Bolt M6 2 7 0.7 5.1
Radiator bracket and frame Bolt M6 4 7 0.7 5.1
Fuel pump Bolt M6 2 7 0.7 5.1
Fuel tank Bolt M8 2 30 3.0 22
Muffler stay Bolt M6 2 11 1.1 8.0
Muffler and exhaust pipe Bolt M8 1 20 2.0 14
Muffler bracket and muffler Bolt M8 1 20 2.0 14
Muffler bracket and frame Bolt M8 2 20 2.0 14
Muffler damper and muffler Bolt M6 1 10 1.0 7.2
Muffler damper and frame Bolt M6 1 10 1.0 7.2
Exhaust pipe Nut M8 4 14 1.4 10
Air duct assembly 1 Bolt M6 2 7 0.7 5.1
Air duct assembly 2 and left protector Bolt M6 1 7 0.7 5.1
Air duct assembly 2 and frame Bolt M6 1 7 0.7 5.1
Gear position switch Bolt M5 2 7 0.7 5.1
Thermo switch 1 (cylinder head) — 1/8 1 8 0.8 5.8
Thermo switch 3 (radiator) — M18 1 28 2.8 20
Reverse switch — M10 1 20 2.0 14
Engine ground lead Bolt M6 1 10 1.0 7.2
Starter motor and engine Bolt M6 2 10 1.0 7.2

- 74-
 SPECIFICATIONS

Chassis tightening torques

Thread Tightening torque
Part to be tightened Remarks
size Nm m · kg ft · lb
Rubber connecting bracket 1(or 2) and frame M10 52 5.2 37
Engine and Rubber connecting bracket 2 (front) M10 52 5.2 37
M6 10 1.0 7.2
Engine and Rubber connecting bracket 1 (rear) M8 33 3.3 24
M6 10 1.0 7.2
Rear upper arm and frame M10 45 4.5 32
Rear lower arm and frame M10 45 4.5 32
Rear knuckle and rear upper arm M10 45 4.5 32
Rear knuckle and rear lower arm M10 45 4.5 32
Rear shock absorber and frame M10 45 4.5 32
Rear shock absorber and rear lower arm M10 45 4.5 32
Rear Balancing pole and frame M8 32 3.2 23
ball head of Rear Balancing pole and Rear Balancing pole M10 56 5.6 40
ball head of Rear Balancing pole and rear lower arm M10 56 5.6 40
Differential gear case and frame M10 55 5.5 40
Differential gear case filler plug M14 23 2.3 17
Differential gear case drain plug M10 10 1.0 7.2
Universal joint yoke and drive pinion gear M14 62 6.2 45
Differential motor and differential gear case cover M8 13 1.3 9.4
Differential gear case cover and differential gear case M8 25 2.5 18
Rear driving axle gear case and frame M10 70 7.0 51
Rear driving axle gear case filler plug M20 23 2.3 17
Rear driving axle gear case drain plug M10 20 2.0 14
Ring gear bearing housing and final drive gear case M8 23 2.3 17
M10 40 4.0 29
Ring gear stopper nut M8 16 1.6 11
Bearing retainer and final gear pinion gear bearing housing Left-hand
M65 170 17.0 125
threads
Coupling gear and final drive pinion gear M12 80 8.0 58
Front upper arm and frame M10 45 4.5 32
Front lower arm and frame M10 45 4.5 32
Front shock absorber and frame M10 45 4.5 32
Front shock absorber and front upper arm M10 45 4.5 32
Steering shaft assembly and steering Cross gimbal M8 22 2.2 16
Steering assembly and steering Cross gimbal M8 22 2.2 16
Steering assembly and frame M10 48 4.8 35
Steering shaft assembly and frame M8 21 2.1 15
Steering wheel and steering shaft assembly M12 35 3.5 25
Steering knuckle and front upper arm M12 30 3.0 22
Steering knuckle and front lower arm M12 30 3.0 22
Tie-rod locknut M12 40 4.0 29
Steering knuckle and tie-rod M12 39 3.9 28
Front lower arm protector board and front lower arm M6 7 0.7 5.1
Seat belt and frame M10 59 5.9 43

- 75-
 SPECIFICATIONS
Thread Tightening torque
Part to be tightened Remarks
size Nm m · kg ft · lb
Seat belt and ceiling (enclosure) 7/16 59 5.9 43
Front wheel and front wheel hub M10 55 5.5 40
Front wheel hub and constant velocity joint of half
M20 260 26.0 190 Stake
shaft
Steering knuckle and brake disc guard M6 7 0.7 5.1
Front brake caliper and front wheel steering knuckle M10 48 4.8 35
Front brake hose union bolt M10 27 2.7 19
Front brake hose holder and steering knuckle M6 7 0.7 5.1
Front brake hose holder and front upper arm M6 7 0.7 5.1
Front brake hose holder and frame M6 7 0.7 5.1
Front brake pad holding bolt M8 18 1.8 13
Front brake disc and front wheel hub M8 30 3.0 22
Front brake caliper bleed screw M6 6 0.6 4.3
Rear wheel and rear wheel hub M10 55 5.5 40
Rear wheel hub and constant velocity joint of half shaft M20 260 26.0 190 Stake
Rear brake hose and frame M6 7 0.7 5.1
Brake pipe and brake master cylinder M10 19 1.9 13
Pedal holder assembly and frame M8 16 1.6 11
Brake master cylinder and pedal holder assembly M8 16 1.6 11
Secondary brake master cylinder kit stopper bolt M6 9 0.9 6.5
Brake rod locknut M8 17 1.7 12
Rear brake disc and brake disc Install seat M6 10 1.0 7.2
Rear brake pad holding bolt M8 17 1.7 12
Rear brake caliper and Install seat M10 40 4.0 29
Rear brake hose union bolt M10 27 2.7 19
Parking brake case and rear brake caliper M8 22 2.2 16
Parking brake lever assembly and frame M6 7 0.7 5.1
Rear brake caliper bleed screw M6 5 0.5 3.6
Upper instrument panel and frame M6 7 0.7 5.1
Support frame (enclosure) and frame M10 64 6.4 46
Support frame (enclosure) and side frame
M10 64 6.4 46
(enclosure)
Top frame (enclosure) and side frame (enclosure) M10 64 6.4 46
Seat support and frame M8 16 1.6 11
Footrest plate and frame M6 7 0.7 5.1

- 76-
 SPECIFICATIONS

GENERAL TIGHTENING TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

This chart specifies tightening torques for standard fasteners with a standard ISO thread pitch.
Tightening torque specifications for special components or assemblies are provided for each chapter
of this manual. To avoid warpage, tighten multi-fastener assemblies in a crisscross pattern and
progressive stages until the specified tightening torque is reached. Unless otherwise specified,
tightening torque specifications require clean, dry threads. Components should be at room
temperature.

A: Distance between flats

B: Outside thread diameter

A B General tightening torques

(nut) (bolt) Nm m · kg ft · lb

10 mm 6 mm 6 0.6 4.3

12 mm 8 mm 15 1.5 11

14 mm 10 mm 30 3.0 22

17 mm 12 mm 55 5.5 40

19 mm 14 mm 85 8.5 61

22 mm 16 mm 130 13.0 94

- 77-
 SPECIFICATIONS

LUBRICATION PIONTS AND LUBRICANT TYPES

Engine
Lubrication points Lubricant
Oil seal lips Apply lithium-soap-based grease
Bearings Apply engine oil
O-rings Apply lithium-soap-based grease
Piston, piston ring Apply engine oil
Piston pin Apply engine oil
Buffer boss and balancer drive gear Apply engine oil
Crankshaft seal and spacer Apply engine oil
Valve stem Apply molybdenum disulfide oil
Valve stem end Apply molybdenum disulfide oil
Rocker arm shaft Apply engine oil
Rocker arm Apply molybdenum disulfide
grease
Camshaft lobe and journal Apply molybdenum disulfide
grease
Oil pump assembly Apply engine oil
Oil filter cartridge O-ring Apply lithium-soap- based grease
Starter idle gear shaft Apply molybdenum disulfide
grease
Starter wheel gear Apply engine oil
Clutch housing assembly shaft end Apply lithium-soap- based grease
Clutch carrier assembly Apply engine oil
One-way clutch bearing Apply molybdenum disulfide
grease
Middle driven shaft splines Apply molybdenum disulfide oil
Drive axle, driven sprocket, high wheel gear, and low wheel gear Apply molybdenum disulfide oil
Middle drive gear and clutch dog shift fork groove Apply molybdenum disulfide oil
Driven chain/sprocket Apply engine oil
Shift drum Apply engine oil
Shift fork guide bar Apply engine oil
Shift drum stopper ball Apply engine oil
Shift lever 2 assembly Apply lithium-soap- based grease
Shift lever 1 Apply engine oil
Shift lever 1 and shift lever 2 assembly mating surface Apply engine oil

- 78-
 SPECIFICATIONS

CHASSIS
Lubrication points Lubricant
Lip of oil seal (full) Light lithium-base frease
o-ring(full) Light lithium-base frease
Steering shaft (upper end ,lower end) Light lithium-base frease
Ball connection of steering pushing rod Light lithium-base frease
Front wheel fork(ball-shaped joint) Light lithium-base frease
Front wheel fork (ball-shaped joint) Light lithium-base frease
Front wheel bearing Light lithium-base frease
Front & rear brake Light lithium-base frease
Dust-proof ring of brake Light lithium-base frease
Joint of front brake cable Light lithium-base frease
Front brake lever axle and rear brake lever axle Light lithium-base frease
Adjusting nut and pin of rear brake cable Light lithium-base frease
Rear brake pedal pivot and brake pedal axle hole Light lithium-base frease
Throttle rotating frame shaft and end section of throttle cable Light lithium-base frease
Reverse gear lever pivot Light lithium-base frease
Connection bolt of rear wheel fork and frame,rear wheel fork Light lithium-base frease
bearing
Rubber sleeve and rear wheel fork Seal gum
Rear shock absorber bushing Light lithium-base frease

- 79-
 SPECIFICATIONS

HYDROGRAPHIC CHART

Hydrographic chart
：Pressure

- 80-
 SPECIFICATIONS

LUBRICATION OIL WAY

LUBRICATION OIL WAY

：Pressure
：splashing oil

- 81-
 SPECIFICATIONS

Engine gearbox lubrication oil path circuit

Gearbox lubrication oil path circuit

：Pressure
：splashing oil

- 82-
 MAINTENCE AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE UTV
MAINTENCE AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE UTV
NOTE:
The correct maintenance and adjustment are necessary to ensure vehicle and normal driving
The repair personnel should be familiar with the contents of this article.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
EVERY INITAL
Whichever month 1 3 6 6 12
ITEM ROUTINE comes first km 320 1,200 2,400 2,400 4,800
(mi) (200) (750) (1,500) (1,500) (3,000)
hours 20 75 150 150 300
· Check for leakage.
Exhaust system* · Tighten if necessary. ○ ○
· Replace gasket(s) if necessary.
Spark arrester ·Clean. ○ ○ ○

·Check fuel hose for cracks or damage.

Fuel line* ○ ○ ○
·Replace if necessary.
· clean. Every20-40hours
Air filter element
·Replace if necessary. （More often in wet of dusty areas.）
· Check operation/ fluid leakage.（See
Front brake* NOTE page 8). ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
· Correct if necessary.
· Check operation.
Rear brake* ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
· Adjust if necessary.
·Check balance/damage/
Wheel ○ ○ ○ ○
· Repair if necessary.
Front and rear · Check operation.
○ ○
suspension* ·Correct if necessary.
· Check bearing assemblies for
Wheel bearing* looseness /damage. ○ ○ ○ ○
·Replace if necessary.
·Check operation./Replace if damaged
Steering system* ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
·check toe-in./Adjust if necessary.
Select lever safety ·Check operation.
○ ○ ○
system cable · Adjust if necessary.
Drive shaft universal · Lubricate with lithium–soap–based
○ ○ ○
joint* grease.
· Check operation.
Axle boots* ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
· Replace if damaged.
Fittings and ·Check all chassis fittings and fasteners.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○
fasteners* ·Correct if necessary.
· Check valve clearance.
Valves ○ ○ ○ ○
· Adjust if necessary.

- 83 -
 MAINTENCE AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE UTV

·Check condition.
Spark plug · Adjust gap and clean. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
· Rep; ace if necessary.
· Check and adjusted idle speed/starter
Carburetor* operation. ○ ○ ○ ○
·Adjust if necessary.
· Check operation.
V-belt* ○ ○ ○ ○
· Check for cracks or damage.
· Check breather hose for cracks of
Crankcase breather
damage. ○ ○
system* ○
·Replace if necessary.
· Replace.(Warm engine before
Engine oil ○ ○ ○ ○
draining.)

Engine oil strainer* ·Clean. ○ ○ ○ ○

Engine oil filter

· Replace. ○ ○ ○ ○
cartridge

Final gear oil · Check oil level /oil leakage.

○ ○
· Replace
Differential gear oil

· Check operation.
Lights and switches* ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
· Adjust headlight beams.

NOTE:
·Recommended brake fluid: DOT 4
·Brake fluid replacement:
·When disassembling the master cylinder or caliper, replace the brake fluid. Normally check the
brake fluid level and add fluid as required.
·On the inner parts of the master cylinder and caliper, replace the oil seals every two years.
·Replace the brake hoses every four years, or if cracked or damaged.

- 84 -
MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE UTV
ENGINE
Adjusting the valve clearance

NOTE:
·The valve clearance must be adjusted when the
engine is cool to the touch.
·Adjust the valve clearance when the piston is at
the Top Dead Center TDC) on the compression
stroke.
·Remove:
·driver seat
·passenger seat
·console

1. Remove following parts：

① spark plug
② air-intake valve cover
③ Ignition signal sensor
④ left front cover, crank case
⑤ bolt M6 x 10
⑥ cylinder #1
⑦ cylinder #2

2. Remove：
① remove the bolts ⑤
② Ignition signal sensor
③ left front cover crankcase
④ cylinder cover

- 85 -
MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE UTV
3. Check:
·valve clearance
·Beyond the standard Adjust.

Valve clearance (cold)

Intake
0.08 ~ 0.12 mm
(0.0031 ~ 0.0047 in)
Exhaust
0.12 ~ 0.16 mm
(0.0047 ~ 0.0063 in)

4. calibration
adjusting tools ○
A

Spin the crank, when the rotoflex’s scale shows 1,

it is cylinder 1’s timing; spin the crank counter
clockwise 270°, the rotoflex’s scale shows 2, it is
cylinder 2’s timing, the valve clearance of cylinder
2 can be adjusted

- 86 -
MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE UTV

5. Adjust the valve clearance of cylinder 1, and

cylinder 2 the same way
valve clearance
① Lock nut
② Valve thickness gauge（gap Regulation）
③ Regulator
④ Adjust tools
· Loosen the locknut ①.
· Insert a thickness gauge ③ between the adjuster
end and the valve end.
·Turn the adjuster ③ clockwise or counterclockwise
with the tappet adjusting tool ④until the proper
clearance is obtained.
· in order to avoid adjuster rotating along, fix the lock
nut after finishing

Fixed nut
14 Nm(1.4 m·kgf, 10 ft·lbs)

· Measuring clear
· Measure the clearance of valve with gap gauge.
· If the gap beyond the standard value, repeat the
above steps until the correct gap.
6. Install all removed parts
According to remove the reverse order for
installation
① left front cover, crankcase
② ignition sensor
③ Bolt M6×10
④ air intake valve cover
⑤ Lower the cargo bed.
⑥ console
⑦ passenger seat
⑧ driver seat
Refer to “SEATS” in chapter 5.

- 87 -
MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE UTV

CHECKING THE SPARK PLUG

1. lift up cargo box and dismount the seat
2. Remove:
pull out the spark plug cap ①
3. Check:
·spark plug type
Incorrect Replace.

Standard spark plug

DPR8EA-9/NGK

4. Check:
·electrode ①
To check if it is burned blunt or much carbon is
there, then check the pole clearance by thickness
gauge. It is qualified if the pole clearance is between
0.8 to 0.9mm. Otherwise it should be adjusted.
Wear/damage Replace.
·insulator ②
Abnormal color Replace.
Normal color is a medium-to-light tan color.
5. Clean the spark plug with a spark plug cleaner or
wire brush.
6. Install:
·spark plug
17.5 Nm(1.75 m·kgf, 12.7 ft·lbs)

·Then hook up the spark plug cap.

NOTE:
Before installing a spark plug, clean the gasket
surface and plug surface.
7. Install:
·Lower the cargo bed
·console
·passenger seat
·driver seat

- 88 -
MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE UTV

CHECKING THE IGNITION TIMING

NOTE:
before checking the ignition timing, adjust the
engine’s racing speed and throttle cable.

1. Remove:
·driver seat
·passenger seat
·console
Refer to “SEATS” in chapter 5.

2. Lift the cargo bed up.

3. Attach:
· Engine tachometer ⑤
(to the spark plug lead)
4. Remove:
Refer to remove manual starting mechanism
②、③、① name
5. Check:
· Engine tachometer
a. worm up the engine at specified speed

Engine speed
1,400 ~ 1,500 r/min

b. Remove Ignition signal sensor ②

c. Visually check the stationary pointer ③ to verify it
is within the required firing range④indicated on the
flywheel.
Incorrect firing range Check the pulser coil
assembly.
d. Install the timing plug.
6. Install:
·Engine manual starting mechanism

7 Nm (0.7 m · kg, 5.1 ft · lb)

7. Install:
·manual starting mechanism cover
10 Nm (1.0 m · kg, 7.2 ft · lb)
8. Detach:
· timing light
9. Lower the cargo bed.
10. Install:

- 89 -
MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE UTV
·console
·passenger seat
·driver seat
Refer to “SEATS” in chapter 5.

MEASURING THE COMPRESSION PRESSURE

NOTE:
Insufficient compression pressure will result in
a loss of performance.

1. Start the engine and let it warm up for several

minutes.
2. Stop the engine and remove the spark plug.
3. Assemble the compression pressure meter ①
and joint utensil ② on the hole of the spark plug
4. check
valve clearance
Out of specification Adjust. Refer to “ADJUSTING
THE VALVE CLEARANCE”
standard value
standard compression pressure data
1200Kpa (12kg/c)-1000r/min
5. read the highest data on the compression
pressure meter
·Above the maximum pressure:
Check the cylinder head, valve surfaces, and
piston crown for carbon deposits.
·Below the minimum pressure:
Check the accumulation carbon in the firebox of
the cylinder head and accumulation carbon on the
piston head.
·Refer to the table below.

Compression pressure(with oil introduced into

cylinder)
Reading Diagnosis
Higher than Worn or damaged pistons
without oil
Same as without Defective ring(s), valves,
oil cylinder head gasket or
piston is possible.

Compression pressure
(at sea level)
Standard: 1,324Kpa
(13.24 kg/cm2, 188.31Psi)
Minimum: 1,150Kpa

- 90 -
MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE UTV
(11.5 kg/cm2, 163.57Psi)
Maximum: 1,480Kpa
(14.8 kg/cm2, 210.50Psi)
·Crank over the engine with the electric starter (be
sure the battery is fully charged) with the throttle
wide-open until the compression reading on the
gauge stabilizes.

NOTE:
When cranking the engine, ground the spark plug
lead to prevent sparking.
4. Install:
·spark plug
18 Nm-20Nm (1.8 m · kg, 13 ft · lb)
5. Lower the cargo bed.

CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1. Place the vehicle on a level surface
2. Remove:
·driver seat
·passenger seat
·console
Refer to “SEATS” in chapter 5.
3. Check:
·engine oil level
Oil level should be between the maximum
②and minimum ③marks.
Oil level low Add oil to the proper level.
NOTE:
Do not screw the dipstick ① in when checking
the oil level.

Recommended oil
Follow the left chart.

NOTE:
Recommended oil classification:
API Service “SE”, “SF”, “SG” type or equivalent
(e.g. “SF—SE—CC”, “SF—SE—SD” etc.)

NOTE:
Do not allow foreign material to enter the
crankcase.

- 91 -
MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE UTV
4. Stop the engine and check the oil level again
NOTE:
Wait a few minutes until the oil settles before
checking the oil level.

NOTE:
Never remove the dipsti]ck just after high speed
operation because the heated oil could spurt out.
Wait until the oil cools down before removing the
dipstick.

6. Install:
·console
·passenger seat
·driver seat
Refer to “SEATS” in chapter 5.

CHANGING THE ENGINE OIL

Place the vehicle on a level surface.
1. Start the engine and let it warm up for several
minutes.
2. Stop the engine and place an oil pan under the
engine.
3. Remove:
·driver seat
·passenger seat
·console
4. Remove:
dismount the following parts step by stem
① oil gauge
⑤ oil-draining blind nut, crankcase
⑥ oil-draining bolt, gear box
⑦ bolt M6 x 20 ,oil filter
⑧ oil filter cover
⑨ sealing ring
⑩ paper core oil filter
5. If you need to change the oil filter core, please
follow the steps below exactly (Generally change
the oil and core after run in-time.)
·Take out the oil gauge, and then dismount ②and
③, drain the oil.
· Dismount bolt ④ with a pipe wrench #8,remove
⑤ and ⑥,then take out ⑦.
· Lubricate the O-ring ③of the new oil filter cartridge

- 92 -
MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE UTV
with a thin coat of lithium-soap-based grease.

NOTE:
Make sure that the O-ring ③ is positioned
correctly in the groove of the oil filter cartridge.

·Tighten the new oil filter cartridge to specification

with an oil filter wrench.
Oil filter cartridge
17 Nm (1.7 m · kg)

6. Install：
·engine oil drain bolt ②
·Final gear oil drain bolt ③

7. conditions
·Change for new oil filter before impouring oil to
crankcase, and make sure it is in good working
condition before assembling.
·make sure that the oil reach regular level when the
vehicle is placed on flat ground.
Oil level of gearbox
Periodic oil change
The oil capacity after the engine is
disassembled and reassembled.
2L
The oil should be put into the engine for after
all the oil is drawn out
2L
8. Install:
·engine oil filler plug
9. Worm up the engine for a few minutes, and then
stop the engine.
10. Check:
·engine (for engine oil leaks)
·refer to Chapter 4 check the level of engine oil
11. Check:
·engine oil pressure
12. Install:
·console
·passenger seat
·driver seat
Refer to “SEATS” in chapter 5.

- 93 -
 MAINTENCE AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE UTV

CHASSIS
CLEANING THE AIR FILTER
NOTE:
There is a check hose ① at the bottom of the
air filter case. If dust and/or water collect in
this hose, clean the air filter element and air
filter case.

1. Remove:
·driver seat
·passenger seat
·console
·air filter case cover ①

·air filter element assembly ①

·air filter element cap ②
·air filter element③
NOTE:
Never operate the engine with the air filter
element removed. This will allow unfiltered air to
enter, causing rapid wear and possible engine
damage. Additionally, operation without the
filter element will affect carburetor tuning with
subsequent poor performance and possible
engine overheating.

2. Check:
·air filter element
·Damaged Replace.
3. Clean:
·air filter element
a. Wash the element gently, but thoroughly in
solvent.

- 94 -
MAINTENCE AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE UTV

WARNING:
Use a cleaning solvent which is designed to
clean parts only. Never use gasoline or low
flash point solvents as they may cause a
fire or explosion.

b. squeeze the excess solvent out of the element

and let it dry.
NOTE:
Do not twist or wring out the element. This could
damage the foam material.

c. Squeeze out the excess oil.

NOTE:
The element should be wet but not dripping.

4. Install:
·air filter element
·air filter case cover
NOTE:
To prevent air leaks make sure that the sealing
surface of the element matches the sealing
surface of the case.

·console
·passenger seat
·driver seat
CHECKING THE COOLANT LEVEL
1. Place the vehicle on a level surface.
2. Remove front faceplate
3. Check:
·start the engine, warm it up for several minutes,
and then turn it off.
·coolant level
NOTE:
Before checking the coolant level, wait a few
minutes until the coolant has settled.

- 95 -
 MAINTENCE AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE UTV

·coolant level
The coolant level should be between the
minimum level mark ○
a and maximum level

mark ○
b .Below the minimum level mark

Add the recommended coolant to the proper level.

CHANGING THE COOLANT

1. Remove:
Front faceplate
·coolant reservoir cap ① ；
·Disconnect coolant reservoir hose ②；
· Adding water instead of coolant lowers the
antifreeze content of the coolant. If water is used
instead of coolant, check and if necessary,
correct the antifreeze concentration of the
coolant；
·Use only distilled water. However, soft water
may be used if distilled water is not available.
2. Drain:
·coolant
(from the coolant reservoir)
3. Connect:
·coolant reservoir hose

4. Remove:
·coolant drain bolt (water pump) ①(along with the
copper washer)

- 96 -
 MAINTENCE AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE UTV
5. Remove:
·radiator cap ①
WARNING:
A hot radiator is under pressure. Therefore, do
not remove the radiator cap when the engine is
hot. Scalding hot fluid and steam may be blown
out, which could cause serious injury. When the
engine has cooled, open the radiator cap as
follows: Place a thick rag or a towel over the
radiator cap and slowly turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise toward the detent to allow
any residual pressure to escape.
When the hissing sound has stopped, turn
the radiator cap counterclockwise while
pressing down on it and then remove it.

6. Drain:
·coolant
7. Disconnect:
·coolant outlet hose ①
·water pump inlet hose ②
8. Drain:
·coolant

9. Check:
·copper washer ①
·coolant drain bolt ②
Damage Replace.
10. Install:
·coolant drain bolt (water pump) T R.

10 Nm (1.0 m · kg, 7.2 ft · lb)

11. Connect:
·water pump inlet hose
·coolant outlet hose

- 97 -
 MAINTENCE AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE UTV
12. Remove:
·air bleed bolt ①
13. Fill cooling
(with the specified amount of the recommended
coolant)

Recommended antifreeze
High-quality ethylene glycol antifreeze
containing corrosion inhibitors for
aluminum engines
Mixing ratio
1 : 1 (antifreeze : water)
Quantity total amount
1.32 L
Coolant reservoir capacity
0.627 L

NOTE:
The specified amount of coolant is a standard
amount. Fill the cooling system with coolant
until coolant comes out of the hole for the air
bleed bolt.
Coolant is potentially harmful and should be
handled with special care.

WARNING:
·If coolant splashes in your eyes, thoroughly
wash them with water and consult a doctor；
·If coolant splashes on your clothes, quickly
wash it away with water and then with soap
and water；
·If coolant is swallowed, induce vomiting and
get immediate medical attention；
·If coolant comes into contact with painted
surfaces, immediately wash them with water；
·Do not mix different types of antifreeze.

- 98 -
 MAINTENCE AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE UTV

NOTE:
Adding water instead of coolant lowers the
antifreeze content of the coolant. If water is
used instead of coolant, check, and if
necessary, correct the antifreeze concentration
of the coolant. Use only distilled water.
However, soft water may be used if distilled
water is not available.

14. Install:
·air bleed bolt

9 Nm (0.9 m · kg, 6.5 ft · lb)

·radiator cap；
·Fill coolant reservoir；
·Install coolant reservoir cap:
·Start the engine, warm it up for several minutes,
and then turn it off.
·Check:
coolant level

Refer to “THE COOLANT” in chapter 4.

NOTE:
Before checking the coolant level, wait a few
minutes until the coolant has settled.

·Close the hood.

·Install driver seat
Refer to “SEATS,” in chapter 5.

CHECKING THE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

WARNING LIGHT
Coolant temperature indicator light ①

- 99 -
 MAINTENCE AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE UTV

Coolant temperature warning light checking method

Turn the main switch “ON”.

Coolant temperature warning light Coolant temperature warning light

does not come on. come on.

Turn the main switch to “START”

with the transmission in neutral
position.

Coolant temperature warning light Coolant temperature warning

comes on momentarily . light does not come on.

Coolant temperature and electrical

Check the electrical circuit
circuit are OK .Go ahead with riding.

CHECKING THE V-BELT

1. Remove:
·driver seat
·drive belt cover
·Check:
a. V-belt ①
Cracks/wear/scaling/chipping Replace.
Oil/ grease Check primary sheave and
secondary sheave。
b. V-belt width ②
Out of specification Replace.

- 100 -
 MAINTENCE AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE UTV

V-belt width: 31.2 mm

<Limit:> 26 mm

·Replace V-belt:
Install the bolts ① into the secondary fixed
sheave hold.

NOTE:
Tightening the bolts ①will push the secondary
sliding sheave away, causing the gap between
the secondary fixed and sliding sheaves to
widen.

·Remove the V-belt ①from the primary sheave

and secondary sheave.
·Install the V-belt.

NOTE:
Install the V-belt so that its arrow faces the
direction shown in the illustration.

· Remove the bolts.

2. Install:
· drive belt cover
· driver seat

CLEANING THE SPARK ARRESTER

1. Clean:
Tap the tailpipe lightly with a soft-face hammer or
suitable tool, then use a wire brush to remove any
carbon deposits from the spark arrester portion of
the tailpipe and the inner contact surfaces of the
muffler
2. Spark arrester

- 101 -
 MAINTENCE AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE UTV

WARNING:
· Select a well-ventilated area free of
combustible materials.
· Always let the exhaust system cool before
performing this operation.
· Do not start the engine when removing the
tailpipe from the muffler.

3. Remove:
·Remove the bolts①.
·Remove the tailpipe ② by pulling it out of the
muffler.
4. Install：
·Insert the tailpipe ② into the muffler and align the
bolt holes.
·Insert the bolt 1 and tighten it.
· Start the engine and rev it up approximately
twenty times while momentarily creating exhaust
system back pressure by blocking the end of the
muffler with a shop towel.
·Stop the engine and allow the exhaust pipe to
cool.

ADJUSTING THE BRAKE PEDAL

1. Check:
· brake pedal free play a Out of specification
adjust.

NOTE:
The end of the brake rod ① should lightly
contact the brake master cylinder ②

Brake pedal free play

0 mm (0.0 in)

3. Adjust：
·brake pedal free play
a. Loosen the locknut ①

- 102 -
 MAINTENCE AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE UTV
b. Turn brake rod ② in or out until the correct free
play is obtained.

Turning in Free play is increased.

Turning out Free play is decreased.
c. Tighten the locknut to specification.

Locknut
17 Nm (1.7 m · kg, 12 ft · lb)

NOTE:
Make sure that there is no brake drag on the
front or rear wheels.

CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID LEVEL

1. Place the vehicle on a level surface.

NOTE:
When checking the brake fluid level, make sure
that the top of the brake fluid reservoir top is
horizontal.

2. Lift the hood up.

3. Check:
·brake fluid level Fluid level is under “MIN” ①
line Fill up.

NOTE:
Brake fluid may erode painted surfaces or
plastic parts. Always clean up spilled fluid
immediately.

WARNING:
· Use only the designed quality brake fluid:
otherwise, the rubber seals may deteriorate,
causing leakage and poor brake performance.
·Refill with the same type of brake fluid: mixing
fluids may result in a harmful chemical
reaction and lead to poor performance.
·Be careful that water does not enter the master
.

- 103 -
 MAINTENCE AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE UTV
cylinder when refilling. Water will significantly
lower the boiling point of the fluid and may
result in a vapor lock.

4. Close the hood.

CHECKING THE FRONT BRAKE PADS

1. Remove:
·front wheels
2. Check:
·brake pads Wear indicator groove ○
a almost

disappeared
Replace the brake pads as a set.
Refer to “FRONT AND REAR BRAKES” in
chapter 5.

Brake pad wear limit ○

a
1.5 mm (0.06 in)
3. Operate the brake pedal.
4. Install:
·front wheels

CHECKING THE REAR BRAKE PADS

1. Check:
·brake pads
Wear indicator groove ○
a almost disappeared

Replace the brake pads as a set.

Refer to “FRONT AND REAR BRAKES” in
chapter 5.

Brake pad wear limit ○

a
1.5 mm (0.06 in)

3. Operate the brake pedal.

- 104 -
 MAINTENCE AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE UTV
CHECKING THE BRAKE HOSES AND BRAKE
PIPES
1. Remove:
·driver seat
Refer to “SEATS” in chapter 5.
2. Lift the hood up.
3. Check:
·front brake hoses ①
·rear brake hoses ②

Cracks/wear/damage Replace.
Fluid leakage Replace all damaged parts.
Refer to “FRONT AND REAR BRAKES” in
chapter 5.
NOTE:
Hold the vehicle in an upright position and apply
the brake pedal.

4. Install driver seat

BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM

WARNING:
Bleed the brake system if:
·The system has been disassembled.
· A brake hose or brake pipe have been
loosened or removed.
·The brake fluid has been very low.
The brake operation has been faulty. A loss of
braking performance may occur if the brake
system is not properly bled.

1. Bleed:
·brake system
a. Add the proper brake fluid to the reservoir.
b. Install the diaphragm. Be careful not to spill any
fluid or allow the reservoir to overflow.
c. Remove the cover of the brake oil pump ① add
the moderate brake liquid.

- 105 -
 MAINTENCE AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE UTV
d. Place the other end of the hose into a container.
e. Slowly apply the brake pedal several times.
f. Push down on the pedal and hold it.
g. Loosen the bleed screw and allow the pedal to
travel towards its limit.
h. Tighten the bleed screw when the pedal limit has
been reached, then release the pedal.
i. Repeat steps (e) to (h) until all the air bubbles
have disappeared from the fluid.
j. Tighten the bleed screw.

Front brake caliper bleed screw

6 Nm (0.6 m · kg, 4.3 ft · lb)
Rear brake caliper bleed screw
5 Nm (0.5 m · kg, 3.6 ft · lb)

NOTE:
If bleeding is difficult, it may be necessary to let
the brake fluid settle for a few hours.
Repeat the bleeding procedure when the tiny
bubbles in the system have disappeared.

k. Add brake fluid to the proper level.

WARNING:
Check the operation of the brake after bleeding
the brake system.

- 106 -
 MAINTENCE AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE UTV
ADJUSTING THE SELECT LEVER SHIFT ROD
① Neutral
② High
③ Low
④ Reverse
⑤ Parking
⑥ Select lever shift rod
WARNING:
Before shifting, you must stop the vehicle and
take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Otherwise, the transmission may be damaged.

1. Adjust:
·Select lever shift rod
a. Make sure the select lever is in NEUTRAL.
b. Loosen both locknuts ①.
WARNING:
The select lever shift rod locknut (select lever
side) has left-handed threads. To loosen the
locknut, turn it clockwise.

c. Tighten the locknuts ①.

ADJUSTING THE BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH

NOTE:
· The brake light switch is operated by
movement of the brake pedal.
·The brake light switch is properly adjusted
when the brake light comes on just before the
braking effect starts.

1 . Check
·brake light operation timing
Incorrect Adjust.
2. Adjust:
·brake light operation timing

- 107 -
 MAINTENCE AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE UTV
a. Hold the main body ① of the brake light switch so
that it does not rotate and turn the adjusting nut ②
in direction ○
a or ○
b until the brake light
comes on at the proper time.

Direction○
a Brake light comes on sooner.
Direction○
b Brake light comes on later.

CHECKING THE FINAL GEAR OIL LEVEL

1. Place the vehicle on a level surface.
2. Remove:
·oil filler plug ①
3. Check:
·oil level
Oil level should be up to the brim of the hole.
Oil level low Add oil to the proper level.

Recommended oil
SAE 80 API GL-4Hypoid gear oil

WARNING:
Take care not allow foreign material to enter the
final gear case.

4. Install:
·oil filler plug

23 Nm (2.3 m · kg, 17 ft · lb)

CHANGING THE FINAL GEAR OIL

1. Place the vehicle on a level surface.
2. Place a container under the final gear case to
collect the used oil.
3. Remove:
·oil filler plug ①
·Fill:
final gear case
.

- 108 -
 MAINTENCE AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE UTV

Periodic oil change : 0.25 L (0.22 Imp qt)

Total amount :
0.4 L (0.35 lmp qt, 0.42 US qt)

WARNING:
Take care not to allow foreign material to enter
the final gear case.

·Install:
oil filler plug

23 Nm (2.3 m · kg, 17 ft · lb)

CHECKING THE DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL

1. Place the vehicle on a level surface.
2. Remove:
·oil filler plug ①
3. Check:
·oil level
Oil level should be up to the brim of hole.
Oil level low Add oil to proper level.
WARNING:
Take care not allow foreign material to enter the
differential gear case.

4. Install:
·oil filler plug

23 Nm (2.3 m · kg, 17 ft · lb)

CHANGING THE DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL

1. Place the vehicle on a level surface.
2. Place a receptacle under the differential gear
case.
3. Remove:
·oil filler plug ①
4. Drain:
·differential gear oil
. .

- 109 -
 MAINTENCE AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE UTV
5. Install:
·drain plug

10 Nm (1.0 m · kg, 7.2 ft · lb)

NOTE:
Check the gasket (drain plug). If it is damaged,
replace it with new one.

6. Fill:
·differential gear case

Periodic oil change

0.32 L (0.28 Imp qt, 0.34 US qt)
Total amount
0.1 L (0.085 lmp qt, 0.105 US qt)

NOTE:
If gear oil is filled to the brim of the oil filler hole,
oil may start leaking from the differential gear
case breather hose. Therefore, check the
quantity of the oil, not its level.

WARNING:
Take care not to allow foreign material to enter
the differential gear case.

7. Install:
• oil filler plug

23 Nm (2.3 m · kg, 17 ft · lb)

CHECKING THE CONSTANT VELOCITY JOINT

DUST BOOTS
1. Check:
• dust boots ①
Damage Replace.
Refer to “FRONT CONSTANT VELOCITY
JOINTS,” in chapter 5.
□
F Front

- 110 -
 MAINTENCE AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE UTV

□
R Rear

CHECKING THE STEERING SYSTEM

1. place the vehicle on the flat ground .
● Check:
Clamp seat of steeing vertical column and sliding
bearing on the lower end of steering vertical column,
upper ＆ lower and front ＆ rear moving steering
bar .If the cleearance is too large, replace the
sliding bearing.
Refer to secrtion “Steering ststem” of chapter 5.

● Check:
tie-rod ends
Ball pin unit of steering tension rod.
Rotate the steering bar leftward and / or rightward,
Then roate from left to right lightly . If the ball pin
unit of steering tension rod have any vertical
clearance , replace it .
Refer to secrtion “Steering ststem” of chapter 5.

● Check:
Ball joints and/or wheel bearings Move the wheels
laterally back and forth. Excessive free
play Replace the front arms (upper and lower)
and/or wheel bearings.

- 111 -
 MAINTENCE AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE UTV
ADJUSTING THE TOE-IN
1. Place the vehicle on a level surface.
2. Measure:
• toe-in
Out of specification Adjust.

Toe-in
0 ~ 10 mm (0.00 ~ 0.39 in)
(with tires touching the ground)

NOTE:
Before measuring the toe-in, make sure that the
tire pressure is correct.

a. Mark both front tire tread centers.

b.Lift the front end of UTV to keep the front wheel
from force .
c. Faster the steering forward . Meagcre the widthe
beetween two marks.
d. Rotate the front tires 180° until the marks are
exactly opposite one another.
e. Measure distance □
B between the marks.

f. Calculate the toe-in using the formula given

below.

Toe-in=□
B -□
A

g. If the toe-in is incorrect, adjust it。

3. Adjust toe-in

WARNING:
Make sure that left / right tension rods have
turned the same turns . Otherwise the UTV will
still go UTV left and right even though . Operate
the UTV to go forward straightly with steering
bar , easily causing to getting out of contor and
accident . After adjusting the toe-in correctly
drive the UTV to move forward a span of
distance by fastering the steering bar so as to

- 112 -
 MAINTENCE AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE UTV
make , sure if the Steering bar is pormal , if not ,
adjust the tension rod left or right within the
specification .

a. Mark both tie-rods ends. This reference point will

be needed during adjustment.
b. Loosen the locknut (tie-rod end) ① on each
tie-rod.
c. The same number of turns should be given to
both the right and left tie-rods ② until the
specified toe-in is obtained. This is to keep the
length of the rods the same.
d. Tighten the rod end locknut on each tie-rod.

Locknut (rod end)

40 Nm (4.0 m · kg, 29 ft · lb)

ADJUSTING THE FRONT AND REAR SHOCK

ABSORBERS
WARNING:
Always adjust both shock absorber spring
preload to the same setting. Uneven adjustment
can cause poor handling and loss of stability.

NOTE:
The spring preload of the shock absorbers can
be adjusted to suit the operator’s preference,
weight, and the operating conditions.

1. Adjust:
• spring preload Turn the adjuster ① to increase
or decrease the spring preload.

Standard position: B
Minimum (Soft) position: A
Maximum (Hard) position: E

- 113 -
 MAINTENCE AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE UTV
CHECKING THE TIRES
WARNING:
• TIRE CHARACTERISTICS
Tyre characteristics influence the handling
of vehicle’s. If other tire combinations are
used, they can adversely affect your vehicle’s
handling characteristics and are therefore not
recommended.
Size Type
Front 6PR 25 × 8-12
Rear 6PR 25× 10-12

• TIRE PRESSURE
a. Recommended tire pressure
Front 140Kpa
Rear 140KPa
b. Tyre pressure below the minimum
specification could cause the tire to dislodge
from the rim under severe riding conditions.
The following are minimums:
Front 126Kpa
Rear 126Kpa
c. Use no more than
Front 154Kpa
Rear 154Kpa
when seating the tire beads. Higher pressure
may cause the tire to burst.
Inflate the tires slowly and carefully.
Fast inflation could cause the tire to burst.
• MAXIMUM LOADING LIMIT
a. Vehicle loading limit (total weight of cargo,
operator, passenger and accessories):797kg
b. Cargo bed: 100kg
c. Trailer hitch:
Pulling load (total weight of trailer and cargo):
100 kg
Be extra careful of the vehicle balance and
stability when towing a trailer.

- 114 -
 MAINTENCE AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE UTV

1. Measure:
• Tire pressure (cold tire pressure) out of
specification Adjust.
NOTE:
• The tire pressure gauge ① is included as
standard equipment.
• If dust or the like is stuck to this gauge, it will
not provide the correct readings. Therefore,
take two measurements of the tire’s pressure
and use the second reading.

WARNING:
Uneven or improper tire pressure may adversely
affect the handling of this vehicle and may
cause loss of control.
• Maintain proper tire pressures.
• Set tire pressures when the tires are cold.
• Tire pressures must be equal in both front
tires and equal in both rear tires.

2. Check:
• tire surfaces
Wear/damage○
a Replace.
Tire wear limit ○
a

Front and rear: 3.0 mm (0.12 in)

WARNING:
It is dangerous to ride with a worn-out tire.
When tire wear is out of specification, replace
the tire immediately.

- 115 -
 MAINTENCE AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE UTV
CHECKING THE WHEELS
1. Check:
• Wheels ① Damage/bends Replace.
NOTE:
Always balance the wheel when a tire or wheel
has been changed or replaced.

WARNING:
• Never attempt even small repairs to the wheel.
• Ride conservatively after installing a tire to
allow it to seat itself properly on the rim.

CHECKING AND LUBRICATING THE CABLES

WARNING:
A damaged cable sheath may cause corrosion
and interfere with the cable movement. An
unsafe condition may result so replace a
damaged cable as soon as possible.

1. Check:
• cable sheath Damage Replace.
• cable operation Unsmooth operation Lubricate
or replace.
NOTE:
Hold the cable end up and apply several drops
of lubricant to the cable.

2. Apply:
• lithium-soap-based grease (onto end of the cable)

- 116 -
 MAINTENCE AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE UTV
ELECTRICAL
CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERY
WARNING:
Batteries generate explosive hydrogen gas and
contain electrolyte which is made of poisonous
and highly caustic sulfuric acid.
Therefore, always follow these preventive
measures:
• Wear protective eye gear when handling or
working near batteries;
• Charge batteries in a well-ventilate2d area;
• Keep batteries away from fire, sparks or open
flames (e.g., welding equipment, lighted
cigarettes);
• Do not smoke when charging or handling
batteries;
• keep batteries and electrolyte out of reach of
children;
• Avoid bodily contact with electrolyte as it can
cause severe burns or permanent eye injury;
first aid in case of bodily contact:
External
• Skin — Wash with water;
• Eyes — Flush with water for 15 minutes and
get immediate medical attention;
Internal
Drink large quantities of water or milk followed
with milk of magnesia, beaten egg or vegetable
oil. Get immediate medical attention.

WARNING:
• This is a sealed battery. Never remove the
sealing caps because the balance between
cells will not be maintained and battery
performance will deteriorate;
• Charging time, charging amperage and
charging voltage for an MF battery are

- 117 -
 MAINTENCE AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE UTV
different from those of conventional batteries.
The MF battery should be charged as explained
in the charging method illustrations. If the
battery is overcharged, the electrolyte level
will drop considerably;
• Therefore, take special care when charging
the battery.

NOTE:
Since MF batteries are sealed, it is not possible
to check the charge state of the battery by
measuring the specific gravity of the electrolyte.
Therefore, the charge of the battery has to be
checked by measuring the voltage at the battery
terminals.

1. Remove:
• Lift the hood up;
• battery case cover;
• disconnect;
battery leads
NOTE:
First, disconnect the negative battery lead ①,
and then the positive battery lead ②.

• Remove;
battery
• Check;
battery charge
a. Connect a pocket tester to the battery terminals.

Positive tester probe

positive battery terminal
Negative tester probe
negative battery terminal

- 118 -
 MAINTENCE AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE UTV

NOTE:
• The charge state of an MF battery can be
checked by measuring its open-circuit voltage
(i.e., the voltage when the positive terminal is
disconnected).
• No charging is necessary when the
open-circuit voltage equals or exceeds 12.8 V.

b. Check the charge of the battery, as shown in

the charts and the following example.
Example
c. Open-circuit voltage = 12.0 V
d. Charging time = 6.5 hours
e. Charge of the battery = 20 ~ 30%
2. Charge:
• Battery (refer to the appropriate charging method
illustration) .

WARNING:
Do not quick charge a battery.

NOTE:
• Never remove the MF battery sealing caps.
• Do not use a high-rate battery charger since
it forces a high-amperage current into the
battery quickly and can cause battery
overheating and battery plate damage.
• If it is impossible to regulate the charging
current on the battery charger, be careful not
to overcharge the battery.
• When charging a battery, be sure to remove
it from the vehicle. (If charging has to be done
with the battery mounted on the vehicle,
disconnect the negative battery lead from the
battery terminal).
• To reduce the chance of sparks, do not plug
in the battery charger until the battery charger
leads are connected to the battery.
• Before removing the battery charger lead clips
from the battery terminals, be sure to turn off
the battery charger.
• Make sure the battery charger lead clips are in
full contact with the battery terminal and that

- 119 -
 MAINTENCE AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE UTV
they are not shorted. A corroded battery
charger lead clip may generate heat in the
contact area and a weak clip spring may cause
sparks.
• If the battery becomes hot to the touch at any
time during the charging process, disconnect
the battery charger and let the battery cool
before reconnecting it. Hot batteries can
explode!
• As shown in the following illustration, the
open-circuit voltage of an MF battery stabilizes
about 30 minutes after charging has been
completed. Therefore, wait 30 minutes after
charging is completed before measuring the
open-circuit voltage.

Charging method using a variable-current

(voltage) charger
NOTE:
• Leave the battery unused for more than 30
minutes before measuring its open-circuit
voltage.
• Set the charging voltage to 16 ~17 V. (If the
charging voltage is lower, charging will be
insufficient, if it is higher, the battery will be
over-charged.)

- 120 -
 MAINTENCE AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE UTV

Measure the open-circuit voltage

prior to charging.

Connect a charger and ammeter to

the battery and start charging.

YES Is the amperage higher than the NO

standard charging amperage
written on the battery?

Adjust the charging voltage to

20 ~ 25 V

Monitor the amperage for 3 ~ 5

YES
Adjust the voltage to obtain the minutes. Is the standard charging
standard charging amperage amperage exceeded?

NO

If the amperage does not

Set the timer to the charging time exceed the standard charging
determined by the open circuit voltage. amperage after 5 minutes,
replace the battery.

If the required charging time exceeds 5 hours, it is advisable to check the charging
amperage after 5 hours. If there is any change in the amperage, readjust the voltage to
obtain the standard charging amperage.

Leave the battery unused for more than 30 minutes before measuring its open-circuit
voltage.
12.8 V Charging is complete.
12.0 ~ 12.7 V Recharging is required.
Under 12.0 V → Replace the battery.

- 121 -
 MAINTENCE AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE UTV
Charging method using a constant voltage charger
NOTE:
Leave the battery unused for more than 30
minutes before measuring its open-circuit
voltage.

Measure the open-circuit voltage

prior to charging.

Connect a charger and ammeter to

the battery and start charging.

Is the amperage higher than the

YES standard charging amperage NO
written on the battery?

Charge the battery until the This type of battery charger cannot
charging voltage reaches 15 V. charge an MF battery. A variable
voltage charger is recommended.

NOTE:
Set the charging time to a
maximum of 20 hours.

Leave the battery unused for more than 30

minutes before measuring its open-circuit
voltage.
12.8 V → Charging is complete.
12.0 ~ 12.7 V → Recharging is required.
Under 12.0 V → Replace the battery

- 122 -
 MAINTENCE AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE UTV
NOTE:
Constant amperage chargers are not suitable
for charging MF batteries.

3. Install:
• battery
• Connect:
battery leads
NOTE:
First, connect the positive battery lead ①, and
then the negative battery lead ②.

• Check:
battery terminals Dirt Clean with a wire brush.
Loose connection Connect properly.
• Lubricate:
battery terminals
• Install:
battery case cover
• Close the hood.

CHECKING THE FUSES

NOTE:
Always turn off the main switch when
checking or replacing a fuse. Otherwise, a
short circuit may occur.

1. Remove:
• lift the hood up.
• battery case cover
2. Check:
• fuses
a. Connect the pocket tester to the fuse and check it
for continuity
NOTE:
Set the tester to the “Ω × 1” position.

• blown fuse

- 123 -
 MAINTENCE AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE UTV

b. If the tester indicates“∞”, replace the fuse.

3. Replace:
a. Turn off the ignition.
b. Install a new fuse of the proper amperage.
c. Turn on switches to verify operation of the
related electrical devices.
d. If the fuse immediately blows again, check the
electrical circuit.
Current
Description rating Quantity

Main 30 A 1
Lighting
15 A 1
system fuse
Ignition 10 A 1

Terminal
10 A 1
(Auxiliary DC jack)

4WD(Four wheel
3A 1
drive)
Signaling
10 A 1
system fuse
Carburetor
10 A 1
heater fuse
Backup fuse 10 A 1
Reserve 30 A 1
Reserve 15 A 1
Reserve 10 A 1
Reserve 3A 1

WARNING:
Ever use a fuse with a rating other than that
specified. Never use other materials in place of a
fuse. An improper fuse may cause extensive
damage to the electrical system, a malfunction
of the lighting and ignition systems and could
possibly cause a fire.

- 124 -
 MAINTENCE AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE UTV

4. Install:
• battery case cover
5. Close the hood.

ADJUSTING THE HEADLIGHT BEAM

1. Adjust:
• headlight beam (vertically)
• turn the adjuster ① in or out

Turning in Headlight beam raised.

Turning out Headlight beam lowered.

CHANGING THE HEADLIGHT BULB

Remove:
• Lift the hood up.
• headlight bulb holder cover ①

• headlight bulb holder (with bulb) ①

• bulb

NOTE:
Remove the defective bulb by unhooking the
headlight bulb holder tabs ②

WARNING:
Keep flammable products and your hands away
from the bulb while it is on, since it will be hot.
Do not touch the bulb until it cools down.

- 125 -
 MAINTENCE AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE UTV
2. Install:

• bulb new

Secure the new bulb with the headlight bulb

holder.
NOTE:
Avoid touching the glass part of the bulb. Keep
it free from oil; otherwise, the transparency of
the glass, life of the bulb, and luminous flux will
be adversely affected. If oil gets on the bulb,
thoroughly clean it with a cloth moistened with
alcohol or lacquer thinner.

• headlight bulb holder (with bulb)

• headlight bulb holder cover
• Close the hood.

CHANGING THE TAIL/BRAKE LIGHT BULB

1. Remove:
• Rear panel
• Tail/brake light bulb holder(with bulb)①
• Secure the new bulb with the tail/brake light bulb
holder.

• tail/brake light bulb holder (with bulb) ①

• bulb
NOTE:
Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and
remove the defective bulb.

WARNING:
Keep flammable products and your hands away
from the bulb while it is on, since it will be hot.
Do not touch the bulb until it cools down.

- 126 -
 MAINTENCE AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE UTV
2. Install:

• bulb new

Secure the new bulb with the tail/brake light bulb

holder.

NOTE:
Avoid touching the glass part of the bulb. Keep
it free from oil; otherwise, the transparency of
the glass, life of the bulb, and luminous flux will
be adversely affected. If oil gets on the bulb,
thoroughly clean it with a cloth moistened with
alcohol or lacquer thinner.

• tail/brake light bulb holder (with bulb)

• bed panel

- 127 -
 ENGINE
ENGINE

ENGINE NOTE
1．Make sure the components, oil, adhesive, sealant are from the company or recommended.
2．Original removal oil seal，gasket, O-ring, piston ring can not be re-assemblied again, make sure all
these parts are new.
3．Pay attention to keep dismantled parts orderly, make sure their original positions for reassembling.
4．Prevent dismantled parts damaged, clean before measure and assembly, remove the oil with
compressed air. Paint the rotating and sliding parts with specified oil, paint or inject designated
location with recommended grease.
5．Bolts and nuts tightening order: pre-fixed bolts, and then tighten them from the large diameter to
small diameter, from inside to outside by diagonal points 2 or 3 times to the specified torque.
Opposite order is for removing bolts and nuts.
6．Make sure sealing bolt (with the sealant) must be replaced
7．Make sure to use new bearing when remove assembly set up by pressure.
8．Determined axial and radial clearance of inner and outer bearing ring by touch, new bear should be
replaced if the clearance is too large or non-rotating flexible.
9．Bearing assembly directions: bearing logo should be visible assemblies; confirm bearing outer ring
rotate and move reliably and flexibly when assemble bearing by pressure.
10．Oil seal assembly: pay attention to seal side is in the side of oil, logo side outwards, seal side be
painted with grease, and make sure seal side without scratch and oil seal be vertical.
11．Before assembly, sealing material attached to all engine covers and crank case combination
surface should be cleaned.
12．Before assembly engine, be familiar with engine lubrication circuit, clean and blow oil circuit.

- 128 -
 ENGINE
ENGINE REMOVAL

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

Removing throttle and intake Remove the parts in the order listed.
manifold.
1 Dampers 1
2 Dampers joint (intake manifold) 1
3 Intake manifold 1
4 Bushing φ8.5×φ11.2×34 4
5 Intake manifold washer 2
6 Pressure sensor 1
7 Pressure plate TMAP 1
8 Fuel Injector 2
9 Fuel Injector seat 2
10 Drain blind nut 1
11 Drain plug 1
For installation, reverse the removal
procedure.

- 129 -
ENGINE
1、CHECK
• Throttle sheet free movement
If throttle valve cannot go back, change for
a new throttle.
2、NOTE
• Removing the drain blind nut and drain plug
NOTE:
Before remove drain plug, please prepare
vessel for containing oil and cotton yarn.

3、INSTALL
• Install intake manifold
• Install intake manifold bolt
• Install throttle damper joint
• Install throttle damper
NOTE:
When installed, don't make an object from
the intake fell into the cabinet.

- 130 -
 ENGINE
CYLINDER HEAD AND CYLINDER HEAD COVER

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

Removing the cylinder head and Remove the parts in the order listed.
cylinder head
1 Thermostat cover 2
2 Thermostat 1
3 Cylinder water outlet connector 1
4 Washer 1
5 O-ring 2
6 Cylinder head cover 2
7 Cylinder cover pad 2
8 Spark plug 2
9 Temperature sensor 1
10 Cylinder head 2
11 Timing chain tensioner cap bolt 2
12 Timing chain tensioner/gasket 2

- 131 -
 ENGINE

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

13 Dowel pin 4
14 Timing chain guide (exhaust side) 2
For installation, reverse the removal
procedure.

- 132 -
ENGINE
1、CHECK
1). Checking the valve clearance
• Valve clearance
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE VALVE
CLEARANCE” in chapter 3.

2). Checking the cylinder head cover

• cylinder head cover
Cracks/damage Replace the cylinder head
cover and cylinder head as a set.

3). Checking the tappet covers

• Cylinder head cover ①
Cracks/damage Replace.
• Cylinder cover pad ②
NOTE:
When installing, new replacement washer
and apply wheel bearing grease LS.

4). Removing the screwdriver and slowly release

the timing chain tensioner rod.
NOTE:
Make sure that the timing chain tensioner rod
comes out of the timing chain tensioner housing
smoothly. If there is rough movement,
replace the timing chain tensioner.

- 133 -
ENGINE
5). Checking the cylinder head
(1). Eliminate:
• carbon deposits (from the combustion
chamber)
Use a rounded scraper.

NOTE:
Do not use a sharp instrument to avoid
damaging or scratching:
• spark plug threads
• valve seats

(2). Check:
• cylinder head
Scratches/damage Replace the cylinder
head cover and cylinder head as a set.
• cylinder head water jacket
Mineral deposits/rust Eliminate.

2、INSTALL
1). Installing the cylinder head
• cylinder head gasket
• cylinder head
• bolts (M9: 1 ~ 6, 38Nm)
• bolts (M6: 7, 10Nm)
NOTE:
• Tighten the bolts in the proper sequence.
• Follow the numerical order shown in the
illustration. Tighten the bolts in two stages.

• timing chain guide (exhaust side)

• timing chain tensioner
a. Lightly press the timing chain tensioner rod
into the timing chain tensioner housing by
hand.
b. While pressing the timing chain tensioner rod,
wind it clockwise with a thin screwdriver ①
until it stops.
c. With the screwdriver still inserted into the
timing chain tensioner, install the timing chain
tensioner and gasket onto the cylinder block.
Then, tighten the timing chain tensioner bolts
to the specified torque.

- 134 -
ENGINE

WARNING:
Always use a new gasket.

NOTE:
The “UP” mark on the timing chain tensioner
should face up.

Timing chain tensioner bolt (10 Nm)

d. Remove the screwdriver, make sure that the

timing chain tensioner rod releases, and
tighten the cap bolt to the specified torque.

Timing chain tensioner cap bolt (7 Nm)

- 135 -
 ENGINE
ROCKER ARMS AND CAMSHAFT

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

Removing the rocker arms and Remove the parts in the order listed.
camshaft
Cylinder head cover
1 Rocker arm shaft 4
2 Wave washer 8
3 Rocker arm (exhaust) 2
4 Rocker arm (intake) 2
5 Valve adjuster 8
6 Locknut 8
7 Camshaft sprocket 2
8 Camshaft station plate 2
9 Camshaft 2
10 Cylinder head 2
For installation, reverse the removal
procedure.

- 136 -
ENGINE
1、CHECK
1). Checking the rocker arms
• rocker arm lobes
• valve adjusters
Blue discoloration/pitting/scratches Replace.
• rocker arms
• rocker arm shafts
Damage/wear Replace.

a. Check whether the rocker arm is worn out, or

damaged and whether the oil hole is blocked.
b. If there is a rocker arm to be replaced, check
the camshaft prominent position of unfairness.
c. Measure the inside diameter of the rocker arm
holes ①.
Out of specification Replace.

Rocker arm inside diameter repairing limit

value
Φ12.02mm
d. Check the surface of the rocker arm shafts.
Worn/pitting/scratches Replace.
e. Measure the external diameter of rocker arm
shaft with micrometer.
Out of specification Replace.

Rocker arm shaft outside diameter

repairing limit value
Φ11.99mm

f. Calculate the clearance by subtracting the

rocker arm shaft outside diameter from the
rocker arm inside diameter.
Out of specification Replace the defective
part(s).

Rocker arm to shaft clearance repairing

limit value
0.03mm

- 137 -
ENGINE
2). Checking the camshaft
• cam lobes
Pitting/scratches/blue discoloration Replace
• camshaft journal
Wear/damage Replace
• Measure the external diameter of camshaft
journal with micrometer.
Out of specification Replace.
• small holes on camshaft sprocket
• rotor “I” mark
Out of alignment

3). Checking the camshaft sprocket

• camshaft sprocket
Wear/damage Replace the camshaft
sprocket and timing chain as a set.
(a)1/4 of a tooth
(b)Correct
① Timing chain
② Sprocket

4). Checking the decompression system

• decompression system
Check while the camshaft sprocket is installed
on the camshaft.

2、INSTALL
1). Installing the rocker arms
• rocker arms
• rocker arm shafts
NOTE:
• After installation, make sure that the thread
hole of the rocker arm shaft is positioned
correctly.

2). Installing the camshaft

• camshaft
• camshaft sprocket

- 138 -
 ENGINE
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

moving the valves and valve springs Remove the parts in the order listed.
Cylinder head cover
1 Valve cotter 16
2 Valve spring retainer 8
3 Intake valve spring 4
4 Exhaust valve spring 4
5 Intake valve 4
6 Exhaust valve 4
7 Valve stem seal 8
8 Valve spring seat 8
For installation, reverse the removal
procedure.

- 139 -
ENGINE
1、CHECK
• valve sealing
Leakage at the valve seat Check the valve
face, valve seat and valve seat width.
a. Pour a clean solvent ① into the intake and
exhaust ports.
b. Check that the valve seals properly. There
should be no leakage at the valve seat ②.
• valve face
Pitting/wear Grind the face.
• valve stem end
Mushroom shape or diameter larger than the
body of the stem Replace.
• valve seats
Pitting/wear Reface the valve seat.

2、MEASURE:
1).Measure:
• The valves surface width

Repairing limit value

2.0mm
• stem-to-guide clearance

Stem-to-guide clearance = valve guide

inside diameter – valve stem diameter

NOTE:
If the mating surface is coarse, corrode or
cannot contact with valve seat normally,
replace it.

Stem-to-guide clearance
repairing limit value
Intake:0.12mm Exhaust:0.14mm
• margin thickness (a)
Out of specification Replace.

Margin thickness
Intake:2 mm
Exhaust:2.2 mm

- 140 -
ENGINE
• valve stem runout
Out of specification Replace.

Runout limit 0.01 mm

NOTE:
• When installing a new valve always replace
the guide.
• If the valve is removed or replaced always
replace the oil seal.

• The valve seat surface width

Out of specification Reface the valve seat.

Repairing limit value

2.0mm
a. Install the valve into the cylinder head.
b. Press the valve through the valve guide and
onto the valve seat to make a clear pattern.
c. Measure the valve seat width. Where the
valve seat and valve face made contact,
blueing will have been removed.
• Valve spring free length
• Valve spring squareness
Out of specification Replace.

Valve spring free length

Intake:41mm Exhaust:41mm
Valve spring squareness
Intake:0.10mm Exhaust:0.10mm

• compressed spring force(a)

Out of specification Replace.
(b) Installed length

Compressed spring force

Intake: 470 N at 24.0 mm
Exhaust: 270 N at 31.0 mm

2). Remove:
• valve guide

- 141 -
ENGINE

NOTE:
To ease guide removal, installation and to
maintain correct fit, heat the cylinder head to
100 °C (212 °F) in an oven.

a. Install the new valve guide using a valve guide

remover ① and valve guide installer ②.
b. After installing the valve guide, bore the
valve guide using a valve guide reamer ③
to obtain proper stem-to-guide clearance.
NOTE:
After replacing the valve guide reface the
valve seat.

c. If the valve seat is to wide or narrow or

cracked, grind it to ensure impermeability.
3). Lap:
• valve face
• valve seat
NOTE:
After reface the valve seat or replacing the
valve and valve guide, the valve seat and
valve face should be lapped.

a. If the pipe will be replaced, grind the valve

seat again.
CAUTION:
Do not let the compound enter the gap
between the valve stem and the guide.

b. Install the valve into the cylinder head.

c. Turn the valve until the valve face and valve
seat are evenly polished, then clean off all of
the compound.

- 142 -
ENGINE

NOTE:
For best lapping results, lightly tap the valve
seat while rotating the valve back and forth
between your hands.

d. Apply a fine lapping compound to the valve

face and repeat the above steps.
NOTE:
After every lapping operation be sure to
clean off all of the compound from the valve
face and valve seat.

e. Install the valve into the cylinder head.

g. Press the valve through the valve guide and
onto the valve seat to make a clear pattern.
h. Measure the valve seat width again. If the
valve seat width is out of specification, reface
and relapse the valve seat.

3、INSTALL:
1). Apply:
• molybdenum disulfide oil
(onto the valve stem and valve stem seal)
2). Install:
• valve spring seats
• valve stem seals
• valves
• valve springs
• valve spring retainers
NOTE:
Install the valve springs with the larger pitch
(a) facing upwards.

(b) Smaller pitch

• valve cotters
NOTE:
Install the valve cotters while compressing
the valve spring with the valve spring
compressor ① and valve spring compressor
attachment ②.

- 143 -
 ENGINE
CYLINDER AND PISTON

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

Removing the cylinder and piston Remove the parts in the order listed.
Water pump outlet hose
Cylinder head
1 Dowel pin 16`
2 Cylinder head gasket 2
3 Cylinder 2
4 Cylinder gasket 2
5 Piston pin clip 4
6 Piston pin 2
7 Piston 2
8 Piston ring set 2
For installation, reverse the removal
procedure.

- 144 -
ENGINE
1、CHECK
1).Checking the cylinder and piston
• cylinder and piston walls Vertical
scratches Rebore or replace the cylinder
and the piston.
2).Checking the piston rings
• piston ring
(Insert in cylinder piston ring will be ① ,and
measure the end gap.)
NOTE:
Check whether the piston and the piston
groove is cracked and abraded.

3).Checking the piston pin

• piston pin
Blue discoloration/grooves Replace, then
check the lubrication system.
2、MEASURE
• At the top, the middle and the bottom of the
piston stroke.
NOTE:
Measure the bore diameter at directions of
right-angle intersection.

Repairing limit value

Out of roundness:0.005mm
Taper:0.005mm
• The external diameter 10mm above the bottom
of the piston skirt.
NOTE:
Repair limit on the clearance between the
piston and cylinder.

Repairing limit value

0.1mm

- 145 -
ENGINE
• ring end gap
Out of specification Replace.

Repairing limit value

Top ring/2nd ring:0.5mm
• ring side clearance
Use a thickness gauge.
Out of specification Replace the piston and
rings as a set.
NOTE:
Clean carbon from the piston ring grooves
and rings before measuring the side
clearance.

Side clearance
Standard Limit
Top ring 0.04~0.08mm 0.13mm
2nd ring 0.03~0.07mm 0.13mm
• piston pin-to-piston clearance.
a. Measure the piston pin outside diameter.

Repairing limit value

0.02mm

b. Measure the piston pin bore inside diameter.

Repairing limit value

0.02mm
c. Calculate the piston pin-to-piston clearance
with the following formula.
Piston pin-to-piston clearance = Piston pin
bore inside diameter – Piston pin outside
diameter
d. If out of specification, replace the piston.

- 146 -
ENGINE
3、INSTALL:
1). Installing the piston
• piston rings
(onto the piston)
NOTE:
• Be sure to install the piston rings so that
the manufacturer’s marks or numbers are
located on the upper side of the rings.
• Lubricate the piston and piston rings
liberally with engine oil.

• piston ①
• piston pin ②
• piston pin clips ③ (new replacement)
NOTE:
• Apply engine oil onto the piston pin, piston
rings and piston.
• Be sure that the arrow mark a on the piston
points to the exhaust side of the engine.
• Before installing the piston pin clip, cover
the crankcase with a clean rag to prevent
the piston pin clip from falling into the
crankcase.

2). Installing the cylinder

• cylinder
• O-ring
NOTE:
Install the cylinder with one hand while
compressing the piston rings with the other
hand.

CAUTION:
• Be careful not to damage the timing chain
guide during installation.
• Pass the timing chain through the timing
chain cavity.

- 147 -
 ENGINE
ENGINE LEFT CRANKCASE COVER AND A.C. MAGNETO

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

Removing the engine left crankcase Remove the parts in the order listed.
cover and A.C. magneto
Engine oil
Water pump assembly
1 Left crankcase cover 1
2 Inspection port cover /O-ring 1/1
3 Crankcase location sensor/ O-ring 1/1
4 Plug oil level gauge/O-ring 1/1
5 A.C. magneto clip 1
6 Stator assembly 1
7 Left crankcase cover gasket 1
8 Dowel pin 2
9 A.C. magneto rotor 1
10 Starter clutch 1
11 Starter wheel gear 1

- 148 -
 ENGINE

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

12 Starter idle gear 1
13 Starter idle gear shaft 1
For installation, reverse the removal
procedure.

- 149 -
ENGINE
1、CHECK
1). Checking the A.C. magneto
• stator coil
• pickup coil
Damage Replace.

2). Checking the starter clutch

• starter clutch ①
Cracks/damage Replace.
• starter clutch bolts ②
Loose Replace with new ones, and clinch
the end of the bolts.
NOTE:
• The arrow mark on the starter clutch must
face inward, away from the A.C. magneto
rotor.
• When installing, apply the locking agent.

a. Install the starter wheel gear onto the starter

clutch, and hold the starter clutch.

b. Turn the starter wheel gear counterclockwise

① to check that the starter clutch and wheel
gear engage.
If the starter clutch and wheel gear do not
engage, replace the starter clutch.
c. Turn the starter wheel gear clockwise ② to
check the starter wheel gear for smooth
operation.
If operation is not smooth, replace the starter
clutch.

• starter idle gear teeth ①

• starter wheel gear teeth ②
Burrs/clips/roughness/wear Replace.
• starter wheel gear
(contacting surface)
Damage/pitting/wear Replace.

- 150 -
ENGINE
2、INSTALL
• woodruff key
• dowel pins
• A.C. magneto rotor
NOTE:
• Before installing the rotor, clean the outside
of the crankshaft and the inside of the rotor.
• After installing the rotor, check that the
rotor rotates smoothly. If not, reinstall the
key and rotor.

• dowel pins
• gasket (New replacement)

- 151 -
 ENGINE
STARTER MOTOR AND OIL FILTER

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

Removing the starter motor and oil Remove the parts in the order listed.
filter
A.C. magneto rotor
1 Starter idle gear 1
2 Starter idle gear shaft 1
3 Relief valve spring/steel ball 1/1
4 Chain plate 1
5 Timing chain guide(first cylinder) 1
6 Timing chain 1
7 Pump 1
8 Oil filter cover 1
9 O-ring 1
10 Oil filter cartridge 1
11 Starter motor 1

- 152 -
 ENGINE

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

12 Oil pressure sensor 1
For installation, reverse the removal
procedure.

- 153 -
ENGINE
1、CHECK
1) Checking the starter idle gear
• starter idle gear
Cracks/wear/damage Replace

2) Checking the timing chain and guides

• timing chain
Cracks/stiff Replace the timing chain and
camshaft sprocket as a set.
• timing chain guides
Wear/damage Replace.

3) Checking the relief valve spring

• relief valve steel ball ①
• relief valve spring ②
Damage/wear Replace the defective part(s).

4) Checking the oil filter cartridge

• Oil filter cartridge
Damage Replace.
Contaminants Clean with engine oil.

5) Checking the starter motor

• starter motor
Damage/wear Replace the defective part(s).

- 154 -
ENGINE
2、INSTALL
• starter motor
• oil filter cartridge
• Starter idle gear shaft
• Starter idle gear
NOTE:
Apply the molybdenum disulfide grease to
the thread of axle and nut.

- 155 -
 ENGINE
PRIMARY AND SECONDARY SHEAVES

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

Removing the primary and secondary Remove the parts in the order listed.
sheaves
Engine assembly
1 Drive belt cover 1
2 Rubber gasket 1
3 V-belt 1
4 Secondary fixed sheave 1
5 Secondary sliding sheave 1
6 Compression spring 1
7 Guide Base, Driven Gear 1
8 Driving Flyweight 1
9 Primary fixed sheave 1
10 Compression spring/Spring seat 1/1

- 156 -
 ENGINE

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

11 Spacer 1
12 Fixing Base, One-Way Bearing 1
13 Guide pin/spring 1/1
14 Primary sliding sheave 1
15 Drive belt case 1
16 O-ring 2
For assembly, reverse the disassembly
procedure.

- 157 -
ENGINE
1、Check
1). Checking the primary sheave
• primary pulley slider
• primary sliding sheave splines
Wear/cracks/damage Replace.
• spacer
• primary pulley cam
Cracks/damage Replace.

• primary sliding sheave

• primary fixed sheave
Cracks/damage Replace.

2、Measure
• secondary sheave spring free length (a)
Out of specification Replace the secondary
sheave spring.

3、INSTALL
1). Assembling the primary sheave
(1)Clean:
• primary sliding sheave ①
• primary fixed sheave ②
• primary sliding sheave cam face
NOTE:
Remove any excess grease.

(2)Install:
• weights ①
NOTE:
• Apply grease (90g) to the whole outer
surface of the weights and install.
• Apply grease to the inner surface of the
collar.
• Apply grease to the inner surface of the
primary sliding sheave.

- 158 -
ENGINE
2). Assembling the secondary sheave
(1)Apply:
• assembly lube
(to the secondary sliding sheave ① inner
surface and oil seals)。
• assembly lube
(to the bearings, oil seals and inner surface of
the secondary fixed sheave ②)

3). Installing the primary and secondary

sheaves
(1) Install:
• secondary sheave assembly
• V-belt
• primary sheave assembly

NOTE:
• Tightening the bolts will push the
secondary sliding sheave away, causing
the
gap between the secondary fixed and
sliding sheaves to widen.
• Install the V-belt so that its right faces the
direction show in the illustration.

(2)Tighten:
• primary sheave nut (70Nm)
• secondary sheave nut (50Nm)
NOTE:
• Use the sheave holder to hold the primary
sheave.
• First, tighten the primary sheave nut , then
tighten the secondary sheave nut .

- 159 -
 ENGINE
CRANKCASE COVER AND OIL PUMP

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

Removing the Crankcase cover and oil Remove the parts in the order listed.
pump
Crankcase separation
1 Crankshaft cover 1
2 Gasket 1
3 Dowel pin 2
4 Crankcase Exhaust pipe 1
5 Crankcase block 1
6 Oil seal 1
7 Oil pump gasket 1
8 Oil pump 1
9 Outer rotor 1
10 Innter rotor 1

- 160 -
 ENGINE

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

11 Shaft/pin 1/2
12 Oil pump housing 1
13 Oil pump gear 1
14 Water pump Ⅱ gear/circlip 1/1
15 Shaft/pin 1/1
16 Water pump Ⅰ gear/washer 1/1
17 Oil pump middle gear 1
18 Shaft 1
19 Bearing 1
20 Fuel and air separator assy 1
21 V-ring 1
22 Shaft 1
23 Valve piece plate 1

- 161 -
 ENGINE

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

24 Valve piece 1
25 Chain plate 1
26 Timing chain guide(secondly cylinder) 1
27 Timing chain 1
28 Right crankcase 1
For assembly, reverse the disassembly
procedure.

- 162 -
ENGINE
1、CHECK
1). Checking the oil pump
• rotor housing
• rotor cover
Cracks/wear/damage Replace.
• oil pump operation
Unsmooth Repeat steps #1 and #2 or
replace the defective parts.

2) Checking the timing chain and guides

• timing chain
Cracks/stiff Replace the timing chain and
camshaft sprocket as a set.
• timing chain guides
Wear/damage Replace.

2、MEASURE
1). Measure the oil pump
• tip clearance(a)
(between the inner rotor ① and the out rotor ②)
• side clearance(b)
(between the outer rotor ② and the pump
housing ③)
• body clearance (c)
(between the outer rotor ② and the pump
housing ③)
Out of specification Replace the oil pump.

Tip clearance Limit: 0.23 mm

Side clearance Limit: 0.17 mm
Body clearance Limit: 0.24 mm

3、INSTALL
1). Assembling the oil pump
• inner rotor
• outer rotor
• oil pump shaft
(with the recommended lubricant)

- 163 -
 ENGINE
CRANKCASE AND MIDDLE DRIVEN SHAFT

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

Remove the crankcase and middle Remove the parts in the order listed.
drive shaft
Crankcase separation
1 Right crankcase 1
2 Crankcase gasket 1
3 Dowel pin 2
4 Crankshaft 1
5 Shaft 2
6 Connection Rod Cover/Rod Bushing 2/4
7 Universal joint 1
8 Oil seal 1
9 Bearing retainer 2
10 Bearing seat dowel pin 2

- 164 -
 ENGINE

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

11 Bearing 1
12 Middle driven shaft 1
13 Bearing 1
14 O-ring/bearing 1/1
15 Left crankcase 1
For installation, reverse the removal
procedure.

- 165 -
ENGINE
1、CHECK
1). Checking the middle drive
• O-ring
Damage Replace.
• bearings
Clean and lubricate, then rotate the inner race
with a finger.
Pitting/damage Replace.
• universal joint movement
Roughness Replace universal joint.

2). Checking the crankcase

(1) Thoroughly wash the case halves in a mild
solvent.
(2) Clean all the gasket mating surfaces and
crankcase mating surfaces thoroughly
(3) heck:
• crankcase
Cracks/damage Replace.
• oil delivery passages
Clogged Blow out with compressed air.

2、MEASURE
1). Measure the crankshaft
• crank width (A)
Out of specification Replace the crankshaft.

Crank width
74.95 ~ 75.00 mm
• side clearance (D)
Out of specification Replace the crankshaft

Big end side clearance

Limit: 1.0 mm (0.0394 in)
• runout (b)(C)
Out of specification Replace the crankshaft.

Runout limit
(b): 0.03 mm (C): 0.03 mm

The crankshaft ① and the crank pin ② oil

passages must be properly interconnected with
a tolerance of less than 1 mm (0.04 in).

- 166 -
ENGINE

CAUTION:
The buffer boss and woodruff key should be
replaced when removed from the crankshaft.

2). Assembling the crankcase

(1) Apply:
• sealant (Quick Gasket)
(to the mating surfaces of both case halves)
(2) Install:
• dowel pins
(3) Fit the left crankcase onto the right case. Tap
lightly on the case with a soft hammer

CAUTION:
Before installing and torque the crankcase
holding bolts, be sure to check whether the
transmission is functioning properly by
manually rotating the shift drum in both
directions.

(4)Tighten:
• crankcase bolts
(follow the proper tightening sequence)
NOTE:
• Tighten the bolts in stages, using a crises
cross pattern.

3、INSTALL
1). Installing the crankshaft
• crankshaft
NOTE:
Hold the connecting rod at the Top Dead
Center (TDC) with one hand while turning the
nut of the installing tool with the other.
Operate the installing tool until the
crankshaft bottoms against the bearing.

- 167 -
ENGINE
2). Installing the middle driven shaft
• universal joint.
a. Install the opposite yoke into the universal
joint.
b. Apply wheel bearing grease to the bearings.

c. Install the bearing ① onto the yoke.

CAUTION:
Check each bearing. The needles can easily
fall out of their races. Slide the yoke back
and forth on the bearings; the yoke will not
go all the way onto a bearing if a needle is
out of place.

a. Press each bearing into the universal joint

using a suitable socket.
NOTE:
The bearing must be inserted far enough into
the universal joint so that the circlip can be
installed.

b. Install the circlip ② into the groove of each

bearing.

3). Assembling the crankcase

(1) Apply:
• sealant (Quick Gasket)
(to the mating surfaces of both case halves)
(2) Install:
• dowel pins
(3) Fit the left crankcase onto the right case. Tap
lightly on the case with a soft hammer

- 168 -
ENGINE
CAUTION:
Before installing and torque the crankcase
holding bolts, be sure to check whether the
transmission is functioning properly by
manually rotating the shift drum in both
directions.

4)Tighten:
• crankcase bolts
(follow the proper tightening sequence)
Right crankcase
NOTE:
• Tighten the bolts in stages, using a crises
cross pattern.

- 169 -
 ENGINE
OUTPUT SHAFT

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

Remove the output shaft Remove the parts in the order listed.
Middle drive gear
1 Left gearcase cover 1
2 Drive shaft coupling 1
3 Drive shaft spring/bearing 1/1
4 Output shaft Y-1 1
5 Washer/collar 1/1
6 Washer/o-ring 1/1
7 Drum-shaped gear/washer 1/1
8 Fuel seal 1
9 Collar/o-ring 1/1
10 Rear drive bearing seat 1

- 170 -
 ENGINE

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

11 Dowel pin 4
12 Gearcase 1
For installation, reverse the removal
procedure.

- 171 -
ENGINE
1、CHECK
1). Checking the output shaft Y-1
• Drive shaft coupling
• Output shaft Y-1
Pitting/galling/wear Replace.
• O-ring
Damage Replace.
• bearings
Pitting/damage Replace.

2、MEASURE
• Output shaft Y-1 swing
a. Temporary install the gearcase .
b. Wrap a rag ① around a screwdriver ②, and
then insert it into the installation hole ③ of the
right crankcase speed sensor to hold the
middle driven gear.
c. Attach the gear lash measurement tool ④
and dial gauge ⑤.
a)6.7 mm (0.26 in)
d. Measure the gear lash while rotating the
output shaft Y-1 back and forth.

NOTE:
Measure the gear lash at 4 positions. Rotate
the middle driven gear 90° each time.

3、INSTALL
• bearing retainer ①
a. Place a rag ② in the vise.
b. Secure the bearing housing edge in the vise.
c. Attach the bearing retainer wrench ③.
d. Tighten the bearing retainer.
CAUTION:
The middle driven shaft bearing retainer has
left-handed threads. To tighten the retainer,
turn it counterclockwise.

- 172 -
ENGINE
• shims ①
• universal joint yoke
• washer
• nut ①
NOTE:
Use the universal joint holder ② to hold the
yoke.

• universal joint.
a. Install the opposite yoke into the universal
joint.
b. Apply wheel bearing grease to the bearings.

c. Install the bearing ① onto the yoke.

CAUTION:
Check each bearing. The needles can easily
fall out of their races. Slide the yoke back
and forth on the bearings; the yoke will not
go all the way onto a bearing if a needle is
out of place.

a. Press each bearing into the universal joint

using a suitable socket.
NOTE:
The bearing must be inserted far enough into
the universal joint so that the circlip can be
installed.

e. Install the circlip ② into the groove of each

bearing.

• drive shaft coupling

• washer
• nut ①
NOTE:
Use the coupling gear/middle shaft tool ②
to hold the drive shaft coupling.

- 173 -
 ENGINE
GEARCASE
Shift lever and oil pump

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

Removing the shift lever and gearcase Remove the parts in the order listed.
Gearcase separation
1 Shift lever cover/gasket 1/1
2 Shift lever 2 assembly 1
3 Shift lever 1 1
4 Oil pump/o-ring 1/5
5 Outer rotor 1
6 Inner rotor 1
7 Oil pump shaft/pin 1/1
8 Connecting pipe1/2 1/1
9 Gearcase exhaust nozzle 1
10 Dowel pin 1

- 174 -
 ENGINE

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

11 Oil filler cap/o-ring 1/1
12 Gearcase gasket/dowel pin 1/1
13 Shift drum stopper/spring/steel ball 1/1
14 Reverse switch/washer 1/1
15 Gearshift indicator/o-ring 1/1
16 Spring seat/circlip 1/1
17 Guide bar 1
18 Shift fork 1/long spring 1/1
19 Shift fork 2/short spring 1/1
20 Right gearcase cover 1
21 Right gearcase cover seat bracket 1
For assembly, reverse the disassembly
procedure.

- 175 -
 ENGINE
Gearcase transmission

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

Removing the gearcase transmission Remove the parts in the order listed.
Gearcase separation
1 Oil seal/ Bushing 1/1
2 Main shaft transmission assembly 1
3 L gear driving gear/ bearing 1/1
4 H gear driving gear/needle bearing 1/1
5 Main shaft/dowel pin 1/1
6 Main shaft Bearing press plate/ Bearing 1/1
7 Countershaft transmission assembly 1
8 Needle bearing Ⅰ 1
9 Needle bearing Ⅱ/washer 1/1
10 Countershaft 1

- 176 -
 ENGINE

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

11 BearingⅠ 1
12 L gear driven gear 1
13 H gear driven gear 1
14 Needle bearing 1
15 R gear driven gear 1
16 Bearing Ⅱ 1
17 R shaft transmission assembly 1
18 Reverse shaft 1
19 R gear idle gear/ R gear idle gear shaft 1/1
For assembly, reverse the disassembly
procedure.

- 177 -
ENGINE
1、CHECK
1). Checking the shift forks
• shift fork follower ①
• shift fork pawl ②
Scoring/bends/wear/damage Replace.
• guide bar
Roll the guide bar on a flat surface.
Bends Replace.

WARNING：
Do not attempt to straighten a bent guide bar.

• shift fork movement

(on the guide bar)
Unsmooth operation Replace the shift fork
and the guide bar.

• springs
Cracks/damage Replace.

2). Checking the shift drum

• shift drum grooves
Scratches/wear/damage Replace.

- 178 -
ENGINE

3). Checking the bearings

(1) Check:
• bearings
Clean and lubricate, then rotate the inner race
with a finger.
Roughness Replace

4). Checking the oil pump

• rotor housing
• rotor cover
Cracks/wear/damage Replace.
• oil pump operation
Unsmooth Repeat steps #1 and #2 or
replace the defective parts.

2、Measure:
1). Measure the oil pump
• tip clearance(a)
(between the inner rotor ① and the out rotor
②)
• side clearance(b)
(between the outer rotor ② and the pump
housing ③)
• body clearance (c)
(between the outer rotor ② and the pump
housing ③)
Out of specification Replace the oil pump.

Tip clearance Limit: 0.23 mm

Side clearance Limit: 0.17 mm
Body clearance Limit: 0.24 mm

- 179 -
ENGINE
3、INSTALL
1). Assembling the shift fork
• guide bar ①
• shift fork 2 ②
• long spring ③
• shift fork 1 ④
• short spring ⑤

2). Installing the shift levers

• shift lever 2 assembly ① (14Nm)
• shift lever 1 ②
NOTE:
When installing the shift lever 1, align the
punch mark (a) on the shift lever 1 with the
punch marks (b) on the shift lever 2.

3). Assembling the oil pump

• inner rotor
• outer rotor
• oil pump shaft
(with the recommended lubricant)

- 180 -
 CHASSIS

MALFUNCTION INSPECTION
Appearance malfunction inspection
No. Phenomenon Measure
1. Replace new plastic cover.
2. Check whether installation supporter deformed, repairing
1 Plastic cover damaged
or re-painting is needed before replacing new plastic cover.
3. Re-paste decals and re-rivet warning labels.
1. Replace new bumper.
2 Bumper damaged 2. Check whether installation supporter deformed or
damaged, repairing or re-painting is needed before
replacing new bumper.
1. Replace new frame toe-board.
3 Frame toe-board damaged 2. Check whether gearbox and differential of front and rear
axle damaged or leakage.
1. Replace new carrier.
2. Check whether installation supporter deformed or
damaged, repairing or re-painting is needed before
4 Front and rear carrier damaged
replacing new bumper.
3. Check plastic cover whether deformed or damaged,
repairing deformed or damaged plastic cover.
Brake system malfunction inspection
No. Phenomenon Measure
1. Check whether brake disc plates deformed.
1 Locked braking system 2. Check whether hydraulic cylinder of brake clamp locked
or brake clamp assembly parts deformed.
1. Check whether disc plates abrasion exceeded limits.
2 Brake performance degressive 2. Check whether brake shoe of clamp abrasion exceeded
limits or polluted by friction material such as oil.
Grinding noises emerged from 1. Check whether brake plate deformed.
3 front brake or brake plate 2. Check whether hydraulic cylinder of brake clamp locked
become red during drive or brake clamp assembly parts deformed.
1. Check whether brake plate deformed.
Grinding noises emerged from 2. Check whether hydraulic cylinder of brake clamp locked
4 rear brake or brake plate or brake clamp assembly parts deformed.
become red during drive 3. Check whether rear brake clamp parking institution
running flexible or return accurately.
1. Check whether front brake power deviation from left and
right is within specified scope.
Off tracking by braking at 2. Check whether front brake power degressive caused to
5
high-speed rear wheel locked before front wheel in brake process.
3. Check whether left and right absorber spring force
deviation is exceeded specified value.

- 181-
 CHASSIS

4. Check whether front wheel and front wheel axle nut

loosen or damaged.
Off tracking by braking at 5. Check whether front wheel hub inner spline and front
5
high-speed wheel axle outer spline worn or loosen.
6. Check whether rubber cushion connected to front
suspension rocker and frame damaged.

Other system malfunction inspection

No. Phenomenon Measure
1. Check whether steering wheel clip loosen or damaged.
2. Check whether steering column clip and clip seat loosen
Steering wheel loosen, shift
1 or damaged.
up and down
3. Check whether steering column bottom end bearing
damaged.
1. Check whether tie-rod and steering column locknut
Front wheel steering loosen or damaged, or steering knuckle and steering
2
clearance excessive column locknut loosen or damaged.
2. Check whether tie-rod two ball joint damaged.
1. Check whether steering knuckle bearing damaged.
2. Check whether king pin ball joint damaged.
3. Check whether front wheel and axle locknut loosen or
damaged.
3 Front wheel sway during drive
4. Check whether front wheel hub inner spline and front
wheel axle outer spline worn or loosen.
5. Check whether rubber cushion connected to front
suspension rocker and frame damaged.
1. Check whether rear axle bearing damaged.
2. Check whether sliding bearing connected to rear axle
bearing housing and rocker loosen or damaged.
3. Check whether rear wheel and axle locknut loosen or
Rear wheel tramp during
4 damaged.
drive
4. Check whether rear wheel hub inner spline and rear
wheel axle outer spline worn or loosen.
5. Check whether rubber cushion connected to rear
suspension rocker and frame damaged.
1. Check whether wheel rim deformed.
5 Wheel hop during drive 2. Check whether front and rear axles bent.
3. Check whether tyre aging and deformed.
1. Check whether over loading.
Absorber become soft and 2. Check whether absorber spring become soft.
6
comfortability depressed 3. Check whether absorber lost of damping force
incompression and prolongation.

- 182-
 CHASSIS
No. Phenomenon Measure
1. Check whether spline of front and rear axle intermediate
propeller shaft damaged.
2. Check whether front and rear axles splines damaged.
Front and rear axles arise 3. Check whether gears of front gearbox and differential over
7 worn.
abnormal sound during drive
4. Check whether rear gearbox gears over worn.
5. Check whether axle universal joint rubber boot damaged
or universal joint damaged.
1. Check whether four wheel drive switch normal.
Fail to shift into four-wheel-drive 2. Check whether power divider damaged.
8
or lock differential. 3.Check whether differential mechanical conversion agency
locked or damaged.

- 183-
 CHASSIS

DIRECTION SYSTEM
THE STRUCTURE OF THE STEERING

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

Removing the structure of the steering
1 Wheel center cover 1
2 Steering wheel 1
3 Nut M12x1.25 1
4 Washer Φ12 1
5 Steering shaft 1
6 Bolt M8×13.5-Φ12.5×11.5 2
7 Nut M8 2
8 Spring 1
9 Bolt M6×11-Φ8×17 1

- 184-
 CHASSIS

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

10 Nut M6 2
11 Decoration board, steering machine 1
12 Screw M6×16 6
13 Passenger handle bar assembly 1
14 Handle bar grip 2
15 Locking knob, handle bar 1
16 Steering joint 1
17 Bolt ,flange M8×25 2
18 Circlip Φ8 2
19 Drive gear wheel 1
20 Bolt ,flange M10×1.25×30 4

- 185-
 CHASSIS

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

21 Adjuster 2
22 Spring 1
23 Pressure pad 2
24 Plastic locking tie L=300 2
25 Dust boot 2
26 Plastic locking tie L=120 2
27 Tie-rod end 2
28 Notch nut M10×1.25 2
29 Pin Φ3.5×20 2
30 Steering wheel parts 1
31 Bolt M6×11-Φ8×13 1

- 186-
 CHASSIS

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

32 Nut M10×1.25 2
33 Direction of column 1
34 Locking knob grip, handle bar 1
35 Steering machine parts 1
36 Pin 1
37 Cotter pin Φ3.5×20 1
38 Washer Φ8 2
39 Bushing Φ8.5×Φ13×6.5 1
40 Nylon cover, steering machine 2

- 187-
CHASSIS

THE STRUCTURE OF STEERING WHEEL PART

DIASSEMBLING THE PARTS OF THE
STEERING WHEEL
Remove:
• plastic center lid ①
• flange nut, washer ②
• steering wheel ③
a. Takes down the plastic center lid ①
b. Takes down the steering wheel flange nut, the
washer Attached figure ②
c. Use the special tools pull out the steering
wheel ③

CHECKING THE PARTS OF THE STEERING

WHEEL
Check:
• steering wheel ①
• rocky ledge ②
• reverse turning clearance ③
crack/ break Replace.
loose/play Adjust.
the steering wheel to rotate whether nimble, do
not have stagnation. Adjust the torque of the
steering wheel whether obviously
increase Adjust.
NOTE:
The steering force cutting which exerts to
transfers in steering wheel outflow boundary is
smaller than 245N.

The reverse running clearance whether does

surpass the limited stipulation Adjust
NOTE:
The reverse running clearance is less than
30mm.

The grip part which is covered by the foam whether

has damaged, if it is, must replace a new steering
wheel.
• Steering shaft ①
• Washer ②

- 188-
CHASSIS

• Flange nut ③
• Steering wheel ④
Inspect fastens nut of the steering wheel whether
does have flaw and fissure , if it is, must replace.
Check the internal spline between the steering
wheel and steering column whether have
damaged, if the attrition is serious, must replace
the steering wheel.
NOTE:
The tolerance clearance between the internal
spline on the steering wheel and outer spline
on the steering column is smaller than 0.1mm.

WARNING：
If find some problems in the check, it should be
service immediately to ensure the normal
work of the steering system.

DIASSEMBLING THE STEERING COLUMN

PARTS
Remove:
• engine covers ①
• connection covers part ②
• steering wheel cover ③
• display board ④
• steering wheel ⑤
a. Takes down the parts of the front panel (engine
covers) and the connection covers part and the
display board and the steering wheel center
covers
b. Take down the steering wheel
• bolt
• steering shaft
c. Loose the bolt which is on the steering drive
axle, the top of spline, draws out the cross
gimbal.
d. Loose the fastening two pieces M8×13.5 bolt
on the steering shaft, take down the steering shaft
from the frame.

- 189-
CHASSIS

CHECKING AND SERVICE THE STEERING

COLUMN PARTS
1. Check:
• steering column tube ①
• bearing ②
• central axis of the steering shaft ③
• spline ④
• loosening ⑤
• rocky ledge ⑥
The central axis of the steering shaft whether
flexible and moves. If does, dismantle and check
the axis, bearing and retaining ring whether ware
or damaged, according to the inspection situation
to instead the parts.
2. Check:
The two ends of the spline on the central axis
whether is wear out, if so, instead the central
axis.
3. Check:
The spline in the two ends of the central axis
whether have wear, if dose, instead the central
axis.
4. Check:
The steering shaft tube and welding line of the
branch whether have crack and corrosion, if it
does, instead the steering shafttube.

DIASSEMBLING THE STEERING DRIVE AXLE

1. Loose the clamp one piece M8×25 flange bolt
in the cross gimbal, internal spline on the top of
the steering drive axle, pull out the top of the
steering drive axle.
2. Loose the clamp one piece M8×25 flange bolt in
the cross gimbal, spline on the bottom of the
steering drive axle, pull out the lower of the
steering drive axle.

- 190-
CHASSIS

STEERING DRIVE AXLE

CHECKING AND SERVICE THE STEERING
DRIVE AXLE
• bearing ①
• circlip ②
• oil seal ③
• cross axis ④
• Inspect the cross gimbal turn agility with no
stagnation.
If does, dismantle and check the cross axis,
bearing ,and the bearing hole on the cross
gimbal fork whether have wear and corrosion, to
instead the parts based on the check.
NOTE:
Install the cross gimbal, daub the lithium
grease on the surface of the bearing.

• Inspect the transmission shaft whether have

crack and distortion. If it does, instead the parts.

- 191-
CHASSIS
STEERING MACHINE PARTS
THE STRUCTURE OF THE STEERING
1. Check:
• steering joint ①
• turn direction ②
Rough movement Replace.

2. Check:
• pressure pad ①
• dust boots ②
Wear/damage Replace.
Damage/degradation Replace
NOTE:
When replace the dust boots of the ball ,
must enter 1/2 volume in lithium grease in
to the dust boots.

3. Check:
• tie-rod end ①
• turning ②
• rocky ledge ③
Free play Replace the tie-rod end.
Turns roughly Replace the tie-rod end.

4. Check:
• tie-rods
Bends/damage Replace.
5. Check:
·steering joint
Crack/distortion Replace.

- 192-
 CHASSIS
BRAKE SYSTEM
PREPARATION FOR CHECKING BEFORE THE
MAINTENANCE OF THE BRAKE SYSTEM.
Brake system is crucial to the life safety of the
operator and therefore must be periodically
inspected and maintained.
This vehicle uses the single return route
hydraulic pressure disc brake system. Please
follow the tips of inspection as below.
①. To check the amount of liquid in the oil cup. If
it is lower than the minimum mark, refill the box
with the same type of fluid as was recommended
by the manufacturer, to ensure to fluid level is
higher than the minimum mark.
②.The brake lever should be kept between
3mm-5mm, Otherwise, please adjust the screw
to meet required travel distance.
1. Inspect the brake pedal does maintain the
certain counter-tension
When checks disk brake plate, the saved liquid
in the oil cup will pour automatically into the
pressure pipe and the liquid level along with it to
reduce, the periodic inspection the disk brake
plate liquid volume will be an important project.

Must use DOT4 Brake Fluid

2.
·rear disk brake plate ①
·thickness ②
Periodical inspection of the wear condition of rear
disk brake plate is also necessary. Disk brake
plate must be replaced depending on its wear
condition.
3. Disk brake plate uses hydraulic pressure of the
brake fluid. Therefore, fuel pipe must be
periodically inspected and replaced.
Inspection method: If the oil tubing has the aging,
crack or distortion, must replace the oil tubing.

- 193-
 CHASSIS

DISK BRAKE COMPONENTS

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

Removing brake components
1 Rear disc brake cylinder 1
2 Rear disc brake oil pipe assembly 1
3 Belt 3 （L=150） 4
4 Belt 4 （L=200） 8
5 Belt 3 （L=150） 8
6 Bolt ,flange M6×30 2
7 Bolt ,flange M6×20 4
8 Oil pipe clip 1, Front disc brake 8

- 194-
 CHASSIS

DISK BRAKE COMPONENTS

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

9 Bolt ,flange M6×20 8
10 Oil pipe clip Ⅱ, front disc brake 2
Disc brake assembly ((Front & Rear/dual
11 1
disk brake)
12 Front disc brake oil pipe assembly 1

- 195-
 CHASSIS
FRONT BRAKE CALIPER

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

Removing front brake caliper
1 Brake caliper assembly 1
2 Bolt 4
3 Brake disc 1
4 Brake caliper assembly 1
5 Brake caliper, piston assembly 1
6 Brake caliper piston 2
7 Dust seal 2
8 Caliper piston seal 2
9 Bleed screw 1
10 Brake, pad 1

- 196-
 CHASSIS

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

11 Pad spring 1
12 Brake pad holding bolt 2
13 Bolt, flange 2

- 197-
CHASSIS
CHECKING THE FRONT BRAKE DISC
1. Check:
• brake disc
Galling/damage Replace.
2. Measure:
• brake disc deflection
Out of specification Check the wheel runout.
If wheel runout is within the limits, replace the
brake disc.

Brake disc maximum deflection

0.10 mm (0.004 in)

• brake disc thickness ①

• wheel hub ②
• wheel tyre ③
Out of specification Replace.

Brake disc minimum thickness

3.0 mm (0.12 in)

NOTE:
Apply the locking agent to the 30Nm bolt with
screw down.

- 198-
CHASSIS

REPLACING THE FRONT BRAKE PADS

NOTE:
It is not necessary to disassemble the brake
caliper and brake hose to replace the brake
pads.

1.Check:
• brake pad ①
Damage/wear Replace
2.Measure:
• brake pad thickness ⓐ
Out of specification Replace the brake
pads as a set.
Brake pad wear limit
1.5 mm (0.06 in)

3. Install:
• brake pads
• brake pad spring
NOTE:
Always install new brake pads and brake pad
spring as a set.

a. Connect a suitable hose ① tightly to the brake

caliper bleed nozzle ②. Put the other end of this
hose into an open container.
b. Loosen the brake caliper bleed screw and,
using a finger, push the caliper piston into the
brake caliper.
c. Tighten the brake caliper bleed screw.
Brake caliper bleed screw
6 Nm (0.6 m · kg, 4.3 ft · lb)

d. Install the retaining bolts and brake caliper.

Brake pad holding bolt
18Nm (1.8 m · kg, 13 ft · lb)
Brake caliper mountiong bolt
48Nm (4.8 m · kg, 35ft · lb)

- 199-
CHASSIS

4. Check:
• brake fluid level
• minimum level mark ①
the brake fluid box level on the right handlebar.
Should the fluid level falls under the minimum
mark, please refill the box with the same type of
fluid as was recommended by the manufacturer to
ensure the fluid level is higher than the minimum
mark.

Must use DOT4 Brake Fluid

5. Check:
•brake pedal operation
Soft or spongy feeling Bleed the brake
system.

- 200-
CHASSIS

DISASSEMBLING THE FRONT BRAKE

CALIPERS
1. Remove:
• brake caliper pistons
• dust seals ①
• caliper piston seals ②
a. Blow compressed air into the hose joint
opening to force out the caliper piston from
the brake caliper body.
WARNING:
• Never try to pry out a caliper piston.
• Cover the caliper piston with a rag. Be
careful not to get injured when the piston
is expelled from the caliper cylinder.

b. Remove the dust seals and caliper piston

seals.

WARNING:
All internal brake components should be
cleaned in new brake fluid only. Do not use
solvents as they will cause seals to swell
and distort.

2. Check:
• brake caliper pistons ①
Scratches/rust/wear Replace the brake
caliper assembly.
• brake caliper cylinders ②
Wear/scratches Replace the brake
caliperassembly.
• brake caliper body ③
Cracks/damage Replace.
• brake fluid delivery passage (brake caliper
body)
Blockage Blow out with compressed air.

WARNING:
Replace the caliper piston seals and dust
seals whenever the brake caliper is
disassembled.

- 201-
CHASSIS

ASSEMBLING THE FRONT BRAKE CALIPERS

WARNING:
• All internal brake components should be
cleaned and lubricated with new brake
fluid only before installation.

Must use DOT4 Brake Fluid

• Replace the caliper piston seals and dust

seal whenever a brake caliper is disassembled.

1. Install:
• caliper piston seals ①
• dust seals ②

2. Install:
• brake caliper pistons ①

INSTALLING THE FRONT BRAKE

CALIPERS
The following procedure applies to both of the
front brake calipers.
1. Install:
• brake caliper assembly
• bolt flange

48Nm (4.8m · kg,35 ft · lb)

• brake hose ①
• copper washers ②
• union bolt ③

- 202-
CHASSIS

NOTE:
When installing the brake hose on the brake
caliper, make sure that the brake pipe
touches the projection a on the brake caliper.

WARNING:
Proper brake hose routing is essential to
insure safe vehicle operation.

2. Fill:
• brake reservoir

Must use DOT4 Brake Fluid

NOTE:
Brake fluid may damage painted surfaces
or plastic parts. Always clean up spilled
brake fluid immediately.

3. Air bleed:
• brake system

4. Check:
• brake fluid level
Brake fluid level is below the “LOWER” level line
Add the recommended brake fluid to the
proper level.

- 203-
 CHASSIS
REAR BRAKE CALIPER

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

Removing rear brake caliper
1 Brake caliper assembly 1
2 Nut 6
3 Bolt 6
4 Brake disc 1
5 Bolt, flange 2
6 Brake pad holding bolt 2
7 Brake caliper assembly 1
8 Brake, pad 1

- 204-
 CHASSIS

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

9 Brake pad (piston side) 1
10 Insulator/pad shim 2/2
11 Pad spring 1
12 Parking brake arm nut 1
13 Set bolt 1
14 Parking brake arm 1
15 Parking brake arm shaft 1
16 Spring 1
17 Parking brake case bolt 2

- 205-
 CHASSIS

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

18 Parking brake case 1
19 Gasket 1
20 Bleed screw 1
21 Brake caliper bracket 1
22 Caliper piston seal 1
23 Dust seal 1
24 Brake caliper piston 1

- 206-
CHASSIS

CHECKING THE REAR BRAKE DISC

1. Check:
• brake disc ①
Galling/damage Replace.
2. Measure:
• brake disc deflection
Out of specification Replace.

Brake disc maximum deflection

0.10 mm (0.004 in)

• brake disc thickness ②

Out of specification Replace.

Brake disc minimum thickness

4.5 mm (0.18 in)

- 207-
CHASSIS

REPLACING THE REAR BRAKE PADS

1. Check:
• brake pad
• brake pad plate
Damage/wear Replace
2. Measure:
• brake pad thickness
Out of specification Replace the brake
pads as a set.

Brake pad wear limit

1.0 mm (0.04 in)

3. Install:
• brake pads
• pad spring

NOTE:
Always install new brake pads, new brake pad
shims, new insulators, and a new brake pad
spring as a set.

4. Check:
• brake fluid level
• minimum level mark ①
Should the fluid level falls under the minimum
mark, please refill the box with the same type of
fluid as was recommended by the manufacturer to
ensure the fluid level is higher than the minimum
mark.

Must use DOT4 Brake Fluid

- 208-
CHASSIS

DISASSEMBLING THE REAR BRAKE

CALIPER
1. Remove:
• brake caliper piston ①
• dust seal ②
• caliper piston seal ③
a. Turn the brake caliper piston counterclockwise
to remove it.
b. Remove the dust seal and caliper piston seal.

WARNING:
All internal brake components should be
cleaned in new brake fluid only. Do not use
solvents as they will cause seals to swell
and distort.

2.Check:
• brake caliper pistons ①
Scratches/rust/wear Replace the brake
caliper assembly.
• brake caliper cylinders ②
Wear/scratches Replace the brake caliper
assembly.
• brake caliper body ③
Cracks/damage Replace.
• brake fluid delivery passage (brake caliper
body)
Blockage Blow out with compressed air.

- 209-
CHASSIS

WARNING:
Replace the caliper piston seals and dust
seals whenever the brake caliper is
disassembled.

ASSEMBLING THE REAR BRAKE CALIPER

WARNING:
• All internal brake components should be
cleaned and lubricated with new brake fluid
only before installation.

Must use DOT4 Brake Fluid

• Replace the caliper piston seal and dust

seal whenever a brake caliper is disassembled.

1. Install:
• caliper piston seal ①
• dust seal ②

2. Install:
• brake caliper piston ①
Turn the brake caliper piston clockwise until
section ⓐ of the brake caliper piston is level
with the surface of the brake caliper body.
NOTE:
Align an end ⓑ of the groove in the brake
caliper piston with the punch mark ⓒon the
brake caliper body.

- 210-
CHASSIS

3. Install:
• gasket ①
• parking brake case ②
• parking brake case bolts ③

22Nm (2.2 m · kg,16 ft · lb)

• O-ring ④

4. Install:
• parking brake arm shaft ①
• parking brake arm ②
• set bolt ③
• parking brake arm nut ④
NOTE:
Apply lithium-soap-based grease to the parking
brake arm shaft and set bolt.

a. Screw in the parking brake arm shaft

counterclockwise completely so that the punch
mark ⓐ on the parking brake arm shaft is
between the alignment marks ⓑ.
NOTE:
The hole for the parking brake arm shaft has
multiple threads. If the punch mark ⓐ on the
parking brake arm shaft is not between the
alignment marks ⓑ when the parking brake
arm shaft is screwed in completely, remove the
parking brake arm shaft and screw it in from a
different starting position.

b. Turn the parking brake arm shaft approx-

imately 60° clockwise.
c. Install the parking brake arm to the parking
brake arm shaft so that the punch mark ⓒ on
the parking brake arm is aligned with the punch
mark ⓐon the parking brake arm shaft.
d. Turn the parking brake arm until it contacts the
pin ⓓ.
e. Finger tighten the set bolt.
f. Tighten the parking brake arm nut.

- 211-
CHASSIS
5. Install:
• brake pad (piston side) ①
(with insulator and pad shim)
NOTE:
Align the projection a on the piston side of the
brake pad with the groove in the brake caliper
piston.

6. Install:
• brake pad holding bolts

17Nm (1.7 m · kg,12 ft · lb)

INSTALLING THE REAR BRAKE CALIPER

1. Install:
• brake caliper assembly
• brake caliper mounting bolts

40Nm (4.0m · kg,29 ft · lb)

• brake hose ①
• copper washers
• union bolt ②

48Nm (4.8m · kg,35 ft · lb)

NOTE:
Tighten the union bolt while holding the brake
hose as shown.

WARNING:
Proper brake hose routing is essential to
insure safe vehicle operation.

2. Fill:
• brake reservoir

Must use DOT4 Brake Fluid

Note :
Brake fluid may damage painted surfaces
or plastic parts. Always clean up spilled
brake fluid immediately.

- 212-
CHASSIS
3. Air bleed:
• brake system
4. Check:
• brake fluid level
Brake fluid level is below the “MIN” level
line Add the recommended brake fluid to the
proper level.
5. Adjust:
• parking brake cable free play

CHECKING THE MASTER CYLINDER

1. Check:
• brake master cylinder
Wear/scratches Replace the brake master
cylinder assembly.
• brake master cylinder body
Cracks/damage Replace.
• brake fluid delivery passage
(brake master cylinder body)
Blockage Blow out with compressed air.
2. Check:
• brake master cylinder kit
Scratches/wear/damage Replace as a set.
3. Check:
• brake fluid reservoir
• brake fluid reservoir diaphragm
Cracks/damage Replace.

ASSEMBLING THE BRAKE MASTER

CYLINDER
WARNING：
• All internal brake components should be
cleaned and lubricated with new brake fluid
only before installation.

Must use DOT4 Brake Fluid

• Whenever a master cylinder is disassembled
replace the piston seals and dust seals.

- 213-
CHASSIS

INSTALLING THE BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER

1. Install:
• brake master cylinder

16Nm (1.6 m · kg,11 ft · lb)

2. Install:
• brake pipe

19Nm (1.9 m · kg,13 ft · lb)

• washer plate
• brake hose
• union bolt

27Nm (2.7 m · kg,19 ft · lb)

3. Fill:
• brake fluid reservoir

Must use DOT4 Brake Fluid

NOTE:
Brake fluid may damage painted surfaces or
plastic parts. Always clean up spilled brake
fluid immediately.

4. Air bleed:
• brake system
5. Check:
• brake fluid level
Brake fluid level is under the “LOWER” level line
Fill up.

- 214-
 CHASSIS
FOOTREST ASSEMBLY

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

Removing the footrest
1 Left corner panel 1
2 Screw 3
3 Nut, spring 7
4 Right coner panel 1
5 Screw 6
6 Nut, spring 5
7 Left foortest 1
8 Screw 8
9 Nut, spring 2

- 215-
 CHASSIS

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

10 Right footrest 1
11 Screw 9
12 Nut, spring 2
13 Middle footrest 1
14 Screw 5
15 Rubber 1
16 Pedal, brake 1
17 Spring 1
18 Spring 1
19 Rearbrake pump, holder 1
20 Bolt, flange 2
21 Washer 2

- 216-
 CHASSIS

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

22 Bolt, flange 2
23 Nut, flange 1
24 Speedup footrest 1
25 Throttle cable 1
26 Washer Φ15.5×Φ27×2 2
27 Spring 1
28 Screw M6×16 4
29 Screw 4

- 217-
 CHASSIS
WHEEL AND TYRE PARTS
FRONT WHEELS

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

Removing the front wheel
1 Front wheel rim 2
2 Front tire 2
3 Valve, rim 2
4 Nut M10×1.25 8
5 Center cap 2
WARNING:
6 Nut M20×1.5 2 Securely support the vehicle so
7 Soleplate, front wheel hub 2 There is no danger of it falling over.
8 Bolt 8

- 218-
 CHASSIS
REAR WHEELS

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

Removing the rear wheel
1 Rear wheel rim 2
2 Rear tire 2
3 Valve, rim 2
4 Nut M10×1.25 8
5 Center cap 2 WARNING:
6 Nut M20×1.5 2 Securely support the vehicle so
7 Soleplate, rear wheel hub 2 There is no danger of it falling over.

8 Bolt 8

- 219-
CHASSIS
CHECKING THE WHEEL TYRE
1. Check:
• wheel tyre
2. Measure:
• wheel runout
Over the specified limit Replace the
wheel or check the wheel bearing play ①.

3. Check:
• wheel balance
Out of balance  Adjust.

Wheel runout limit

Radial ②: 2.0 mm (0.08 in)
Lateral ③: 2.0 mm (0.08 in)

WARNING:
The profile depth falls below 3mm, Please
replace the tyre immediately.

• tire wear limit ○

a

CHECKING THE WHEEL HUB

1. Check:
• wheel hub ①
Cracks/damage Replace.
• splines (wheel hub) ②
Wear/damage Replace.
·nuts (wheel hub)
loosen or distorted Replace or tighten

- 220-
CHASSIS
INSTALLING THE WHEEL HUB
1. Install:
• axle nut

260 Nm (26.0 m · kg, 190 ft · lb)

INSTALLING THE WHEEL TYRE

1. Install:
• wheel
NOTE:
The arrow mark ① on the tyre must point in
the direction of rotation □
A of the wheel.

2. Tighten:
• wheel nuts ①

The angle of the conical bores is 60°

WARNING:
Tapered wheel nuts ① are used for both the
front and rear wheels. Install each nut

- 221-
CHASSIS
SPECIFICATION OF WHEEL AND TYRE

Tyre
Wheel hub Tyre
Pressure
Dimension Dimension
（Kpa /PSI）
Front 25×8-12
12×6.AT 140/20
Wheel (NHS)
Rear 25×10-12
12×8.AT 140/20
Wheel (NHS)

• Since wheels and tyres are crucial to the vehicle

operation, inspection for tyre pressure and profile
depth is necessary.
• To ensure maximum security and longer life
expectancy of the wheel, please periodically inspect
the tyre pressure and profile depth. Insufficient tyre
pressure can result in not only intensified wearing of
the tyre but also instability during the course of
operating the vehicle (such as hard turning).
Excessive tyre pressure can also reduce the friction
force between the tyre and ground, causing spinning
or lose of control. Therefore, please ensure the tyre
pressure strictly complies with figures shown in the
chart above.
• Before operating the vehicle each time, please
check if profile depth of the tyre is over worn, which
might result in spinning, instability, lose of control
and other potential security risk of the vehicle.

- 222-
 CHASSIS

TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
Front Bridge

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

Removing the front bridge (L.&R.)
1 Circlip 2
2 Double off-set joint assembly 4
3 Circlip 4
4 Ball bearing 4
5 Circlip 4
6 Boot band 4
7 Dust band 4
8 Boot band 4
9 Joint shaft assembly 2
10 C.V. Axle, front Bridge 2

- 223-
 CHASSIS

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

Removing the front bridge
1 Front bridge case 1
2 Front bridge case cover 1
3 Front bridge driven gear 1
4 Positioning sleeve 1
5 Right-C.V. Axle 1
6 Roller 14
7 Cage combination 1
8 Elastic clip 14
9 Left-C.V. Axle 1

- 224-
 CHASSIS

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

10 Bearings 6008C3 2
11 Universal joint seal,front bridge 2
12 Drive gear sleeve 1
13 Front bridge drive gear 1
14 Positioning axis 1
15 Bearing Hk 1
16 Bearing 6306C3 1
17 Adjustment gasket 1
18 Oil seal 25×47×8 1
19 Cap seal, front bridge 1
20 Connection fork, Ⅰ 1

- 225-
 CHASSIS

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

21 Joint cross shaft 1
22 Connection fork Ⅱ 1
23 Transmission shaft, front bridge 1
24 Retainer fixed plate 1
25 O-ring, oil inlet (outlet) bolt 2
26 Oil outlet bolt, front bridge 1
27 Rectangular ring, front bridge box 1
28 Bolt M8×25 11
29 Drive gear bush 1
30 Gascket 1

- 226-
 CHASSIS

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

31 Sensor assy-speed 1
32 Induction coil assembly 1
33 Circlip 106.5×1.2 1
34 Adjustment gasket 1
35 Screw M5×18 1
36 O-ring 1
37 Front bridge differential assembly 1
38 Adjustment column 1
39 Tube 1
40 Clip 1
41 Universal joint 1

- 227-
 CHASSIS

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

42 Rubber rectangular ring, cap seal 1
43 Bolt M10×1.25×80 2
44 Bolt M10×1.25 2
45 Circlip 2
46 Cushion piece 2
47 Spring D=Φ25×Φ2.3×28 2
48 Dustproof rubber cover 2
49 Dowel pin 1
50 Clip 1

- 228-
 CHASSIS
Front Bridge
DISASSEMBLING THE UNIVERSAL JOINT
Remove:
• universal joint
a. Remove the circlips ①.
b. Place the universal joint in a press.
c. With a suitable diameter pipe ② ben- eath the
yoke ③, press the bearing ④ into the pipe as
shown.
d. Repeat the steps for the opposite bearing.
e. remove the yoke.

NOTE:
It may be necessary to lightly tap the yoke with
a punch.

- 229-
 CHASSIS
Front Bridge
CHECKING THE JOINTS
1.Check:
•Dust boots
Cracks/damage Replace

2.Check:
• double off-set joint spline
• ball joint spline
• shaft spline
Wear/damage Replace.
• balls and ball races
• inner surface of double off-set joint
Pitting/wear/damage Replace.

·Check whether the inner and outer ball cage of

the left and right transmission shaft movement is
Smooth, ceaseless. If it is stagnation and obvious
becoming less loosen, replace it.
· Disassembe the left and right transmission
shaft ,cleaning and assemble it again.

NOTE ：
1. The dustproof rubber wrap on the ball cage
is not allow to contact with the gas and diesel
oil.
2. The dustproof rubber wrap does not allow to
be scratched, a slight scratches can damage
the dustproof rubber wrap very quickly.
3. When reassembles the left and right
transmission shaft, in the ball cage must
sufficiently enter 2/3 volume with the Lithium
lubricating.

- 230-
CHASSIS

ASSEMBLING THE UNIVERSAL JOINT

Install:
• universal joint
a. Install the opposite yoke into the universal
joint.
b. Apply wheel bearing grease to the bearings.
c. Install the bearing ① onto the yoke.
d. Press each bearing into the universal joint
using a suitable socket.

CAUTION:
Check each bearing. The needles can easily
fall out of their races. Slide the yoke
back and forth on the bearings; the yoke
will not go all the way onto a bearing if a
needle is out of plate.

NOTE:
The The bearing must be inserted far enough
into the universal joint so that the circlip can be
installed.

e. Install the circlips ② into the groove of each

bearing.

- 231-
 CHASSIS
Rear Bridge

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

Removing the rear bridge(L.&R.)
1 Circlip 2
2 Boot band 4
3 Boot band 4
4 Dust band 4
5 Circlip 4
6 Double off-set joint assembly 2
7 Double off-set joint assembly 2
8 Circlip 4
9 Ball bearing 4
10 Joint shaft assembly 2
11 C.V. Axle, rear bridge 2

- 232-
 CHASSIS

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

Removing the rear bridge
1 Rear bridge differential case 1
2 Rear bridge differential case cover 1
3 Oil seal, universal joint 2
4 Bearing 32008E 1
5 Adjustment Gasket 0.1 1
6 Adjustment Gasket 0.15 1
Adjustment Gasket 0.2 1
7 Driven gear 2
8 Rear bridge differential assembly 1
9 Terminal pad, driven gear 1

- 233-
 CHASSIS

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

10 Gasket 0.1, Terminal Pad 1
Gasket 0.2, Terminal Pad 1
11 Bearing 32010E 1
12 Bearing seat 1
13 Clutch claw 1
14 Fuel outlet gasket 1
15 Oil outlet bolt 1
16 Fork fabrication 1
17 Clip 1
18 Support bracket 1
19 Return spring 1
20 Fork bush 1

- 234-
 CHASSIS

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

21 Fork column pin 1
22 Differential bolt M10×1.25×20 8
23 Oil inlet bolt, rear bridge 1
24 O-Ring, rear bridge oil inlet hole 1
25 Column Pin Φ4×28 1
26 Bolt M10×1.25 2
27 Mechanical brake disc 1
28 Column pin 1
29 Planetary gear 2
30 Adjustment gasket 2
31 Drive & driven gears assembly 1
32 Gasket,rear bridge drive gears 1

- 235-
 CHASSIS

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

33 Reducer casing cover, rear bridge 1
34 Inner tube 1
35 Adjustment inner tube gasket 1
36 Adjustment inner tube 1
37 Bearing 32206E 2
38 O-Ring Φ24×Φ3 1
39 Installing socket, rear disc brake 1
40 Clamp Ф40-60 1
41 Gasket 14×30×4 1
42 Auto-Lock bolt M14×1.5 1
43 Induction coil assembly 1
44 Bolt M10×1.25×80 2

- 236-
 CHASSIS

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

45 Breathing tube, rear bridge 1
46 Clip 1
47 Brake caliper 1
48 Rubber boot, rear bridge 1

- 237-
 CHASSIS
Rear Bridge
(The service method of the rear bridge parts is
as the same as the front bridge parts, please

refer to the before-mentioned to operate.)

NOTE:

Apply lithium-soap-based grease to the bearing

assembly and o-ring and bearing and driven

gear and oil seal and drive shaft coupling and

final drive pinion gear bearing housing.

- 238-
 CHASSIS
Reverse mechanism parts

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

Removing the shift shaft
1 Knob, shift lever 1
2 Gearshift, dust-proof rubber 1
3 Clip clamp 1
4 Gearshift assembly 1
5 Gearshift mounting seat 1
6 Rear bracket, gearshift cable 1
7 Plastic screw 1
8 Bolt M8×16 1
9 Bolt M8×20 1
10 Bolt M8×12 3

- 239-
 CHASSIS

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

11 Gearshift comp 1
12 Rear bracket, gearshift cable 1
13 Bolt M6×25 2
14 Gearshift rocker pivot 1
15 Bolt M6×20 1
16 Gearshift cable assembly 1
17 Nut ,Self-locked M6 2
18 Draining tube 1
19 Clip 2
20 Plug, draining tube 1
21 Bolt M610×1.25×35 1
22 Washer 1

- 240-
 CHASSIS
Reverse mechanism parts
ADJUSTING REVERSE MECHANISM PARTS
① Neutral
② High
③ Low
④ Reverse
⑤Select lever shift rod
⑥Shift control cable

NOTE:
Before shifting, you must stop the vehicle
and take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Otherwise, the transmission may be damaged.

1. Adjust:
• Select lever shift rod
a. Make sure the select lever is in NEUTRAL.
b. Loosen both lnuts ①.
c. Adjust the shift rod length for smooth and
correct shifting.
d. Tighten the nuts ②.

Nut
15 Nm (1.5 m · kg, 11 ft · lb)

- 241-
 CHASSIS
Reverse mechanism parts
CHECKING AND SERVICE OF REVERSE
MECHANISM
1. Check the mobility of gear shift handle. If it is
not working properly, remove the gear shift
Mechanism to check if the fork , ball and spring is
stuck.,in which case replace the defective
component and try again.The last way is to turn to
the professional repairman.
2. If there is lack in the gear shift mechanism ,
adjust the nut of the fork to correct position and
strengthen gear shift mechanism .
3. Remove the gear shift mechanism and check
whether the linking rod is cracked; If so, it should
be changed.
4. Check whether the bouncing spring of gear shift
mechanism is intense enough.
5. Check whether the gear is engaged correctly
and whether there are tripstop or lack. If these
situation exists, call for the maintanance staff to
test and repair it.
6. If the gear can not be engaged, we can test it
from the following aspects:
·whether the clutch can completely declutch;
· whether the gearshift is greased
reliable(whether the oil pipe of gear shift
mechanism is blocked);
· whether gear shift mechanism jams;If these
situation happens, maintanance staff would come
to test and repair it.

- 242-
 CHASSIS

SUSPENSION
Front Suspension

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

Removing the front suspension
1 Front shocker arm absorber (White) 2
Front shocker arm absorber (Black) 2
Front shocker arm absorber (Iron Grey) 2
2 Nut 2
3 Bolt, flange 2
4 Nut 2
5 Bar, stabilizer 1
6 Bushing, stabilizer 2

- 243-
 CHASSIS

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

7 Cover, stabilizer 2
8 Bolt, flange 4
9 Joint, stabilizer 2
10 Bolt, flange 2
11 Nut, self-locking 2
12 Bolt, flange 2
13 Bush 2

- 244-
 CHASSIS
Front Arm

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

Removing the front arm
1 Front upper right rocker arm assembly 1
2 Front upper left rocker arm assembly 1
3 Front lower right rocker arm assembly 1
4 Front lower left rocker arm assembly 1
5 Bolt, flange M10×1.25×70 4
6 Washer 16
7 Nut, self-locking M10×1.25 4
8 Middle bushing 8
9 Circlip 4
10 Ball joint 4

- 245-
 CHASSIS

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

11 Bolt, flange M10×1.25×70 4
12 Nut, self-locking M10×1.25 4
13 Nut M10×1.25 4
14 Pin, cotter 3.5×20 4

- 246-
 CHASSIS
Front Suspension and arm
DISASSEMBLING, SERVICE AND ASSEMBLY
THE SUPPORTING ROCKER PARTS
1. Disassembling and Service
In the suspension, there is easy to appear the
problem with bushing, cotter pin and shock
absorber.
·If the left and right rocker rocks fiercely, check the
few aspect, whether the bushing of the rocker is
crushed, the middle rubber separate is aging and
chapped.
·check whether the cotter pin is credible, if it is not
instead the same spec cotter pin.
· The problem with the shock absorber and
maintain method, whether it can returns to the
position under the pressure and the torsional
spring is rupture. If it is rupture or nearly to rupture,
instead the shock absorber. whether it leak oil, if so
instead the same spec shock absorber. According
to the different request, if there is a oil cup on the
rocker, must check it whether complete and
refuels.
2. Install:
Mount fore L/R damper,up-and-down rocker arm
assembly onto the frame with Flange Bolt M10×70
(8pcs), M10 nuts (8pcs), Flange Bolt M10×70
(4pcs) and M10 Nut, self-locking (4pcs) to ensure a
torque of 40～45Nm.
CAUTION:
·These components should be greased with
butter before assembly.
·The surface of components can not be
cracked.

- 247-
 CHASSIS
Front Suspension and arm
·Check whether these components are greased
with butter and then tighten the up-and-down
rocker arm assembly and L/R fore dampers and
ther components. Fix the L/R tension rods into hole
by way of the trough of open-groove nut with
cotter pin (4 pcs), and make these tension rods
bisection on feet.

CHECKING THE STABILIZER

1. Check:
• bar, stabilizer
Bends/cracks/damage Replace.

CHECKING THE STEERING KNUCKLES

1. Check:
• steering knuckles
Damage/pitting Replace

CHECKING THE FRONT ARMS

1. Check:
• front arms
Bends/damage Replace.
2. Check:
• Middle bushing
Wear/damage Replace.
3. Check:
• ball joints
Damage/pitting Replace the ball joint.
Free play Replace the ball joint.
Turns roughly Replace the ball joint.

- 248-
CHASSIS

CHECKING THE FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER

1. Check:
• shock absorber rod
Bends/damage Replace the shock
absorber assembly.
• shock absorber assembly
Oil leaks Replace the shock absorber
assembly.
• spring
Fatigue Replace the shock absorber
assembly.
Move the spring up and down.

- 249-
 CHASSIS
Front Suspension and arm
INSTALLING THE FRONT ARMS AND
FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER
1. Install:
• front arms
• front shock absorber

a. Install the front upper a rm ① and front lower

arm ②.

NOTE:
• Lubricate the bolts ③with lithium-soap-based
grease.
• Be sure to position the bolts ③so that the bolt
head faces outward.
• Temporarily tighten the nuts ④.

b. Install the front shock absorber ⑤.

Nut ⑥
45 Nm (4.5 m · kg, 32 ft · lb)

c. Install the ball joints.

Nut ⑦
30 Nm (3.0 m · kg, 22 ft · lb)

d. Install the new cotter pins.

e. Tighten the nuts.

Nut ④
45 Nm (4.5 m · kg, 32 ft · lb)

- 250-
 CHASSIS
Rear Suspension

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

Removing the rear suspension
1 Rear shocker arm absorber (White) 2
Rear shocker arm absorber(Black) 2
Rear shocker arm absorber(Iron Grey) 2
2 Bolt, flange M10×1.25×70 2
3 Nut, self-locking M10x1.25 4
4 Bolt, flange M10×1.25×65 2
5 Bar, stabilizer 1
6 Bushing, stabilizer 2
7 Cover, stabilizer 2
8 Bolt, flange M8×15 4
9 Joint, stabilizer 2
10 Bolt, flange M10×1.25×45 4
11 Nut, self-locking M10x1.25 4

- 251-
 CHASSIS
Rear arm shaft

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

Removing the rear arm shaft
1 Rear upper right rocker arm assembly 1
2 Rear upper left rocker arm assembly 1
3 Rear lower right rocker arm assembly 1
4 Rear lower left rocker arm assembly 1
5 Bolt, flange M10×1.25×102 2
6 Nut, self-locking M10x1.25 2
7 Bolt, flange M10×1.25×195 2
8 Nylon bush 4
9 Inner bush 2

- 252-
 CHASSIS

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

10 Nut, self-locking M10x1.25 2
11 Middle bushing 4
12 Nut, self-locking M10x1.25 4
13 Bolt, flange M10×1.25×102 2
14 Nut, self-locking M10x1.25 2
15 Bolt, flange M10×1.25×70 4
16 Washer 8
17 Curved nozzle M6 2

- 253-
 CHASSIS
Rear Suspension and arm
CHECKING AND SERVICE OF REAR
SUSPENSION
1. It is similar to the front suspension ,Check if
there exists any distortion or crack on the install
axis of the shock absorber in which case it must be
replaced.
2. Inspect the rocker bushing and the middle
rubber separate is integrant.( According to the front
Suspension)
3. The cotter pin on the head of the install axis
which in the rear shock absorber whether is
credible.
NOTE:
After disassemble the rear shock absorber,
check if there exists any distortion or crack on
the frame connection hole and the rear shock
absorber, if so, inform the special serviceman
to inspect and service first or install the rear
shock absorber on the frame after
instead.(Attention, the bolts must be the
special self-lock nut, the fastening torque must
be 45-55Nm)

- 254-
 CHASSIS
Rear Suspension and arm
CHECKING THE STABILIZER
1. Check:
• bar, stabilizer
Bends/cracks/damage Replace.

CHECKING THE STEERING KNUCKLES

1. Check:
• steering knuckles
Damage/pitting Replace

CHECKING THE REAR ARMS

1. Check:
• rear arms
Bends/damage Replace.
2. Check:
• Middle bushing
Wear/damage Replace.

CHECKING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER

1. Check:
• shock absorber rod
Bends/damage Replace the shock
absorber assembly.
• shock absorber assembly
Oil leaks Replace the shock absorber
assembly.
• spring
Move the spring up and down.
Fatigue Replace the shock absorber
assembly.

- 255-
CHASSIS

INSTALLING THE REAR ARMS AND REAR

SHOCK ABSORBER
1. Install:
• rear arms
• rear shock absorber

a. Install the rear upper arm ①and rear lower arm

②.

NOTE:
• Lubricate the bolts ③ with
lithium-soap-based grease.
• Be sure to position the bolts ③ so that the
bolt head faces inward.
• Temporarily tighten the nuts ④.

b. Install the rear shock absorber ⑤.

Nut ⑥
45 Nm (4.5 m · kg, 32 ft · lb)

c. Install the rear knuckle.

Nut ⑦
45 Nm (4.5 m · kg, 32 ft · lb)

d. Tighten the nuts ④.

Nut ④
45 Nm (4.5 m · kg,32 ft · lb)

- 256-
 CHASSIS
COOLING SYSTEM
RADIATOR

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

Removing the radiator
1 Cooler, water-tank 1
2 Water tank assembly 1
3 Rubber cushion, water tank 2
4 Bolt,flange M8×12 2
5 Fan assembly 1
6 Water inlet rubber pipe 1
7 Pipe clip 2

- 257-
 CHASSIS

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

8 Water inlet assembly
9 Bolt ,flange M6×25 2
10 Water tank cover (Assembly) 1
11 Right front rubber pipe(Water Inlet) 1
12 Left front rubber pipe(Water Inlet) 1
13 Metal pipe 2
14 Mounting lug- Left cooling tank 1
15 Right rear rubber pipe( Engine) 1
16 Left rear rubber pipe( Engine) 1
17 Pipe clip 8

- 258-
 CHASSIS

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

18 Pipe clip(rubber covered) 4
19 Bolt ,flange M6×12 4
20 Standby water bottle 1
21 Bolt ,flange M6×16 2
22 Connection rubber pipe, standby water tank 1
23 Clip 2
24 Standby water tank cover assembly 1
25 Overflow pipe 1
26 Clip 1
27 H-type rubber ring 2

- 259-
 CHASSIS

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

28 Mounting lug- right cooling tank 1
29 Flanging collar 2
30 Breathing bolt 1

- 260-
CHASSIS

CHECKING THE RADIATOR

1. Check:
• radiator fins
Obstruction Clean.
Apply compressed air to the rear of the radiator
Damage Repair or replace.
NOTE:
Straighten any flattened fins with a thin,
flat-head screwdriver.

2. Check:
• all rubber hose
Cracks/damage Replace.
3. Check:
• Bolt clip
the tightness of Bolt clip. If loosen, please have
the hoop tightened immediately.
4. Check:
• radiator fan
Damage Replace.
Malfunction Check and repair.

5. Measure:
• radiator cap opening pressure
Below the specified pressure Replace
the radiator cap.

Radiator cap opening pressure

107.9 ~ 137.3 KPa
(1.079 ~ 1.373 kg/cm2, 15.35 ~ 19.53 psi)

a. Install the radiator cap tester ① and adapter

② onto the radiator cap ③.
b. Apply the specified pressure for ten sec-onds
and make sure that there is no drop inpressure.

- 261-
CHASSIS

INSTALLING THE RADIATOR

1. Fill:
• cooling system
Start engine when pour full the refrigerating fluid,
loose the exhaust nut on the pipe, the water level
will get lower at this time, Supply the refrigerating
fluid until the water level stop to change, then
screw the exhaust nut, cover the water tank lid.
The water tank inspection is finished. .
2. Check:
• cooling system
Leaks Repair or replace any faulty part.

- 262-
 CHASSIS
Oil cooler

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

Removing the oil cooler
1 Oil cooler assembly 1
2 Bolt ,flange M6×25 4
3 Flanging collar Φ6×Φ9×Φ19×11 4
4 Oil cooler 1
5 Screw ST3.9×15 4
6 Rubber oil Pipe Ⅰ Φ17×Φ10×870 1
7 Rubber oil Pipe Ⅱ Φ17×Φ10×500 1
8 Metal oil Pipe 2
9 Pipe clip Φ10-Φ20 8
10 Oil pipe clip 3

- 263-
 CHASSIS
Oil cooler

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

11 Bolt ,flange M6×12 3
12 Rubber oil Pipe Ⅳ Φ17×Φ10×350 1
13 Rubber oil Pipe Ⅲ Φ17×Φ10×350 1
14 Oil cooler parts 1
15 H-type rubber ring Φ9×Φ12×Φ19×10×3 4
16 Oil cooler breathing bolt 1

- 264-
CHASSIS

CHECKING THE OIL COOLER

1. Check:
• oil cooler
Obstruction Clean.
Apply compressed air to the rear of the oil
cooler.
Damage Repair or replace the oil cooler.
NOTE:
Straighten any flattened fins with a thin,
flathead screwdriver.

2. Check:
• oil pipes
Cracks/damage Replace.

- 265-
 CHASSIS
WATER PUMP

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

Removing the water pump
1 Clip 3
2 Water pipe 1
3 O-ring Φ27×2.5 1
4 Water outlet connector, cylinder 1
5 Save temperature 1
6 Bolt M6×50 2
7 Bolt M6×12 2
8 Washer Φ6×Φ10×1 2
9 Bolt M6×25 2
10 Thermostat cover 1
11 Washer Φ20.5×Φ30×1 1
12 Gasket 1
13 Water pipe 1

- 266-
 CHASSIS

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

Removing the water pump
1 water pump housing cover 1
2 Water pump assembly 1
3 Bolt M6×40 3
4 Washer Φ6×Φ10×1 1
5 Bolt M6×65 1
6 Secondary gear,water pump 1
7 Transmission shaft,water pump 1
8 Pin Φ4×21 1
9 Circlip Φ10 1

- 267-
 CHASSIS

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

10 Bearing 1
11 Oil seal Φ15×Φ10×5 1
12 Gasket,water pump cover 1
13 O-ring Φ34×2.5 1
14 Water pump housing 1
15 Boot band 1
16 Overflow pipe 1
17 Gasket,water pump cover 1
18 Water pump seal assembly 1

- 268-
 CHASSIS

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

19 Impeller 1
20 Cover, water pump 1
21 Clip 1
22 Water pipe 1

- 269-
CHASSIS

DISASSEMBLING THE WATER PUMP

1. Remove:
• rubber damper holder ①
• rubber damper ②
NOTE:
Do not scratch the impeller shaft.

2. Remove:
• water pump seal ①
• Water pump housing②
NOTE:
Tap out the water pump seal from the inside of
the water pump housing.

3. Remove:
• bearing ①
• oil seal ②
•water pump housing ③

NOTE:
• Tap out the bearing and oil seal from the
outside of the water pump housing.
• Apply lithium-soap-based grease to the oil
seal and apply engine oil to the bearing.

- 270-
CHASSIS

CHECKING THE WATER PUMP

1. Check:
• water pump housing cover ①
• water pump housing ②
• impeller ③
• rubber damper ④
• rubber damper holder ⑤
• o-ring ⑥
Cracks/damage/wear Replace.

NOTE:
Apply lithium-soap-based grease to the o-ring.

2. Check:
• water pump seal ①
• oil seal ②
• water pipe ③
Cracks/damage/wear Replace.
• bearing ④
Rough movement Replace.
NOTE:
Apply lithium-soap-based grease to the oil seal
and apply engine oil to the bearing

3. Measure:
• impeller shaft tilt
Straightedge ①
Impeller ②
Out of specification Replace.

Max. impeller shaft tilt

0.15 mm (0.006 in)

- 271-
CHASSIS

ASSEMBLING THE WATER PUMP

1. Install:
• oil seal ①
(into the water pump housing ②)

NOTE:
• Before installing the oil seal, apply tap water
or coolant onto its outer surface.
• Install the oil seal with a socket ③ that
matches its outside diameter.

2. Install:
• water pump seal ①
(into the water pump housing ②)
• mechanical seal installer and water pump seal
installer ③
• water pump seal installer ④

NOTE:
•Never lubricate the water pump seal surface
with oil or grease.
•Install the water pump seal with the special
tools.

3. Install:
• rubber damper ①
• rubber damper holder ②
NOTE:
•Before installing the rubber damper, apply tap
water or coolant onto its outer surface.
•Make sure that the rubber damper and rubber
damper holder are flush with the impeller.

- 272-
 CHASSIS
SEAT

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

Removing the seat
1 Driver/passenger seat assembly 1/1
2 Driver/passenger back rest 1/1
3 Driver/passenger seat cushion 1/1
4 Seat connection assembly 2
5 Bolt M8×16 10
6 Washer Φ8 10
7 Circlip Φ8 10
8 Right slide rail assembly, seat 2

- 273-
 CHASSIS

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

9 Left slide rail assembly, seat 2
10 Bolt M8×30 10
11 Seat lower mounting board 2
12 Bolt, flange M6×16 4
13 Nut ,flange nylex M6 8
14 Left lock combination 1
15 Bolt, flange M10×1.25×22 2
16 Safety belt component 2
17 Left safety belt assembly (Tri-Point fixing style) 1

- 274-
 CHASSIS

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

18 Safety belt buckle cover 2
19 Bolt ,flange M10×1.25×25-Φ14×5 2
20 Safety belt bushing 2
21 Nut M10×1.25 2
22 Nut ,flange nylex M10×1.25 2
23 Bolt, flange M10×1.25×22 2
24 Nut, flange nylex M10×1.25 2
25 Bolt ,flange M10×1.25×25-Φ14×5 2
26 Right lock combination 1

- 275-
 CHASSIS

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

27 Seat bushing Φ8.5×Φ13×6.5 8
28 Right safty belt assembly 1
29 Rubber plug 10
30 Nut ,flange nylex M10×1.25 2

- 276-
CHASSIS
DISASSEMBLING THE SEAT
Remove:
• Driver seat ①
• Passenger seat ②
• Bolt ③
To remove the seat, Remove bolts M6 with
socket wrench, and then remove the seat.
Installation is the reverse of removal.

CAUTION:
·These components should be greased with
butter before assembly.
·The surface of components can not be
cracked.

Moving Seat Forward And Backward

• Driver seat handle①
• Passenger seat handle ②
The seat can be moved forward and backward to
fit the height of different drivers. Pull up the handle,
then you can move the seat forward and backward.

- 277-
 CHASSIS
FUEL TANK PARTS

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

Removing the fuel tank
1 Fuel tank assembly 1
2 Bolt , flange M8×25 3
3 Flanging collar Φ8.5 3
4 Robber grommet 3
5 Fuel tank cover 1
6 Ventilate tube Φ9×Φ5×540 1
7 Connector Ⅰ 1
8 Hold-down plate, fuel tank 1
9 Hook, fuel tank 1
10 Nut, flange nylex M8 1
11 Fuel tank front yoke assembly 1

- 278-
 CHASSIS

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

12 Bolt ,flange M8×45 2
13 Fuel tank rubber cushion 36×26×5 9
14 Electronic fuel pump 1
15 Oil tank outlet pipe Ⅱ 3
16 Oil tank outlet pipeⅠ 1
17 Tee joint 1
18 Pipe clip Φ10-Φ20 9
19 Oil cleaner, high pressure element assembly 1
20 Negative pump plate 1
21 Nut, flange nylex M6 6
22 Oil seal, electronic fuel pump 1
23 Shock absorbtion rubber, fuel pump 4
24 Connector Ⅱ 1

- 279-
CHASSIS

• Fuel tank cap

Remove the fuel tank cap by turning it
counterclockwise.

- 280-
 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM MALFUNCTION INSPECTION

S/N Phenomenon Measure
1、 Check whether switches normal.
1 Abnormal lights 2、 Check whether cables damaged.
3、 Check whether lights damaged.
1、 Check whether four wheel drive switch normal.
Fail to shift into
2 four-wheel-drive or 2、 Check whether power divider damaged.
lock differential. 3、 Check whether differential mechanical conversion agency locked or
damaged.
1、 Check whether battery undercharge.
2、 Check whether starting motor damaged.
3、 Check whether CDI damaged.
4、 Check whether ignition coil normal.
3 Fail to electric start 5、 Check whether spark plug fouling or ablative.
6、 Check whether magneto ignition signal normal.
7、 Check whether carburetor plugged or damaged.
8、 Check whether air filter plugged.
9、 Check whether oil circuit smooth.
Abnormal speed 1、 Check whether sensor damaged.
4 indication between 2、 Check whether meter damaged.
meter and mileage.
3、 Check whether sensor surface polluted by iron scrap,
1、 Check whether neutral switch damaged.
Neutral indicator of
5 2、 Check whether meter damaged.
meter is not bright
3、 Check whether cable damaged.
Reverse indicator 1、 Check whether reverse switch damaged.
6 of meter is not 2、 Check whether meter damaged.
bright 3、 Check whether cable damaged.
1、 Check whether meter damaged.
Other indicators of
7 2、 Check whether cable damaged.
meter are not bright
3、 Check whether sensor or switch damaged.
1、 Check whether switch damaged.
Ignition switch
8 2、 Check whether cable damaged.
can not shut off.
3、 Check whether ECU damaged.

- 281 -
 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

ELECTRICAL
ELECTRICALCOMPONENTS

1. Thermo switch 2
2. Radiator fan
3. Brake light switch
4. Thermo switch 1
5. Ignition coil 1
6. Gear position switch
7. Reverse switch
8. Speed sensor
9. Ignition coil 2
10. stator assembly

- 282 -
 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

1. Four-wheel drive relay 1

2. Four-wheel drive relay 2
3. Head light relay
4. Reverse indicator light relay
5.Relay
6. ECU relay
7. Fuse box
8. ECU unit
9. Battery
10. Starter relay
11. Rectifier/regulator
12. Indicator light assembly 1
13.Indicator light assembly 2
14. On-Command four-wheel drive switch and differential gear lock switch
15. Main switch
16.Light switch

- 283 -
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

CHECKING THE SWITCH

CHECKING THE SWITCH
Use a pocket tester to check the terminals for
continuity. If the continuity is faulty at any point,
replace the switch.

NOTE:
• Set the pocket tester to “0” before starting
the test.
• The pocket tester should be set to the “Ω ×
1” range when testing the switch for
continuity.
• Turn the switch on and off a few times when
checking it.

The terminal connections for switches (main

switch, light switch, etc.) are shown in a chart
similar to the one on the left. This chart shows the
switch positions in the column and the switch lead
colors in the top row.
For each switch position, “ ” indicates the
terminals with continuity.
The example chart shows that:
①There is continuity between the “Brown/Blue
and Red” leads when the switch is set to “ON”.

- 284 -
 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

Checking the switch continuity

Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCH” and check for continuity between lead terminals. Poor connection,
no continuity Correct or replace.
* The coupler locations are circled.

1. Fuse
2. Brake light switch
3. Main switch
4. On-Command four-wheel drive switch and differential gear lock switch
5.Light switch
6.Parking brake switch
7.Reverse switch
8.Four-wheel drive switch

- 285 -
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

CHECKING THE BULBS AND BULB

SOCKETS
Check each bulb and bulb socket for damage or
wear, proper connections, and also for continuity
between the terminals
Damage/wear Repair or replace the bulb, bulb
socket or both.
Improperly connected Properly connect.
Incorrect continuity reading Repair or replace
the bulb, bulb socket or both.

WARNING：
Since the bulb gets extremely hot, keep
flammable products and your hands away from
the bulb until it has cooled down.

CAUTION:
• Be sure to hold the socket firmly when
removing the bulb. Never pull the lead,
otherwise it may be pulled out of the terminal
in the coupler.
• Avoid touching the glass part of the bulb to
keep it free from oil, otherwise the
transparency of the glass, the life of the bulb
and the luminous flux will be adversely
affected. If the bulb gets soiled, thoroughly
clean it with a cloth moistened with alcohol
or lacquer thinner.

- 286 -
 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

IGNITION SYSTEM
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

- 287 -
 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

TROUBLESHOOTING
IF THE IGNITION SYSTEM FAILS TO OPERATE (NO SPARK OR INTERMITTENT SPARK):

Procedure
Check:
1. Fuses (main, ignition) 7. Main switch
2. Battery 8. Pickup coil resistance
3. Spark plug 9. Rotor rotation direction detection coil
4. Ignition spark gap resistance
5. Spark plug cap resistance 10.Wiring connection (the entire ignition system)
6. Ignition coil resistance
NOTE:
1. Cushion
2. Front frame
3. Front fender
Check and repaire with following special tools.

1.Fuses (main, ignition)

NO CONTINUITY
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCH”.
CONTINUITY
Replace the fuse(s).
2. Battery
INCORRECT
• Check the battery condition. Refer to
“CHECKING AND CHARGING THE
BATTERY” in chapter 3.
Open-circuit voltage • Clean the battery terminals.
12.8 V or more at 20 °C (68 °F) • Recharge or replace the battery.

CORRECT
3. Spark plug

• Check the spark plug condition.

• Check the spark plug type.
• Check the spark plug gap.
Refer to “CHECKING THE SPARK PLUG” in
chapter 3.

- 288 -
 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

4. Ignition spark gap

• Disconnect the spark plug cap from the INCORRECT

spark plug.
• Connect the pulse ignition spark checker or
ignition checker ① as shown. Repair or replace the spark plug.

② Spark plug cap

• Turn the main switch to “ON”.
a .
• Check the ignition spark gap ○

• Crank the engine by pushing the starter

switch, and increase the spark gap until a
misfiring occurs.

Minimum spark gap MEETS SPECIFICATION

6.0 mm (0.24 in)
OUT OF SPECIFICATION OR
NO SPARK The ignition system is not faulty.

5. Spark plug cap resistance

• Remove the spark plug cap.

• Connect the pocket tester (Ω × 1k) to the
spark plug cap.
• Check that the spark plug cap has the
specified resistance.
Spark plug cap resistance
OUT OF SPECIFICATION
10 kΩ at 20 °C (68 °F)

MEETS SPECIFICATION
Replace the spark plug cap.

6. Ignition coil resistance

• Disconnect the ignition coil connector from

the wire harness
• Connect the pocket tester (Ω × 1) to the
ignition coil.
Tester (+) lead Orange lead terminal
Tester (–) lead Ignition coil base
• Check that the primary coil has the specified

- 289 -
 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

. resistance
Primary coil resistance
0.18 ~ 0.28 Ω at 20 °C (68 °F)
• Connect the pocket tester (Ω × 1k) to the
ignition coil.
Tester (+) lead Orange lead terminal
Tester (–) lead Spark plug lead
• Check that the secondary coil has the
specified resistance.
Secondary coil resistance OUT OF SPECIFICATION
6.32 ~ 9.48 kΩ at 20 °C (68 °F)

BOTH MEET SPECIFICATION

Replace the ignition coil.

7. Main switch

Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCH” INCORRECT

CORRECT

8. Pickup coil resistance Replace the main switch.

• Disconnect the A.C. magneto coupler from

the wire harness.
• Connect the pocket tester (Ω × 100) to the
pickup coil terminal.
Tester (+) lead White/ Blue terminal ①
Tester (–) lead Green terminal ②
• Check the pickup coil for the specified
resistance.
Pickup coil resistance
OUT OF SPECIFICATION
459 ~ 561 Ω at 20 °C (68 °F)
(White/Red – White/Green)
MEETS SPECIFICATION
Replace the pickup coil/stator assembly.

9.Wiring connection

• Check the connections of the entire ignition POOR CONNECTION

system. Refer to “CIRCUIT DIAGRAM”.
CORRECT

Properly connect the ignition system.

Replace the C.D.I. unit

- 290 -
 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

- 291 -
 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

TROUBLESHOOTING
IF THE STARTER MOTOR FAILS TO OPERATE:

Procedure
Check:
1. Fuses (main, ignition, signaling system) 6. Gear position switch
2. Battery 7. Brake light switch
3. Starter motor 8. Diode 1
4. Starter relay 9. Wiring connection (the entire starting system)
5. Main switch
NOTE:
• Remove the following part(s) before
troubleshooting:
1. Console
2. Front frame
3. Front fender
• Use the following special tool(s) for
troubleshooting.

1. Fuses (main, ignition, signaling system) NO CONTINUITY

Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCH”
CONTINUITY
Replace the fuse(s).
2. Battery
• Check the battery condition. Refer to INCORRECT
“CHECKING AND CHARGING THE
BATTERY” in chapter 3.
Open-circuit voltage
• Clean the battery terminals.
12.8 V or more at 20 °C (68 °F)
• Recharge or replace the battery.
CORRECT

WARNING：
3. Starter motor
• A wire that is used as a jumper lead must
• Connect the battery (+) terminal ① and
have the equivalent capacity or more as that
starter motor cable ② using a jumper lead③
of the battery lead, otherwise the jumper
• Check the operation of the starter motor.
lead may burn.
• This check is likely to produce sparks, so
be sure that no flammable gas or fluid is in
the vicinity.

- 292 -
 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

DOSE NOT TURN

Repair or replace the starter motor.

TURNS

4. Starter relay
• Remove the starter relay from the wire
harness.
• Connect the pocket tester (Ω × 1) and the
battery (12 V) to the starter relay terminals.
Battery (+) terminal Yellow/Blue
terminal ①
Battery (–) terminal Blue/Black terminal
②
NO CONTINUITY
Tester (+) lead Red terminal ③
Tester (–) lead Black terminal ④
• Check the starter relay for continuity.
CONTINUITY Replace the starter relay.

5. Main switch Refer to “CHECKING THE INCORRECT

SWITCH”.
CORRECT
Replace the main switch.
6. Gear position switch Refer to “CHECKING INCORRECT
THE SWITCH”.
CORRECT

Replace the gear position switch.

7. Brake light switch Refer to “CHECKING
INCORRECT
THE SWITCH”.
CORRECT

8. Diode 1 Replace the brake light switch.

• Remove the diode from the coupler
• Connect the pocket tester (Ω × 1) to the
diode terminals as shown.
• Check the diode for continuity as follows

- 293 -
 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

Tester (+) lead

Yellow/Blue terminal ①
Tester(–)lead
Yellow terminal ② Continuity
Tester(+) lead
Yellow/Blue terminal ①
Tester (–) lead
Blue/White terminal ③
NOTE:
Tester (+)lead
When you switch the tester’s positive and
Yellow terminal ②
negative probes, the readings in the left chart
Tester (–) lead
NO will be reversed.
Yellow/Blue terminal ①
Continuity
Tester(+) lead
INCORRECT
Blue/White terminal ③
Tester(–)lead
Yellow/Blue terminal ①
CORRECT Replace the diode 1.

9. Wiring connection POOR CONNECTION

• Check the connections of the entire starting
system. Refer to “CIRCUIT DIAGRAM”.

Properly connect the starting system.

- 294 -
 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
STARTER MOTOR

No. Part Name Qty Remarks

Removing the starter motor Remove the parts in the order listed.
1 Starter motor lead 1
2 Starter motor/O-ring 1/1
For installation, reverse the removal
procedure.
Disassembling the starter motor Remove the parts in the order listed.
① Bracket 1 1
② Washer kit 1
③ Bracket 2 1 Refer to “ASSEMBLING THE
④ Shims STARTER MOTOR”
⑤ Brush seat 1/brush seat 2 1/1
⑥ Armature coil 1 1
⑦ Yoke 1

- 295 -
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

CHECKING THE STARTER MOTOR

1. Check:
• commutator
Dirty Clean it with #600 grit sandpaper.

2. Measure:
• commutator diameter
Out of specification Replace the starter
motor.

3. Measure:
• mica undercut ○
b

Out of specification Scrape the mica using

a hacksaw blade.
NOTE:
Scrape the mica to the proper measurement
using a hacksaw blade which has been
grounded to fit the commutator.

4. Check:
• armature coil (insulation/continuity)
Defects Replace the starter motor.
a. Connect the pocket tester for the continuity
check ① and insulation check ②.
b. Measure the armature resistances
c. If the resistance is incorrect, replace the
starter motor.

5. Measure:
• brush lengthⓐ (each)
Out of specification Replace the brush.
6. Measure:
• brush spring force
Fatigue/out of specification Replace as a
set.
7. Check:
• oil seal
• bushing
• O-rings
Wear/damage Replace.

- 296 -
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

ASSEMBLING THE STARTER MOTOR

1. Install:
• brush seat 1 ①
NOTE:
Align the projection ○
a on the brush seat 1

with the slot ○

b on the yoke.

2. Install:
• yoke
• brackets
NOTE:
Align the match marks ○
a on the yoke with
the match marks ○
b on the brackets.

- 297 -
 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

CHARGING SYSTEM
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

- 298 -
 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

TROUBLESHOOTING
Procedure
IF THE BATTERY IS NOT CHARGED:
Check:
1. Fuse (main) 4. Charging coil resistance
2. Battery 5. Wiring connections(the entire charging system)
3. Charging voltage
NOTE:
Remove some parts before maintenance
1. Cushion
Repair with following special toolings

1. Fuse (main)

Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCH”. NO CONTINUITY

CONTINUITY

Replace the fuse.

2.Battery

• Check the battery condition. Refer to

“CHECKING AND CHARGING THE
INCORRECT
BATTERY in chapter 3.
Open-circuit voltage
12.8 V or more at 20 °C (68 °F)
• Clean the battery terminals.
CORRECT
• Recharge or replace the battery.

3. Charging voltage

• Connect the engine tachometer to the

spark plug lead.
• Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the
battery.
Tester (+) lead Battery (+) terminal
Tester (–) lead Battery (–) terminal
• Start the engine and accelerate to about
1,000 r/min.
Charging voltage 14 V at 1,000 r/min MEETS SPECIFICATION
NOTE:
Use a fully charged battery.

OUT OF SPECIFICATION
The charging circuit is not faulty.

- 299 -
 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

4. Charging coil resistance

• Disconnect the A.C. magneto coupler from

the wire harness.
• Connect the pocket tester (Ω × 1) to the
charging coils.
Tester (+) lead White terminal ①
Tester (–) lead White terminal ②
Tester (+) lead White terminal ①
Tester (–) lead White terminal ③
• Measure the charging coil resistance.
Charging coil resistance OUT OF SPECIFICATION

0.32 ~ 0.43 Ω at 20 °C (68 °F)

MEETS SPECIFICATION
Replace the pickup coil/stator assembly.
5. Wiring connections

• Check the connections of the entire charging POOR CONNECTION

system. Refer to “CIRCUIT DIAGRAM”.
CORRECT
Properly connect the charging system.
Replace the rectifier/regulator.

- 300 -
 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

LIGHTING SYSTEM
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

- 301 -
 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

TROUBLESHOOTING
IF THE HEADLIGHT AND/OR TAILLIGHT FAIL TO COME ON:

Procedure
Check
1. Fuses (main, lighting system) 4. Light switch
2. Battery 5. Wiring connections(the entire lighting system)
3. Main switch
NOTE:
• Remove the following part(s) before
troubleshooting:
1. Console
2. Front luggage carrir
3. Front covering parts
• Use special tool(s) for troubleshooting.
1. Fuses (main, lighting system)

Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCH”. NO CONTINUITY

CONTINUITY
2. Battery
Replace the fuse(s).
• Check the battery condition. Refer to
“CHECKING AND CHARGING THE
BATTERY” in chapter 3. INCORRECT
Open-circuit voltage
12.8 V or more at 20 °C (68 °F)
CORRECT • Clean the battery terminals.
3. Main switch • Recharge or replace the battery
INCORRECT
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCH”.
CORRECT
4.Light switch Replace the main switch.
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCH”. INCORRECT
CORRECT
5. Wiring connection

• Check the connections of the entire lighting Replace the light switch.
system. Refer to “CIRCUIT DIAGRAM”. POOR CONNECTION
CORRECT

Check the condition of each of the lighting Properly connect the lighting system.
system’s circuits. Refer to “CHECKING THE
LIGHTING SYSTEM”.

- 302 -
 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

CHECKING THE LIGHTING SYSTEM

1. If the headlights fail to come on:
(1). Bulb and bulb socket
NO CONTINUITY
• Check the bulb and bulb socket for
continuity.
CONTINUITY
(2). Voltage Replace the bulb and/or bulb socket.

• Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the

headlight couplers. A
Tester (+) lead
Green terminal ① or Yellow terminal ②
Tester (–) lead Black terminal ③
□
A When the light switch is on “ ”.
□
B When the light switch is on “ ” B

• Turn the main switch to “ON”.

• Turn the light switch to “ ” or “ ”.
• Check the voltage (12 V) of the “Green” and
“Yellow” leads on the bulb socket
connector. OUT OF SPECIFICATION

MEETS SPECIFICATION

The wiring circuit from the main switch to the

This circuit is not faulty.
bulb socket connector is faulty, repair it.

- 303 -
 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

2. If the taillights fail to come on:

(1). Bulb and bulb socket

• Check the bulb and bulb socket for

NO CONTINUITY
continuity.
CONTINUITY

Replace the bulb and/or bulb socket.

(2) . Voltage

• Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the

tail/brake light couplers.
Tester (+) lead Blue lead terminal ①
Tester (–) lead Black lead terminal ②

• Turn the main switch to “ON”.

• Turn the light switch to“ ” or “ ”.

• Check the voltage (12 V) of the “Blue” lead OUT OF SPECIFICATION

on the bulb socket connector.
MEETS SPECIFICATION
The wiring circuit from the main switch to the
bulb socket connector is faulty, repair it.
This circuit is not faulty.

- 304 -
 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

SIGNALING SYSTEM
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

- 305 -
 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

TROUBLESHOOTING
IF A BRAKE LIGHT, AN INDICATOR LIGHT, OR THE WARNING LIGHT FAILS TO COME ON:

Procedure
Check:
1. Fuses (main, signaling system) 3. Main switch
2. Battery 4. Wiring connections (the entire signal system)
NOTE:
• Remove the following part(s) before
troubleshooting:
1. Console
2. Front frame
3. Front pedal
• Use special tool(s) for troubleshooting.

1. Fuses (main, signaling system)

NO CONTINUITY
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCH”.
CONTINUITY

Replace the fuse(s).

2. Battery

• Check the battery condition. Refer to

“CHECKING AND CHARGING THE
INCORRECT
BATTERY” in chapter 3.
Open-circuit voltage
12.8 V or more at 20 °C (68 °F)
• Clean the battery terminals.
CORRECT
• Recharge or replace the battery.

3.Main switch
INCORRECT
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCH”.
CORRECT

Replace the main switch

4. Wiring connections

• Check the connections of the entire signal POOR CONNECTION

system. Refer to “CIRCUIT DIAGRAM”.
CORRECT
Properly connect the signal system.
Check the condition of each of the signal
system’s circuits. Refer to “CHECKING THE
SIGNAL SYSTEM”.

- 306 -
 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

CHECKING THE SIGNAL SYSTEM

1. If the brake lights fail to come on:
(1). Bulb and bulb socket

• Check the bulb and bulb socket for NO CONTINUITY

continuity.
CONTINUITY
Replace the bulb and/or bulb socket.

(2). Bake light switch

Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCH”. NO CONTINUITY

CONTINUITY

Replace the brake light switch.

(3). Voltage

• Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the

bulb socket connector.
Tester (+) lead Yellow terminal ①
Tester (–) lead Black terminal ②

• Turn the main switch to “ON”.

• Turn the light switch to “ ” or “ ”.

• Check the voltage (12 V) of the “Yellow” OUT OF SPECIFICATION

lead on the bulb socket connector.
MEETS SPECIFICATION
The wiring circuit from the main switch to the
bulb socket connector is faulty, repair it.
This circuit is not faulty.

- 307 -
 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

2. If the neutral lights fail to come on:

(1). Bulb and bulb socket

• Check the bulb and bulb socket for NO CONTINUITY

continuity.
CONTINUITY
Replace the bulb and/or bulb socket.
(2). Gear position switch

Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCH”. NO CONTINUITY

CONTINUITY

Replace the gear position switch

(3). Voltage
• Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the
indicator light assembly 2 coupler..

Tester (+) lead Brown terminal ①

Tester (–) lead Sky blue terminal ②

• Turn the main switch to “ON”.

• Check the voltage (12 V) OUT OF SPECIFICATION

MEETS SPECIFICATION
The wiring circuit from the main switch to the
bulb socket connector is faulty, repair it.

This circuit is not faulty.

- 308 -
 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

3. If the parking brake indicator light fails

to come on:
(1). Bulb and bulb socket

• Check the bulb and bulb socket for

NO CONTINUITY
continuity.
CONTINUITY

Replace the bulb and/or bulb socket.

(2). Parking brake switch

Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCH”. NO CONTINUITY

CONTINUITY

Replace the parking brake switch

(3). Voltage

• Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the

indicator light assembly 2 coupler.

Tester (+) lead Brown terminal ①

Tester (–) lead Blue/Red terminal ②

• Turn the main switch to “ON”. OUT OF SPECIFICATION

• Check the voltage (12 V)

MEETS SPECIFICATION The wiring circuit from the main switch to the
bulb socket connector is faulty, repair it.

This circuit is not faulty.

- 309 -
 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

4. If the reverse indicator light fails to come on:

(1). Bulb and bulb socket

• Check the bulb and bulb socket for NO CONTINUITY

continuity.
CONTINUITY
Replace the bulb and/or bulb socket.

(2). Reverse switch

NO CONTINUITY
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCH”.
CONTINUITY

Replace the Reverse switch

(3). Voltage

• Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the

indicator light assembly 2 coupler.

Tester (+) lead Brown terminal ①

Tester (–) lead Green/Blue terminal ②
OUT OF SPECIFICATION
• Turn the main switch to “ON”.
• Check the voltage (12 V)

MEETS SPECIFICATION The wiring circuit from the main switch to the
bulb socket connector is faulty, repair it.

Replace the C.D.I. unit.

- 310 -
 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

5. If the coolant temperature warning light does not come on when the main switch to “ON”, or
if the coolant temperature warning light does not come on when the temperature is high
(more than 117 ~ 123 °C (242.6 ~ 253.4 °F):
(1). Bulb and bulb socket
NO CONTINUITY
• Check the bulb and bulb socket for
continuity.
CONTINUITY
Replace the bulb and/or bulb socket.

(2). Thermo switch 1

• Remove the thermo switch 1 from the

cylinder head.
• Connect the pocket tester (Ω × 1) to the
thermo switch 1 ①.
• Immerse the thermo switch 1 in coolant ②.
• Check the thermo switch 1 for continuity.
While heating the coolant use a thermometer
③ to record the temperatures.
A The thermo switch 1 circuit is open and the
□
coolant temperature warning light is off.
B The thermo switch 1 circuit is closed and
□
the coolant temperature warning light is on.
Test Coolant
Continuity
step temperature
Less than 120 ± 3 °C
1 No
(248 ± 5.4 °F)
More than 120 ± 3 °C
2 Yes
(248 ± 5.4 °F)
More than 113 °C
3 Yes
(235.4 °F)
Less than 113 °C
4 No
(235.4 °F)
Test steps 1 & 2: Heating phase
Test steps 3 & 4: Cooling phase

WARNING：
Handle the thermo switch 1 with special
care. BAD CONDITION
Never subject it to a strong shock or allow
it to be dropped. Should it be dropped, it
must be replaced.
Replace the thermo switch 1
GOOD CONDITION

- 311 -
 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

(3). Voltage

• Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the

indicator light assembly 1 coupler.

Tester (+) lead Brown terminal ①

Tester (–) lead White/Blue terminal ②

• Turn the main switch to “ON”. OUT OF SPECIFICATION

• Check the voltage (12 V).

The wiring circuit from the main switch to the

bulb socket connector is faulty, repair it.

- 312 -
 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

6. If the differential gear lock indicator light fails to come on:

(1). Bulb and bulb socket

NO CONTINUITY
• Check the bulb and bulb socket for
continuity.
CONTINUITY
Replace the bulb and/or bulb socket.

(2). Differential gear lock indicator light relay

• Remove the differential gear lock indicator

light relay from the wire harness.
• Connect the pocket tester (Ω × 1) and the
battery (12 V) to the differential gear lock
indicator light relay terminals.
• Check the differential gear lock indicator
light relay for continuity as follows.
Tester (+) lead Brown /Red
terminal ①
Continuity
Tester(–)lead Brown /
Black Terminal ②
Battery(+)terminal Brown NO CONTINUITY
/Red terminal ①
Battery (–)terminal Brown /
Black Terminal ② No Replace the differential gear lock indicator
Tester(+) lead Black continuity light relay.
Terminal ③
Tester(–)lead Black/ Red
terminal ④
CONTINUITY

(3). Four-wheel drive switch

NO CONTINUITY
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCH”.
CONTINUITY

Replace the gear motor.

- 313 -
 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

(4).Voltage

• Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the

indicator light assembly 1 coupler.

Tester (+) lead Brown terminal ①

Tester (–) lead White / Black terminal ②

OUT OF SPECIFICATION
• Turn the main switch to “ON”.
• Check the voltage (12 V).
MEETS SPECIFICATION
The wiring circuit from the main switch to the
bulb socket connector is faulty, repair it.
This circuit is not faulty.

- 314 -
 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

7. If the four-wheel drive indicator light fails to come on:

(1). Bulb and bulb socket

NO CONTINUITY
• Check the bulb and bulb socket for
continuity.
CONTINUITY
Replace the bulb and/or bulb socket.

(2). four-wheel drive indicator light relay

• Remove the four-wheel drive indicator light

relay from the wire harness.
• Connect the pocket tester (Ω × 1) and the
battery (12 V) to the four-wheel drive
indicator light relay terminals.
• Check the four-wheel drive indicator light
relay for continuity as follows.
Tester (+) lead Blue / Black
terminal ③
Continuity
Tester(–) lead Black
Terminal ①
Battery(+) terminal Blue / NO CONTINUITY
Black terminal ③
Battery(–) terminal Black
Terminal ① No
Replace the four-wheel drive indicator light
Tester (–)lead White/ Black continuity
relay.
terminal ④
Tester(+) lead Black
terminal ②
CONTINUITY

(3). Four-wheel drive switch

NO CONTINUITY
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCH”.
CONTINUITY
Replace the gear motor.

- 315 -
 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

(4).Voltage

• Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the

indicator light assembly 1 coupler.

Tester (+) lead Brown terminal ①

Tester (–) lead Black /Red terminal ②
OUT OF SPECIFICATION
• Turn the main switch to “ON”.
• Check the voltage (12 V)
MEETS SPECIFICATION The wiring circuit from the main switch to the
bulb socket connector is faulty, repair it.

This circuit is not faulty.

- 316 -
 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

COOLING SYSTEM
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

Switch Circuit breaker

Temperature
control switch

Fan motor
Battery

- 317 -
 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

TROUBLESHOOTING
IF THE FAN MOTOR DOES NOT MOVE:

Procedure
Check:
1. Fuse (main) 5. Thermo switch 3
2. Battery 6. Wiring connection(the entire cooling system)
3. Main switch
4. Radiator fan motor

NOTE:
• Remove the following part(s) before
troubleshooting.
1. Console
2. Front frame
3. Front pedal
• Use special tool(s) for troubleshooting.

1. Fuse (main)
NO CONTINUITY
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCH”.

CONTINUITY

Replace the fuse.

2. Battery

• Check the battery condition. Refer to

“CHECKING AND CHARGING THE
BATTERY” in chapter 3。
Open-circuit voltage: INCORRECT
12.8 V or more at 20 °C (68 °F)
CORRECT

• Clean the battery terminals.

• Recharge or replace the battery
3. Main switch
INCORRECT
Refer to “CHECKING THE SWITCH”.
CORRECT

Replace the main switch.

- 318 -
 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

4.Radiator fan motor

• Disconnect the radiator fan motor coupler.

• Connect the battery (12 V) as shown.
Battery (+) lead Blue terminal ①
Battery (–) lead Black terminal ②

DOES NOT TURN

• Check the operation of the radiator fan

motor.
Replace the radiator fan motor.

- 319 -
 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

5.Thermo switch 3

• Remove the thermo switch 3 from the

radiator.
• Connect the pocket tester (Ω × 1) to the
thermo switch 3 ①.
• Immerse the thermo switch 3 in coolant ②.
• Check the thermo switch 3 for continuity.
While heating the coolant use a thermometer
③ to record the temperatures.
A The thermo switch 3 circuit is closed.
□
B The thermo switch 3 circuit is open.
□
Test Coolant
Continuity
step temperature
Less than 75±3 °C
1 No
(167 ± 5.4 °F)
More than 75 ± 3 °C
2 Yes
(167 ± 5.4 °F)
More than 68 °C
3 Yes
(154.4 °F)
Less than 68 °C
4 No
(154.4 °F)
Test steps 1 & 2: Heating phase
Test steps 3 & 4: Cooling phase
WARNING：
Handle the thermo switch 3 with special
care.
Never subject it to a strong shock or allow
it to be dropped. Should it be dropped, it
must be replaced.
BAD CONDITION
Thermo switch 3
28 Nm (2.8 m · kg, 20 ft · lb)
GOOD CONDITION
Replace the thermo switch 3

6. Wiring connection
• Check the connections of the entire starting POOR CONNECTION
system. Refer to “CIRCUIT DIAGRAM”
CORRECT
Properly connect the cooling system.

This circuit is not faulty.

- 320 -
 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

2WD/4WD SELECTING SYSTEM

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

- 321 -
 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

TROUBLESHOOTING
1. Check if the 2/4WD switch is working.
a. Turn on the switch, put the gear to position N; keep front and rear wheel off the ground , and then
roll the front wheel to see if the rear wheel is moving together with it or if it is rotatable.
b. After the actions above being done, and the wheels are rotatable, please check the electricity with
multimeter, if has no electricity, please check the fuse.

2. Check if the rear differential is working.

a. Check the sound. When the switch is turned on, the magneto valve will make s sound ‘TA’ to
show that it is working and the rear wheel won’t be able to rotatable at the same direction.
b. If no sound is made, check if the controller of magnetic valve has a output of 12V electricity, and
check if the magnetic valve has a input of 12V electricity,if it has the input, it means the valve doesn't
work, please change for a new one ; if not , please check if the input end of controller has a input, if it
has, change for a new controller, if not , check the fuse.

- 322 -
 ENGINE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

INTRODUCTION
EMS (Engine Management System)
EMS is a self contained set of components including a custom built computer and sensors and
actuators which control the operation of an engine by monitoring the engine speed, load and
temperature and providing the ignition spark at the right time for the prevailing conditions and
metering the fuel to the engine in the exact quantity required.

Typical Components Of EMS

1. Electronic Control Unit

2. Multec 3.5 Injectors
3.Throttle Body Assembly(with stepper motor)
4. Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor
5. Intake Air Pressure and Temperature Sensor

- 323 -
 ENGINE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
6. Oxygen Sensor
7. Ignition Coil
8. Fuel Pump Module

Layout of EMS Components

Legend:
Dotted line indicates inputs

Solid line indicates outputs

COMPONENTS OF EMS
Electronic Control Unit
1．Description & Working Principle
The ECU continuously monitors the operating conditions of the engine through the system
sensors. It also provides the necessary computation, adaptability, and output control in order to
minimize the tailpipe emissions and fuel consumption, while optimizing vehicle drivability for all
operating conditions. The ECU also provides diagnosis when system malfunctions occur.

2．Handling – DOs & DONTs

- 324 -
 ENGINE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
ECU Handing
ACTION REASON
DO NOT: Place the ECU close to the exhaust High temperature might reduce the life of the
pipe or Engine when removed ECU and also can damage the ECU
DO NOT: Place the ECU close to or pour ECU is susceptible to water and liquids
water, oil or any other liquids.
DO NOT: Allow mud or other debris to Having mud or debris accumulated on the
accumulate on the surface of the ECU ECU casing reduces its heat dissipation
efficiency.
DO NOT: Apply any voltage relative to any Drastically affects the performance of the
point to the ECU ECU and may lead to ECU damage
DO NOT: Clean ECU with any solvent or any Can damage the housing of the ECU
corrosive liquid
DO: Take extreme care that water droplets or ECU connectors can get short and may
excess moisture should not fall on ECU lead to ECU damage
connectors
DO: Clean the ECU with a moist cloth and Prevents ECU damage
keep it dry

3．Installation requirements
The ECU shall be mounted using M5 machined screws with a torque of 3.9Nm ± 10%. The
mounting surface should also be flat to avoid subjecting the base plate to unnecessary force and
warping the PCB.

4．Maintenance service and Repair

ECU is a non-serviceable part. Once there are problems, it’s important to first determine if the
problem is caused by software/calibration. If it is caused by software/calibration, please refer to
software/calibration reflashing procedure. In the event of ECU hardware failure or malfunction
(during warranty period only) the ECU should be sent back to the vehicle manufacturer giving
complete details of the ECU Part No, Serial number, Vehicle Model & Make, manufacturing Date,
Total kms run on the vehicle, Location of use, Vehicle No, Date of return.

Multec 3.5 Injectors

1．Description and Working Principle
The Multec 3.5 Fuel Injector is an electromechanical device. A magnetic field is generated as
voltage is applied to the solenoid coil. The resulting magnetic force lifts the core assembly,
overcoming manifold vacuum, spring force, and fuel pressure, allowing fuel to pass through the ball
and seat interface to the director. As the fuel passes through the director, an atomized spray is
developed. The injector closes when the voltage is removed, cutting off the fuel flow.

- 325 -
 ENGINE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
2．Handling - DOs & DONTs

3.5 FUEL INJECTOR HANDLING

ACTION REASON
DO NOT: Re-use injector seal rings if at all Leakage.
possible. If no other choice exists, take
extra care in inspecting the seal rings for
damage.
DO NOT: Dip injector tips into lubricants. Can plug injector spray orifices.
DO NOT: Cycle injector repeatedly without Damage to internal mechanical components.
fuel pressure.
DO NOT: Pulse (actuate) a suspected high Can dislodge internal contamination if
leak rate injector (leak >50 sccm air). present and preclude root cause analysis.
DO NOT: Allow water to enter fuel system Can damage injectors.
from air lines, etc. during leak checks.
DO NOT: Contact or apply load to the Apply load to 45 deg angle on nylon over
injector tip for installation. mold see
DO NOT: Pound injectors into manifold Can damage injectors or seal rings.
during assembly to engine.
DO NOT: Apply excessive side loads to May cause loss of electrical continuity.
electrical connectors.
DO NOT: Use any dropped unit. Internal damage may have occurred.
DONOT:Store injectors, rails, or External contamination can damage the
subassemblies including engines on which injector electrically and/or mechanically.
the injectors have been installed in an
unprotected environment.
DO NOT: Use the injector as a handle. Do not use the injector to lift assemblies
DO NOT: Rack, stage, or handle parts in a Damage will occur.
manner that allows contact between parts.
DO NOT: Remove packing in a way that Damage could occur due ton contact
allows contact between parts. between parts.
DO NOT: Tap on fuel injectors to correct any Can damage injector.
malfunction.
DO NOT: Replace the injector with other Will severely affect the performance of the
part number not recommended for this injector
application
DO: Take extra care when installing new Prevent tearing seal ring during installation.
fuel seal ring over injector inlet flange.

- 326 -
 ENGINE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
DO: Use proper lubricants on seal ring Avoid damage to seal ring during installation.
surfaces to install injector in engine. Avoid contamination at seal.
Minimize time between applying lubricant
and inserting injector / rail.
DO: Pulse (actuate) stuck closed or tip-leak To verify the injector failure
suspected injector (Actuate consists of one
pulse <5 sec duration at 9 to 15V).
DO: Pulse (actuate) injectors prior to a dry Injector valves may not reseat without fuel
fuel system leak test at engine/vehicle after shipping and handling resulting in false
assembly to reseat injector valves. leakage.
DO: Avoid any liquid contamination in the Coil could short circuit.
injector area.
DO: Use care during connection of Avoid terminal damage.
harness to injector.
DO: Use recommended terminal lubricant Minimize potential for terminal fretting
on mating connector. corrosion.
DO: Return any dropped, damaged, or Ensure fast and correct diagnosis of root
suspect material with a tag that describes cause.
the problem.

3. Installation guidelines
Follow these guidelines to prevent damage to the injector and its electrical interface during the
replacement or re-installation process.
• Lubrication: Apply a light coating of lubricant to the lower injector seal ring. ISO 10 light
mineral oil or equivalent is recommended.
• The preferred technique is to apply the lubricant to the sockets the injectors are being
installed into, rather than directly to the seal ring itself. This will help minimize the
possibility of injector contamination.
• Avoid applying lubricant over the director plate holes – this may restrict injector flow. Do
not dip the injector tip in lubricant.
• Multec 3.5 injectors come from the factory with the seal rings attached. The re-use of seal
rings is not preferred when replacing an injector. If an injector is to be re-used, and no new
seal rings are available, take care to inspect each seal ring for signs of damage. Even
minor defects in the seal ring can lead to leakage. Take extra care in installing seal ring
over flange of injector inlet.
• Carefully installing the harness connector will prevent terminal damage. Listen for a
positive audible click from the connector retention device — this ensures that it is fully
engaged. Shut off ignition.
• Disconnect negative battery cable to avoid possible fuel discharge if an accidental attempt
is made to start the engine.
• Disconnect the electrical connector from the injector wiring harness.
• Relieve fuel pressure
• Remove the retaining clip from the fuel injector.

- 327 -
 ENGINE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
• Remove the fuel line connection from the injector
• Carefully clean debris from the interface surfaces. Do not damage seal mating surfaces.
• Remove the injector from the manifold
• Apply a light coating of a lubricant to both the upper and lower injector seal ring of the
replacement injector.
• Install the new injector into the manifold. Check that the injector is installed in the original
orientation to maintain proper spray targeting, and that the retaining clip is properly seated
on the injector and the fuel line
• Install the retaining clip after connecting the fuel line
• Tighten the injector mounting to the desired torque as mentioned in the manufacturer
manual
• Tighten the fuel line
• Re-install the injector electrical connector
• Check for fuel leaks with the key “on” and the engine “off”
• Start engine and verify proper operation.
• or spray pattern, do not rotate the injector in the fuel rail assembly to install the injector
electrical connector. This may dislodge the retaining clip, and result in improper spray
orientation

4．Replacement Techniques

WARNING:
The injector and all associated hardware may be extremely hot.
• Shut off ignition.
• Disconnect negative battery cable to avoid possible fuel discharge if an accidental attempt
is made to start the engine.
• Disconnect the electrical connector from the injector wiring harness.
• Relieve fuel pressure
• Remove the retaining clip from the fuel injector.
• Remove the fuel line connection from the injector
• Carefully clean debris from the interface surfaces. Do not damage seal mating surfaces.
• Remove the injector from the manifold
• Apply a light coating of a lubricant to both the upper and lower injector seal ring of the
replacement injector.
• Install the new injector into the manifold. Check that the injector is installed in the original
orientation to maintain proper spray targeting, and that the retaining clip is properly seated
on the injector and the fuel line
• Install the retaining clip after connecting the fuel line
• Tighten the injector mounting to the desired torque as mentioned in the manufacturer
manual
• Tighten the fuel line
• Re-install the injector electrical connector
• Check for fuel leaks with the key “on” and the engine “off”
• Start engine and verify proper operation.

- 328 -
 ENGINE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
5．Plugging
Fuel deposits cause plugging resulting in flow shifts over the life of the injector. Fuel varnish or
gumming, a type of injector deposit, is created when certain types of fuel are heated by high
injector tip temperatures at soak (no fuel flow). Deposit build up in the director holes causes
the flow shifts
• Plugging can cause flow restrictions, frictional changes and the collection of other particles
attracted by the tacky surface. The flow restrictions can degrade emissions and drivability.
• Other fuel and environmental conditions may cause crystal or corrosion growth in the
injector and cause a flow shift.
• Oxidation stability of the gasoline affects the potential for deposit formation and must be
controlled by the fuel supplier.
• Increased levels of detergent additives reduce the rate of injector plugging.
• Incase of plugging of injector follow the injector cleaning procedure mentioned in the section
below

6．Cleaning Procedure
• Electrically disable the fuel pump by removing the fuel pump connection.
• Relieve the fuel pressure in the system and disconnect the fuel connection at the injector.
Plug the fuel feed line.
• Injector cleaner with the specific ratio of the cleaner and gasoline to be mixed in the Injector
cleaning tank.
• Connect the injector-cleaning tank to injector in the vehicle.
• Pressurize the injector-cleaning tank to system pressure.
• Start and idle the engine for 15- 20 minutes.
• Disconnect the injector-cleaning tank from the system and install the fuel pump connections.
Connect the fuel feed line to injector.
• Start and idle the vehicle for an additional 2 minutes to ensure the residual injector cleaner
is flushed from system.

Throttle Body Assembly(with stepper motor)

1．Description and Working Principle
The Throttle Body Assembly is an interactive system comprised of the following
subsystems: the main casting body, bearing system, shaft and valve system, return spring
system, cable interface system, throttle position sensing system, and the bypass air control
system. The subsystems interact and support each other to provide all the functional
requirements, which are mentioned below -
• Control intake air flow
• Control idle air flow
• Sense throttle position - Provide position feedback to Engine Controller
• Provide reactionary force to the throttle

- 329 -
 ENGINE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
2．Handling – DOs and DONTs

THROTTLE BODY ASSEMBLY HANDLING

ACTION REASON
DO: Use care during assembly of harness to throttle
Avoid terminal damage.
body.
DO: Avoid any liquid contamination in the throttle
Ensure proper operation.
body area.
DO: Unload and install units one at a time from
Damage may be done to critical components.
packing trays.
DO: Return any dropped, damaged, or suspect
Ensure fast and correct diagnosis of root
material with a tag that describes the problem.
(Only warranty cases)
DO: Remove and discard protective caps just before Protects system from contamination, which
assembling mating components. can prevent proper operation.
DO: clean the by pass passage after removing
To ensure good idle stability
bottom cover
Internal damage may have occurred or
DO NOT: Use any dropped or impacted unit.
emissions settings may have been upset.

DO NOT: Store units without protective caps in place. Contamination may impair correct operation.

DO NOT: Ship or store near saltwater without Corrosion buildup may impact proper
protection. operation.
DO NOT: Exposed to environmental conditions
Corrosion buildup may impact proper
(Moisture) prior to complete vehicle
operation.
installation.
DO NOT: Apply any voltage other than system
Damage could occur.
voltage for testing.
DO NOT: Apply excessive band clamp loading Damage could occur.
DO NOT: Remove packing in a way that allows Minimum air leakage could be affected
contact between parts. and/or other damage could occur.
DO NOT: Release the throttle cam abruptly from any
position without the throttle linkage Damage could occur.
attached.
DO NOT: Let the by pass holes be blocked by dirt or
This could effect idle stability
foreign particles.
DO NOT: Rake, stage, or handle parts in a manner
Damage will occur.
that allows contact between parts.
3．Throttle Body Removal
• Disconnect negative terminal of the battery
• Disconnect electric lead wire of throttle position sensor coupler, stepper motor coupler and
MAP/MAT sensor coupler ( if this sensor is mounted on the throttle body)
• Disconnect accelerator cable from throttle body

- 330 -
 ENGINE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
• Remove air cleaner outlet hose and throttle body outlet hose

4．Cleaning Procedure
If there is cover on the bottom, it may be removed and cleaned using carburetor cleaner (3M
make recommended). Once the throttle body cover is removed, spray the throttle-body cleaner
inside the shipping air passage, and use the brushes to gently dislodge the dirt, gum and
varnish that are present. Do not let the bye pass holes be blocked by dirt or foreign particles.

5．Throttle Body Installation

• Reverse the procedure for installation noting the following:
• Adjust accelerator cable play
• Check to ensure that all removed parts are back in place.Reinstall any necessary part which
have not been reinstalled

6．Precautions
• Do not submerge TPS in any cleaning fluid.
• Always open the throttle valve using the throttle cable or lever.
• Do not hold the valve at opening position by inserting tools or any sticks into the bore. The
valve may be warped and the bore may be scratched. This type of damage may keep the
throttle from opening easily or fully closing.

Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor

1．Description and Working Principle
This sensor is used in water cooled engines. It provides a resistance that varies as a function of
temperature within prescribed tolerance limits. The sensor has a negative temperature
coefficient of resistance. This is a non-serviceable part.

2．Installation Requirements
• Dynamic Torque Requirement: The sensor shall be hand into the application and then
driven by a driver with a maximum no load speed of 400 rpm or installed to the desired
torque by a hand torque wrench (5/8” hex). The recommended installation torque is:
Minimum: 20 N·m
Maximum: 25 N·m
• Static Torque Requirement: The torque required to remove the sensor from the mating hole
shall be within 200% of the installation torque mentioned above.

3．Sample Cleaning
• When necessary the samples may be cleaned in isopropyl alcohol for one minute with
mating connectors in place and then air-dried

Intake Air Pressure and Temperature Sensor

1．Description and Working Principle
- 331 -
 ENGINE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
This sensor has two functions. The first is the intake manifold air temperature, it provides a
resistance that varies as a function of temperature within prescribed tolerance limits. The
second is the intake manifold air pressure; it provides a voltage varies as the intake air
pressure.

2．Sample Cleaning
• When necessary the samples may be cleaned in isopropyl alcohol or gasoline for one
minute with mating connectors in place and then air-dried

Oxygen Sensor
1．Description and Working Principle
This sensor is a device for monitoring the residual oxygen in the exhaust of an internal
combustion engine. It consists of the wide range sensor and stoichiometric sensor. Usually we
use stoichiometric sensor on the small engine. It is the feedback element for engine closed
loop control.

2．Installation Requirements
• Mounting Angle with Level: ≥10 degree
• Tightening Torque Requirement: 40-60 Nm

Ignition Coil
1．Description and Working Principle
This coil provides energy to the spark plug in the combustion chamber. The coil itself doesn’t
have a driver. The high voltage tower of the coil is connected to the spark plug using a high
voltage cable assembly. This is a non-serviceable component.

2．Installation requirements
• The vehicle frame provides the mounting surface and mounting holes.
• Mount coil close to the spark plug and keep the plug wire length very short (less than 6 “).
• Mount coil away from any pick coil device. Especially, a VR type Crank / Cam sensor. Keep
a Min distance of 150 mm (around 6”) between coil and any VR sensor device.
• Never route the coil C- wire with the same bundle as the Crank sensor wires. There is
around 200 V peak potential between C- wire and engine ground. This voltage potential
could cause a noise on sensor cables.

3．DOs and DONTs

Ignition Coil Handing
Action Reason
DO NOT: Install the low voltage connectors with This might cause an unwanted secondary firing,
the power applied possibly leading to personal injury

- 332 -
 ENGINE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
DO NOT: Use a screw driver to asset in removing It is possible to damage a secondary lead in
secondary boots from the secondary tower. Use such a manner that creates an electrical path to
tools designed for secondary removal. outside the system permitting improper system
operation misfire, or even possible personal
injury if arcing occurs.
DO NOT: Use parts that have been dropped or Damaged components can lead to premature
display physical damage failure.
DO NOT: Scratch or apply any non approved This can jeopardize the seal integrity of the
material to the surface of the high voltage tower mating surfaces which in turn can create a
which mates with the high voltage secondary secondary high voltage leak path.
leads.
DO NOT: Strike any part of the ignition system This can lead to physical damage which can
with a tool or other object. cause a system malfunction or failure.
DO NOT: Permit paint or other sprayed materials Insulating type sprays can create a high
to be sprayed onto the electrical connectors. resistance or open connection. And, a
conductive type spray can create an electrical
short condition.
DO NOT: Support the ignition system by the These leads are not designed to support the
wiring harness or plug wire. weight of the ignition system. It can create a
poor electrical connection Or become
disconnected allowing the system to fall and be
subjected to physical damage
DO NOT: Pierce or probe the secondary This creates an electrical path to outside the
leads. system permitting improper system operation,
misfire, or even possible personal injury if arcing
occurs.
DO NOT: Operate without the spark plug If a technician or mechanic comes in contact
attached. with the high voltage generated during
operation, personal injury may occur. Or, if the
engine is operated under this condition,
unburned fuel may fill the converter area
creating a potential hazard
DO NOT: Share ignition component wiring with This prevents electrical cross talking between
other components, Dedicated wiring is required. components which can lead to component
malfunction.
DO NOT: Apply voltage to the ignition system This can cause reduced performance or an
other than vehicle system voltage for testing electrical malfunction of the ignition system.
purposes.
DO NOT: Use high impact tools to apply the spark Damage to the coil tower, secondary boot, or
plug boot to the ignition secondary towers. mating connection surfaces might occur.
Installation of the high voltage secondary leads
by hand is preferred.

- 333 -
 ENGINE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
DO: Install the secondary leads before In the event the low voltage connection has
connecting the primary leads. been made and the power applied, unwanted
secondary output might occur possibly resulting
in injury, damage the ignition component, and
test equipment
DO: Take care when working around the ignition The high voltage produced by the coil
system. secondary circuit can cause personal injury
and/or damage test equipment
DO: Proper handling and shipping methods need Damaged components can lead to premature
to be in place to reduce the risk of damage due to failure.
impact, moisture, or contamination
DO: Avoid unnecessary disconnecting and The electrical connections are not designed for
connecting of the electrical components. repeated connection and disconnection.
DO: Insure the low voltage connectors are This prevents intermittent electrical connections
entirely seated and the locking mechanism is leading to an improper ignition system
engaged. operation.
DO: Use approved connector breakouts when Connector and/or component damage may
testing the ignition system. occur.
DO: Insure the appropriate seals are included in Liquid intrusion into the terminal connection
the connector system. area might occur causing an electrical
intermittent or short condition. In the event of
severe terminal corrosion, an open condition
might occur.
DO: Operate with gasoline based internal Other fuels or combustion designs may require
combustion engines. additional design considerations.
DO:The power feed line should be fused. This could protect the system in the event of an
electrical short
DO: The module heat sink and back plate must The high level of voltage and current which the
not be used as a connection point when jump module could be subjected to, could cause
starting the engine module performance degradation or failure.
DO: Connection of the module back plate to This greatly reduce potential ground loops and
vehicle ground is desirable whenever possible acts as a heat transfer source from the module.
DO: The ignition system ground wire should be This would greatly reduce the possible of
kept as short as possible. And, when permissible, unwanted electrical ground loops.
should be grounded at the same engine block
position as the engine controller
DO: The electrical wiring to the ignition system Helps prevent electrical intermittent, open or
should be routed so that the conductors are shorted operating conditions.
protected from excessive heat, damage, and
wear.
DO: Ignition secondary leads should not be Voltage spikes can be transmitted from the
routed with the ignition primary harness or any secondary cables into other leads which are in
other electrical harness. close. This could create a component
performance degradation or failure condition
- 334 -
 ENGINE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
DO: Spark plug wires(secondary leads) & primary - Spark plug wires carry very high voltage
wiring: (30,000 volt). If the secondary lead loses its
- must not contact sharp surface dielectric characteristics thru being nicked, cut ,
- must not be under tension between fixed points chaffed, then an arc thru to a near by ground
- must be clear of moving parts (belts, fan, etc…) could take place. This kind of condition could
- must be protected from or kept at least 125 mm lead to misfire, no start, or premature failure of
away from radiant heat source exceeding 400 F. ignition system.
- must be protected from environmental damage
(dirt, splash, oils, fluids, etc….)
- must be retained, secured or insulated to
prevent pinching, mis-routing, rattles, and
squeaks
DO: Not all fasteners are designed for repeat use. Adequate retention force might not be achieved
Beware of fastener specifications. All harnesses if the fastener is not designed to be reused.
should be supported within 6" of a mating Mating connections are not designed to support
connection. the weight of the harness assembly.

DO: For removing spark plugs follow the following To remove spark plugs from Aluminum heads,
steps: allow the engine to cool. The heat of the engine,
1- Grasp the spark plug boot and gently in combination with a spark plug that is still hot,
2- rotate 90°; and then pull the spark plug boot may cause the spark plug threads to strip the
and cable away from the spark plug cylinder head upon removal
3- Before removing spark plug, brush or air blast Use goggles to protect eyes from dirt when
dirt away from the well areas applying compressed air to spark plug wells
4- Use correct size deep socket wrench to
loosen each spark plug one or two turns
DO: Cleaning a spark plug could be done as -Cleaning a spark plug will reduce the voltage
follow: required for an electrical arc(spark) across the
1- wipe all spark plug surfaces clean….remove electrodes
oil, water, dirt and moist residues. -Cleaning & re-gapping will not restore a used
2- If the firing end of spark plug has oily or wet spark plug to a new condition. It may be more
deposit, brush the spark plug in an approved, economical and efficient to replace used spark
non-flammable and non-toxic solvent. Then plugs with new plugs instead of cleaning.
dry the spark plug thoroughly with -Sooted plugs should be replaced
compressed air -Do not cool by using water or any liquid
3- Use a propane torch to dry wet-fuel fouled -Clean threads permit easier installation and
plugs. Allow the torch flame to enter up the proper seating which will maximize transfer heat
center electrode insulator. Allow plug to cool away from the plug
down
4- If the spark plug threads have carbon & scale
deposits, clean with wire brush, taking care
not to injure the electrode or the
insulator tip

- 335 -
 ENGINE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
DO: Regap spark plugs to the exact -Too wide a gap could cause the plug to
measurement specified by the engine misfire(higher required ignition voltage).
manufacturer to keep the best fuel economy and -Too narrow of a gap could affect idle stability
proper engine performance -A flat gauge can’t accurately measure the spark
- Use round wire-type gauge for an accurate plug on used plugs
measure of gap on all used spark plugs
- when gapping a spark plug only the side
electrode is moved. The center electrode must
not be moved
DO: When replacing spark plugs with new ones, -Higher heat range plug(hotter plug) could lead
always use equivalent plugs with same heat to pre-ignition & possible piston damage
range, thread, size, etc…. -Lower heat range (colder plug) could lead to
cold fouling & emission problem

DO: For installing spark plugs follow the following -If the thread is damage, it prevents a good heat
steps: transform from the shell to the cylinder head
1- make sure the cylinder head threads and -Do not use any type of anti-seize compound on
spark plug threads are clean. Make sure the spark plug threads. Doing this will decrease the
spark plug thread is free of dings and burrs. If amount of friction between the threads. The
necessary, use a thread chaser and seat result of the lowered friction is that when the
cleaning tool. spark plug is torqued to the proper specification,
2- Make sure the spark plug gasket seat is the spark plug is turned too far into the cylinder
clean, then thread the gasket to fit flush head. This increases the likelihood of pulling or
against the gasket seat. Tapered seat plugs stripping the threads in the cylinder head
do not require gaskets -Over-tightening of a spark plug can cause
3- Screw the spark plugs finger-tight into the stretching of the spark plug shell and could
cylinder head. Then, use a torque wrench to allow blowby to pass thru the gasket seal
tighten spark plugs following manufacturer’s between the shell and insulator. Over-tightening
recommendation). also results in extremely difficult removal
Torque is different for various plug type & cylinder
head material

Fuel Pump Module

1．Description and Working Principle
Fuel Pump Module supplies fuel to engine at system pressure. Fuel Pump Module is
mounted to fuel tank at bottom and supplies fuel to engine through hoses.
Fuel Pump module consists of Fuel Pump to generate the fuel flow and pressure regulator to
regulate the fuel pressure.
Fuel Pump
When power is supplied to fuel pump, motor in pump assembly rotates the impeller. Impeller in
turn draws the fuel from strainer and pumps the flow to generate the system pressure.
Pressure Regulator

- 336 -
 ENGINE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Pressure Regulator is a diaphragm type mechanical device. Fuel flow from filter
enters in the inlet of pressure regulator. Pressure regulator regulates the fuel
pressure at a set pressure by releasing the excessive fuel flow to fuel tank.

2．Service Procedure:
Precautions:
Before attempting any service on fuel system, following cautions should be always followed for
personal safety and to avoid system damages.
• Disconnect negative cable at battery.
• DO NOT smoke, and place ‘No SMOKING” sign near work area
• Make sure to have fire extinguisher handy.
• Make sure to perform work in well ventilated area and away from any open fire/flames.
• Wear Safety glasses
• To relieve fuel vapor pressure in fuel tank, remove fuel filler cap fuel filler neck and then
reinstall it.
• As fuel lines are at high pressures when the engine is stopped, loosening or disconnecting
fuel line will cause dangerous spout of fuel. Before loosening/ disconnecting fuel lines,
please follow the “Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure” described in this section.
• Small amount of fuel may drip after the fuel lines are disconnected. In order to reduce the
risk of personal injury, cover the pipe/ hose ends with suitable blind with no rust or
contamination.
• After servicing, make sure that the fuel hoses and clamps are connected according to the
hose fitment instructions given in vehicle instruction manual.
• After servicing, please follow the ‘Fuel Leakage Check Procedure’ described in this section.
• After servicing make sure to fill at least 3 liters gasoline before pump is primed (ignition key
should be turned on only after ensuring there is minimum 3 liters of fuel in the fuel tank)

Fuel Module Diagnosis:

Step Action Yes No

Switch on Ignition key. Fuel Pump
primes for 3 seconds when the ignition If fuel pump running If fuel pump running
1 key is ON. noise can be heard, go noise can not be
Check for fuel pump running noise for 3 to step 4. heard, go to step 2.
seconds after ignition key is ON.
Disconnect fuel module coupler. Check
Check the electrical
voltage at harness coupler.
2 Go to step 3 circuit from Ignition
to fuel module.
Is the voltage within 10-14V

- 337 -
 ENGINE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Connect 12V DC power supply
1. Check Fuel
(battery) to fuel module. 1. Check electrical
Pump Harness
Make sure that enough fuel available in circuit from fuel
3 integrity
fuel tank to avoid fuel pump running module to ECU
2. Check Fuel
dry.Is the fuel pump running 2. Check ECU
Pump

Check fuel system pressure at Injector

inlet (with a T-joint) while engine is
running in idle condition. Fuel Module Operation
4 Go to Step 5
Normal
Is the pressure between 220 ~
270kPa?
1. Check for leakages
from hoses, hose 1. Clogged Filter
joints 2. Kink/ Blockage
5 Is the Pressure below 220kPa?
2. Check Fuel Pump in Fuel Hoses
3. Check Pressure 3. Check Regulator
Regulator

3．Fuel Module Removal:

• Relieve fuel pressure in fuel lines referring to the ‘Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure’ provided
in this section.
• Disconnect negative cable at battery.
• Disconnect fuel module wire coupler.
• Drain the fuel in fuel tank thru fuel filler with help of hand pump (siphon). Collect the fuel in
approved container for contamination and safety.
• Disconnect the fuel hoses from fuel module by using standard tools
• Remove the fuel tank from vehicle.
• Place the fuel tank with bottom up condition. Care to be taken not to cause any scratches/
damages on fuel tank.
• Open the fuel module mounting bolts.
• Take out fuel module assembly from fuel tank with care
• Care to be taken not to damage the strainer while removing fuel module from tank.

4. Fuel Module Installation:

• Replace the fuel module gasket in fuel module assembly with a new one. Old/ used gaskets
can cause leakages.
• Fold strainer towards fuel pump and insert fuel module in tank opening with care. Care
should be taken not to cause any damages on strainer.

NOTE
Fuel Module Orientation: Fuel module bolts not symmetrical and can be mounted
only in the intended direction. Regulator side should be facing the Fuel Tank rear
side.Make sure that the fuel tank surface at module mounting area is clean and
free of surface defects.
- 338 -
 ENGINE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
• Place the bolts on module cover and tighten the bolts gradually in star pattern sequence to
apply equal compression on gasket. It is shown in figure as below. Bolt Tightening Torque:
3~4 Nm.
Fuel module is installed with special bolts (step bolts). Use designated bolts only. Follow
the tightening torque and tightening sequence instruction.Over torque and
miss-sequence can cause unequal compression of gasket and leakage.
• Install the fuel tank to vehicle.
• Connect for fuel hoses with suitable hose clamps.
• Connect fuel module coupler.
• Follow “Fuel Leakage Check Procedure’ to check any leakage before the engine is started。

Mounting Bolts – Star Tightening Pattern

5. Pressure Regulator Assembly Replacement:

• Remove the regulator retainer from module.
• Apply gradual pull force on retainer to avoid any personal injury due to spring action of
retainer.
• Take out the pressure regulator assembly from module.
• Do not hit/ damage on the regulator dome and crimping portion.
• Lubricate the O-rings in new pressure regulator assembly with recommended lubrication
oils as mentioned in Table no: 3. Lubrication oil is applied only for ease of regulator
assembly.
• Make sure that 2 O-rings (one is bigger diameter the other is smaller diameter) are
assembled in pressure regulator.
• Place the pressure regulator on module at regulator pod. Push the regulator gently in the
pod.
• Do not hit/ damage on the regulator dome and crimping portion. This will disturb the
pressure setting.
• Assemble the retainer on the regulator pod
• Replace the gasket, module with new gasket provided in the kit.

6. Fuel Pressure Relief Procedure:

NOTE
This work must not be done when engine
is hot. If done so, it may cause adverse effect to
catalyst (if equipped)

- 339 -
 ENGINE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
After making sure that engine is cold, relieve fuel pressure as follows.
• Place vehicle gear in ‘Neutral’.
• Disconnect fuel module electrical coupler from vehicle harness.
• Start engine and run till it stops due to lack of fuel. Repeat ignition key ON and OFF for 2 ~ 3
times of about 3 seconds each time to relieve fuel pressure in lines. Fuel Connections are
now safe for servicing.
• Upon the completion of servicing, Connect Fuel Module Connector to Vehicle Harness.

7. Fuel Leakage Check Procedure:

After performing any service on fuel system, check to make sure that there are no fuel leakages
as below.
• Fill about 3 ~ 5 liters of fuel in tank.
• Turn Ignition key to ON position for 3 seconds (to operate fuel pump) and then turn to OFF
position. Repeat this for 3 ~ 4 times to apply fuel pressure in fuel lines.
• In this state, check to see that there are no fuel leakage from any part of fuel system (Fuel
Tank, Hoses, Hose Joints, etc)

8. Handling – DOs and DONTs:

FUEL MODULE HANDLING

ACTION REASON
DO NOT: Drop Fuel Module on Floor Could cause internal damage to Fuel
Pump.
DO NOT: Run Fuel Pump Dry (without fuel Caused internal damage to Fuel Pump
at pump inlet/ strainer) ensure atleast 3
litres of gasoline is present in the fuel tank
DO NOT: Damage the strainer during Contamination enters fuel pump thru
servicing, insertion of fuel module in fuel damaged strainer damages the Fuel
tank Pump
DO NOT: Disassemble Fuel Pump and Warranty void.
regulator internal parts out side Delphi
premises.
DO NOT: Do any adjustments on pressure
regulator and pump except for
replacement.
DO NOT: Use module harness for hold/ Wiring Harness Breakage/ Fuel Pump
carry fuel module. Power disconnection
DO NOT: Pull Wiring Harness in vertical
direction to module cover
DO NOT: Use damaged/ distorted hose Can cause fuel seepage/ leakage.
clamps.

- 340 -
 ENGINE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
DO NOT: Use Fuel Module if the strainer Contamination enters fuel pump thru
with excessive damage/ cut. damaged strainer damages the Fuel
Pump
DO NOT: Use Fuel Pump for draining duel Not intended function of fuel module.
in fuel tank.
DO NOT: Use module mounting bolts for Affects fuel module sealing.
mounting other components.
DO NOT: Damage fuel pump harness Damaged terminals will cause intermittent/
while servicing fuel module. No contact for power supply.
DO NOT: Force hand pump towards fuel To avoid any damages on fuel module.
module while draining fuel from tank.
DO : Ensure that there are no damages to Can cause fuel seepage/ leakage.
fuel pipes while servicing fuel module
DO: Use genuine module gasket only. Spurious gaskets can cause leakages.
DO: Use designated hose clamps. To ensure no leakages/ seepages thru
hose joint.
DO: Clamp fuel module harness to vehicle Clamp provides mechanical support for
chassis wiring harness in vibrations.
DO: Use only standard gasoline for Fuel Module is intended to run in standard
operating vehicle/ module. gasoline. Adulterated fuel can cause fuel
module premature failures which are not
covered under warranty.
DO: Change the fuel filter at recommended Clogged fuel filter will cause restriction in
intervals. fuel flow and can cause flow reduction.
DO: Use fuel filters supplied/ Spurious fuel filters causes damages to
recommended fuel filters only. injector, regulator and fuel pump
performance.
DO: Ensure that the hoses are routed Improper routing, kinks and fouling of
properly and there are no kinks / rubbing hoses with other components causes hose
with other components. damage
DO: Ensure that always sufficient fuel till Avoids Pump running in dry
the strainer height
DO: Replace two O-rings along with For proper functioning of regulator.
replacement/ re-installation of pressure
regulator.
DO: Use care during connection of Avoid terminal damage.
harness to module coupler.
DO: Return any dropped, damaged, or Ensure fast and correct diagnosis of root
suspect material with a tag that describes cause.
the problem.

- 341 -
 ENGINE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

EMS FAULT DIAGNOSIS

EME Fault Diagnosis
When fault comes up, the odometer's clock will turn into a number， which is a fault code, find
out the cause with this numbe;press clock button,then it will turn back to clock mode, and five
second later,the fault code will show again.

Fault code list

System or DTC
DTC Description Related Calibration
Component Number
Manifold Absolute 0107 MAP Circuit Low Voltage or Open KsDGDM_MAP_ShortLow
Pressure Sensor
(MAP) 0108 MAP Circuit High Voltage KsDGDM_MAP_ShortHigh
Intake Air 0112 IAT Circuit Low Voltage KsDGDM_IAT_ShortLow
Temperature Sensor
(IAT) 0113 IAT Circuit High Voltage or Open KsDGDM_IAT_ShortHigh

Coolant/Oil Temperature Sensor

Coolant/Oil Sensor 0117 KsDGDM_CoolantShortLow
Circuit Low Voltage
Coolant/Oil Temperature Sensor
0118 KsDGDM_CoolantShortHigh
Circuit High Voltage or Open
Throttle Position 0122 TPS Circuit Low Voltage or Open KsDGDM_TPS_ShortLow
Sensor (TPS) 0123 TPS Circuit High Voltage KsDGDM_TPS_ShortHigh
0131 O2S 1 Circuit Low Voltage KsDGDM_O2_1_ShortLow
Oxygen Sensor
0132 O2S 1 Circuit High Voltage KsDGDM_O2_1_ShortHigh

Oxygen Sensor 0031 O2S Heater Circuit High Voltage KsDGDM_O2_HeaterShortHigh

Heater 0032 O2S Heater Circuit Low Voltage KsDGDM_O2_HeaterShortLow
0201 Injector 1 Circuit Malfunction KsDGDM_INJ_CYL_A_Fault
Fuel Injector
0202 Injector 2 Circuit Malfunction KsDGDM_INJ_CYL_B_Fault
FPR Coil Circuit Low Voltage or
Fuel Pump Relay 0230 KsDGDM_FPP_CircuitShortLow
Open
(FPR)
0232 FPR Coil Circuit High Voltage KsDGDM_FPP_CircuitShortHigh
Crankshaft
0336 CKP Sensor Noisy Signal KsDGDM_CrankNoisySignal
Position
Sensor (CKP) 0337 CKP Sensor No Signal KsDGDM_CrankNoSignal
Cylinder 1 Ignition Coil
0351 KsDGDM_EST_A_Fault
Malfunction
Ignition Coil
Cylinder 2 Ignition Coil
0352 KsDGDM_EST_B_Fault
Malfunction
Idle Control
0505 Idle Speed Control Error KsDGDM_IdleControl
System

- 342 -
 ENGINE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
0562 System Voltage Low KsDGDM_SysVoltLow
System Voltage
0563 System Voltage High KsDGDM_SysVoltHigh

MIL 0650 MIL Circuit Malfunction KsDGDM_MIL_Circuit

1693 Tachometer Circuit Low Voltage KsDGDM_TAC_Circuit_Low
Tachometer
1694 Tachometer Circuit High Voltage KsDGDM_TAC_Circuit_High
0137 O2S 2 Circuit Low Voltage KsDGDM_O2_2_ShortLow
Oxygen Sensor 2
0138 O2S 2 Circuit High Voltage KsDGDM_O2_2_ShortHigh
Oxygen Sensor 0038 O2S Heater 2 Circuit High Voltage KsDGDM_O2_HeaterShortHigh
Heater 2 0037 O2S Heater 2 Circuit Low Voltage KsDGDM_O2_HeaterShortLow
Vehicle Speed
0500 VSS No Signal KsDGDM_VSS_NoSignal
Sensor
Park Neutral
0850 Park Neutral Switch Error KsDGDM_ParkNeutralSwitch
Switch Diag
0445 CCP short to high KsDGDM_CCP_CircuitShortHigh
CCP
0444 CCP short to low/open KsDGDM_CCP_CircuitShortLow
BLM MaxAdapt 0171 BLM Max Adapt(Kohler Special) KsFDIAG_BLM_MaxAdapt
BLM MinAdapt 0172 BLM Min Adapt(Kohler Special) KsFDIAG_BLM_MinAdapt
PE system Lean P0174 PE syst Lean(Kohler Special) KsFDIAG_PESystLean

- 343 -
 TROUBLESHOOTING

NOTE:
The following trouble, not including all possible troubles, is a help for trouble guide. Please refer to
relevent contents for the inspection, adjustment and replacement of part.

STARTING FAILURE/HARD STARTING

FUEL SYSTEM

1、No oil
2、Fuel filter is clogged
Fuel tank
3、Fuel filter net is clogged
4、Breather tube is clogged
5、Fuel is deteriorated or polluted
Fuel pump 1、Clogged fuel hose
2、Damaged vacuum hose

Air filter Clogged air filter element

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

1、Improper plug gap

Spark plug 2、Worn electrodes
3、Wire between terminals broken
4、Wrong Spark plug heat value
5、Faulty spark plug cap
Ignition coil 1、Broken or shorted primary/secondary
2、Faulty spark plug lead
3、Broken body
1、CDI is failure
CDI system
2、Faulty pickup coil
3、Woodruff key is bad
1、Main switch is bad
2、The engine is off and switch is inefficient
Switches and wires 3、Wires is broken or shortened
6、Faulty gear position switch
7、Faulty brake light switch
1、Faulty starter motor
Starter motor
2、Faulty starter relay
3、Faulty starter clutch
Battery Faulty battery

- 344 -
 TROUBLESHOOTING

COMPRESSION SYSTEM

1、Loose spark plug

2、Loose cylinder head or cylinder
Cylinder and cylinder head
3、Broken cylinder head gasket
4、Broken cylinder gasket
5、Worn, damaged or seized cylinder
Piston and piston rings 1、Improperly installed piston ring
2、Worn, fatigued or broken piston ring
3、Seized piston ring
4、Seized or damaged piston
1、Improperly sealed valve
2、Improperly contacted valve and valve seat
Valve, camshaft and crankshaft
3、Improper valve timing
4、Broken valve spring
5、Seized camshaft
Crankcase and crankshaft
Improperly seated crankcase
Seized crankshaft

Valve train Improperly adjusted valve clearance

Improperly adjusted valve timing

POOR IDLE SPEED PERFORMANCE

POOR IDLE SPEED PERFORMANCE

Carburetor 1、Improperly returned starter plunger
2、Loose pilot jet
3、Clogged pilot jet
4、Clogged pilot air jet
5、Improperly adjusted idle speed (throttle stop screw)
6、Improper throttle cable play
7、Flooded carburetor

Electrical system 1、Faulty spark plug

2、Faulty C.D.I. unit
3、Faulty pickup coil
4、Faulty charging/rotor rotation direction detection coil
5、Faulty ignition coil

Valve train Improperly adjusted valve clearance

- 345 -
 TROUBLESHOOTING

Air filter Clogged air filter element

POOR MEDIUM AND HIGH-SPEED PERFORMANCE

POOR MEDIUM AND HIGH-SPEED PERFORMANCE

Carburetor 1、Improper jet needle clip position
2、Improperly adjusted fuel level
3、Clogged or loose main jet
4、Deteriorated or contaminated fuel
Air filter Clogged air filter element

FAULTY GEAR SHIFTING

SHIFT LEVER DOES NOT MOVE
Shift drum, shift forks 1、Groove jammed with impurities
2、Seized shift fork
3、Bent shift fork guide bar
4、Broken shift guide
Transmission Seized transmission gear
Incorrectly assembled transmission

Shift guide Shift guide

JUMPS OUT OF GEAR

Shift forks Worn shift fork

Shift drum Improper thrust play

Worn shift drum groove

Transmission Worn gear dog

OVERHEATING

OVERHEATING

Ignition system 1、Improper spark plug gap

2、Improper spark plug heat range
3、Faulty C.D.I. unit
Fuel system 1、Improper carburetor main jet (improper setting)
2、Improper fuel level
3、Clogged air filter element

- 346 -
 TROUBLESHOOTING

Compression system Heavy carbon deposit

Engine oil 1、Improper oil level

2、Improper oil viscosity
3、Inferior oil quality
Brake Brake drag

Cooling system 1、Low coolant level

2、Clogged or damaged radiator
3、Damaged or faulty water pump
4、Faulty fan motor
5、Faulty thermo switch

Oil cooling system Clogged or damaged oil cooler

FAULTY BRAKE
POOR BRAKING EFFECT
Disc brake 1、Worn brake pads
2、Worn disc
3、Air in brake fluid
4、Leaking brake fluid
5、Faulty master cylinder kit cup
6、Faulty caliper kit sea
7、Loose union bolt
8、Broken brake hose and pipe
9、Oily or greasy disc/brake pads
10、Improper brake fluid level

SHOCK ABSORBER MALFUNCTION

MALFUNCTION
Shock absorber Bent or damaged damper rod
Damaged oil seal lip
Fatigued shock absorber spring

UNSTABLE HANDLING
UNSTABLE HANDLING
Steering wheel Improperly installed or bent

- 347 -
 TROUBLESHOOTING

Steering 1、Incorrect toe-in

2、Bent steering shaft
3、Improperly installed steering shaft
4、Damaged bearing
5、Bent tie-rods
6、Deformed steering knuckles

Tires 1、Uneven tire pressures on both sides

2、Incorrect tire pressure
3、Uneven tire wear
Wheels 1、Deformed wheel
2、Loose bearing
3、Bent or loose wheel axle
4、Excessive wheel runout
Frame Bent
Damaged frame

LIGHTING SYSTEM
HEAD LIGHT IS OUT OF WORK
Head light is out of work 1、Improper bulb
2、Too many electric accessories
3、Hard charging( broken stator coil and/or faulty rectifier/regulator)
4、Incorrect connection
5、Improperly grounded
6、Bulb life expired
BULB BURNT OUT
BULB BURNT OUT 1、Improper bulb
2、Faulty battery
3、Faulty rectifier/regulator
4、Improperly grounded
5、Faulty main and/or lights switch
6、Bulb life expired

- 348 -